•    l| 
?1 

3 
O 

°§     w 

'Td    <-»• 

re       rn* 

O     S     ^ 
>-»»    C     JS: 

P  S-  ? 

IB  1 

3     g»    «x, 
<-»     w      r. 

5  w 

fD 

(S    ^ 

•-(      N 

re    « 

3     t5! 
M. 

fD      O 

1 

H 

n> 

s 

H 

re    n    h, 

m    re 

u>  ^^ 

r*    O 

H**H 

:mber  31,  1902. 
THE  PHONOGRAPHIC 

i-t 

v; 

0 

-5' 
6' 

3 

• 
3 
CL 

3 

a, 
o 

a 

0 

n 

especially  for  the  purpose  of  encouraging 
s  that  this  offer  is  made.  This  coupon  will 

;  the  best  possible  aid,  not  only  in  mastering 
mation  as  to  shorthand  matters  in  general  a 
lligent  phonographer. 

nn  Pitman  System  of  Phonography.  It  ii 
st  of  learners  of  the  system,  and  is  recon 

PHONOGRAPHIC  MAGAZINE  is  published  monl 

^  1 

o  ^ 

S  § 
v-  S4 

n 
o 
o 

p 

Sa 

a4 

fD 
r* 

3> 

O 
0 
3 

0     3 
g   ^ 

fD      "1 
<->•> 
O     P 

l-(          Ct- 

u  i! 

fD      •-»» 
O 

fD    *"rt 

3    3. 
re    p 

"       rv 

II 

r* 

re    ft 

purchaser  of  this  book  is  entitled  to  receive 

SPECIAL  SUBSCRIPTION 

JEROME  B.  HOWARD,  Ei 

E  PHONOGRAPHIC 

i—  i 

rf 

j     £. 

t/i 

M         t/J 

3 

£ 

• 

O    c 

cL  ° 

H 

0 

w 

H 

j—^ 

2 

c 

o    re 

5"     fj' 

fD      ft 

^5* 

/^^ 

S*  ^~ 

B 

o 

O 

*^^ 

H 

M 

*^5 

S  v52 

re  *-rf 

3      < 

Da      O 

P 

H 

14    o 

~>  3 

M 

c 

r 

r/ 

j 
t—  t 

i 

M 

tances  v 

r*-      ^ 

^  ^ 

re  oq 
"i    "1 

2>  S 

O     w 

g 

n    vi 

re    ;? 

^  3 

p     3 
-t    * 

x   2* 

&      §, 

w    2 

Ha 

fD 

OP 

g,^ 

3   B! 

w" 

!i 

PHONOG 

3 

* 

• 

o 

-, 

jl     O 

o    r* 

C     rt 

0 

•t 

E 

N 

o 

r-t 

«"  "o 

?  3 

3  >i 

r? 

1 

re    o 
o    ^ 

1 

I-H 

- 

P    S 

O     3 

re    P 

—    f 

r»      n>  ' 
0. 

p] 

B 

n 

5"   3 

o 

a^ 

•^ 

Q 

n  OQ 

re 

3    "^ 
p     C 

o   S] 

O 

3. 

«      c 

g 

M 

K-^ 

T; 

"^     *T3 

ET  ^' 

^^- 

^^ 

rn     c-t- 

*> 

• 

J3 

Ei- 

3"  5' 

?  rt. 

'p 

o' 

5i  a* 

o 

. 

51 

o     O 

CT5    OTQ 

fD      O 

3 

3 

re    re 

1 

THE  AMERICAN  SYSTEM  OF  SHORTHAND. 


THE 


Manual  of  Phonography. 


BY 


BENN   PITMAN  AND  JEROME   B.  HOWARD. 


CINCINNATI : 
THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  INSTITUTE  COMPANY. 

NEW  YORK : 

THE   BAKER   AND  TAYLOR  COMPANY. 
1902. 


COPYRIGHT,  1860, 
HY  BENN    PITMAN. 


COPYRIGHT,  1885, 
BY  BENN  PITMAN  AND  JEROME  B.  HOWARD. 


COPYRIGHT,  1897, 
BY  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  INSTITUTE  COMPANY. 


PREFACE. 


This  work  is  a  presentation  of  the  system  of  phonetic  shorthand, 
the  elementary  parts  of  which  were  originally  invented  by  Isaac  Pit- 
man, of  Bath,  England,  in  1837 ;  which  was  modified,  improved,  and 
named  "Phonography"  by  him,  in  1840;  and  which,  developed  and 
perfected  through  the  suggestions,  experiments,  and  tests  of  a  multi- 
tude of  practical  writers  in  England  and  America,  reached,  substan- 
tially, its  present  form  in  the  later  fifties. 

The  first  edition  of  this  Manual,  written  by  Benn  Pitman  (brother 
of  the  inventor  of  phonography)  in  1855,  appeared  in  no  fewer  than 
five  distinct  issues  before  1860,  when  the  work  was  first  revised. 
Numerous  issues  followed  up  to  1885,  in  which  year  it  was  again 
revised  in  collaboration  by  Benn  Pitman  and  Jerome  B.  Howard,  by 
whom  the  present  revised  and  improved  edition  is  also  prepared.  But 
slight  additions  have  been  made  to  the  materiel  of  the  system  in  the 
course  of.  these  several  revisions ;  neither  has  the  plan  of  presentation 
been  essentially  changed,  it  being  felt  that  any  marked  alteration  of 
method  would  be  accompanied  by  a  diminution  of  that  clearness  and 
simplicity  for  which  the  book  has  been  so  long  conspicuous  among 
shorthand  text-books  and  which  have  made  it  so  eminently  successful 
for  both  self  and  class  instruction.  The  chief  advances  in  the  present 
revision  consist  in  a  somewhat  modified  and  improved  order  of  pre- 
senting the  several  appendages,  in  the  earlier  introduction  of  logo- 
grams, with  suitable  exercises,  and  in  the  addition  of  a  new  and  co- 
pious set  of  dictation  exercises. 

It  is  natural,  considering  the  astonishing  spread  of  phonography  of 
late  years,  that  many  variations  upon  the  recognized  system  should  be 
published  and  to  a  limited  extent  adopted.  The  authors  of  this  work 
have  felt,  however,  after  careful  examination  and  test  of  many  hun- 
dreds of  supposed  improvements,  that  they  were,  for  the  most  part, 
the  expression  of  mere  individual  taste  or  caprice.  Those  slight 
changes  and  improvements  adopted  in  the  present  revised  edition  are 

(3) 


THE   MANUAL  OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


believed  to  be  such  as  are  of  real  importance.  They  have  all  stood 
the  test  of  some  years  of  actual  practise  and  have  received  the  general 
approval  of  reporters  and  phoneticians. 

It  is  natural,  too,  that  many  conscientious  teachers,  zealous  to  help 
their  students  over  the  road  to  phonographic  proficiency  in  the  short- 
est possible  time,  should  have  worked  out  what  they  believe  to  be 
improved  modes  of  presenting  the  system,  and  we  have,  therefore, 
had  offered  to  us  a  remarkable  variety  of  "  short-cut"  methods  pur- 
porting to  teach  "the  reporting  style  from  the  beginning."  The 
essential  fallacy  which  underlies  these  endeavors  to  impart  a  working 
knowledge  of  the  abbreviated  form  of  phonography  before  giving  the 
student  a  rational  understanding  of  the  system  in  its  broad,  element- 
ary aspect,  has  been  generally  recognized  by  enlightened  teachers. 
Continued  experience  amply  demonstrates  that  in  phonography,  as  in 
some  other  things,  "  the  longest  way  'round  is  the  shortest  way  home." 
Sound  reporting  habits  can  not  be  developed  by  methods  of  instruc- 
tion which  neglect  thorough  training  in  the  elementary  parts  of  the 
system.  The  "  corresponding  style,"  too  often  despised  for  its  own 
sake,  is  found,  after  all,  to  be  the  safest  and  shortest  road  by  which 
the  learner  may  reach  the  coveted  skill  of  the  amanuensis  or  reporter. 

It  will  be  perceived  from  the  foregoing  that  the  present  work  is  the 
oldest  as  well  as  the  newest  shorthand  instruction-book  now  in  print 
in  this  country.  It  has  been  for  over  forty  years  the  standard  text- 
book of  phonography  in  America,  while  the  form  of  phonography  it 
presents,  and  which  through  it  has  come  to  be  often  called  "  the  Benn 
Pitman  system,"  is  written  by  a  very  large  majority  of  American  pho- 
nographers.  This  fact  received  signal  recognition  when  the  following 
words  were  printed  in  the  report  of  the  United  States  Commissioner 
of  Education  for  the  year  1887-88:  "To  supply  the  increasing  de- 
mand for  stenographers,  schools  of  shorthand  and  typewriting  have 
been  established  in  various  parts  of  the  country,  and,  with  few  excep- 
tions, all  business  colleges  now  have  a  'department  of  shorthand.' 
A  number  of  systems  are  taught  but  that  of  Benn  Pitman  is  more 
generally  used  than  any  other  in  this  country,  and  may  be  called  the 
American  System.'' 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

Preface 3 

Introduction 9 

Table  of  Consonants 13 

Consonants 14 

Exercise  on  Consonants 15 

Consonants — Continued 16 

Exercise  on  Joined  Consonants — with  Angles 17 

Consonants — Concluded 18 

Exercise  on  Joined  Consonants — without  Angles 19 

Long  Vowels ...  20 

Exercise  on  Vowels  Following  Consonants 21 

Exercise  on  Vowels  Preceding  Consonants 21 

Long  Vowels — Concluded      22 

Exercise  on  Words  Contaning  Long  Vowels 23 

Short  Vowels 24 

Exercise  on  Short  Vowels 25 

Diphthongs 26 

Exercise  on  the  Diphthongs 27 

Coalescents 28 

Exercise  on  the  Coalescents 29 

Concurrent  Vowels 30 

Exercise  on  Concurrent  Vowels 31 

The  Aspirate  . 32 

Exercise  on  the  Aspirate 33 

Upward  and  Downward  L,  R,  and  Sh 34 

Exercise  on  Upward  and  Downward  L  and  R 35 

Logograms 36 

Exercise  on  Vowel  Logograms 37 

Consonant  Logograms 38 

Exercise  on  Consonant  Logograms 39 

Consonant  Logograms — Concluded 4° 

The  Nominal  Consonant •    •  4° 

Exercise  on  Consonant  Logograms — II 41 

Diphthong,  Coalescent  and  Aspirate  Logograms 42 

Exercise  on  Diphthong,  Coalescent  and  Aspirate  Logograms 43 

Appendages 44 

Circles  S  and  Z 44 

Exercise  on  the  Circles  S  and  Z 45 

(5) 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Circles  S  and  Z — Concluded 46 

Words  containing  Circles  S  and  Z 47 

Circle  Ses,  Sez,  Zes,  Zez 48 

Exercise  on  the  Large  Circles 49 

Loop-st 50 

Loop-str 50 

Exercise  on  the  Loop-st 51 

Exercise  on  the  Loop-str 51 

Circle  and  Loop  Logograms 52 

Exercise  on  the  Circle  and  Loop  Logograms.  .    .• 53 

The  N-hook 54 

Exercise  on  the  N-hook : 55 

The  F-V  Hook 56 

Exercise  on  the  F-V  Hook 57 

The  Shun-hook 58 

Exercise  on  the  Shun-hook 59 

Final-hook  Logograms 60 

Punctuation,  etc 60 

Exercise  on  the  Final-hook  Logograms 61 

The  Small  W-hook 62 

Exercise  on  the  Small  W-hook 63 

Double  Consonants 64 

Exercise  on  the  L-hook 65 

Double  Consonants — Continued 66 

Exercise  on  the  R-hook 67 

Double  Consonants — Concluded 68 

Exercise  on  the  Irregular  Double  Consonants 69 

Exercise  on  Intervocalization 69 

Triple  and  Quadruple  Consonants 70 

Exercise  on  Triple  and  Quadruple  Consonants 71 

The  Backward  N-hook 72 

The  Large  W-hook 72 

Exercise  on  the  Backward  N-hook 73 

Exercise  on  the  Large  W-hook 73 

Initial-hook  Logograms 74 

Initials,  etc 74 

Exercise  on  the  Initial-hook  Logogram;. 75 

The  Halving  Principle 76 

Exercise  on  the  Halving  Principle 77 

The  Halving  Principle — Concluded 78 

Exercise  on  the  Halving  Principle. — II 79 

Half-length  Logograms So 

Exercise  on  the  Half-length  Logograms Si 

Half-length  Logograms — Concluded 82 

Omitted  Consonants.  .                                                                                    82 


THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


PAGE. 

Exercise  on  the  Half-length  Logograms — II 83 

The  Doubling  Principle 84 

Exercise  on  the  Doubling  Principle 85 

Double-length  Logograms 86 

Compounded  Logograms 86 

Exercise  on  the  Double-length  Logograms 87 

The  Ticks 88 

Disjoined  Affixes 88 

Exercise  on  the  Tick-the 89 

Exercise  on  the  Tick  A-an-and 89 

Disjoined  Affixes — Concluded 90 

Exercise  on  the  Disjoined  Suffixes 91 

Exercise  on  the  Disjoined  Prefixes 91 

Outline  Formation 92 

Exercises  in  the  Corresponding  Style 93 

Outlines  of  Words  of  Frequent  Occurrence,  Unnecessary  to  Vocalize   ....  102 

Table  of  Grammalogues 103 

Table  of  Logograms 106 

Writing  Exercises , 109 

The  Reporting  Style 172 

Reporting  Logograms 177 

Contractions 178 

Phrases 179 

Words,  Contractions  and  Phrases  for  Business  Amanuenses.    ........  180 

Exercises  in  the  Easy  Reporting  Style 181 

Appendix  A — Speech 189 

Appendix   B — A   Scheme  of  Phonographic   Notation  by   Means  of  Common 

Types 193 

Appendix  C — Extended  Alphabet 195 

Index 197 


THE 


MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


INTRODUCTION. 

1.  Sound-Writing. — Phonography  is  the  art  of  writing  according 
to  sound.     This  is  done  by  means  of  signs  which  represent  the  sounds 
of  speech.     A  scientific  system  of  phonetic  writing  must  give  to  each 
elementary  sound  of  the  language  a  separate  and  distinct  sign,  which 
sign  shall  under  all  circumstances  represent  its  own  proper  sound  and 
it  only.     This  phonography  does,  and  as  the  signs  are  of  the  shortest 
and  most  easily-formed  kind,  phonography  is,  as  a  matter  of  necessity, 
a  brief  and  practical  system  of  shorthand. 

2.  Deficiencies  of  the  Roman  Alphabet. — The  ordinary  longhand 
script  is  utterly  inadequate  for  the  purpose  of  rapid  writing.    Not  only 
is  the  outline  of  the  letters  needlessly  long  and  complicated,  but  the 
letters  are  not  sufficient  in  number  to  represent  the  English  language 
phonetically.     With  only  twenty-six  letters  (of  which  three  are  prac- 
tically useless)  we  are  required  to  write  a  language  which  contains 
more  than  forty  elementary  sounds.    Some  of  these  elements  must  un- 
der such  circumstances  be  represented  by  the  clumsy  expedient  of  com- 
bining two  or  more  letters  to  represent  a  single  sound.    Thus,  there  is 
no  single  letter  to  stand  for  the  first  sound  in  the  word  thy,  nor  one  for 
that  which  ends  the  word  sing.     But  the  worst  feature  of  our  ordinary 
orthography  is  that  no  single  sound  is  represented  uniformly  by  any 
one  sign  or  combination  of  signs.     Thus,  although  the  same  sound 
begins  the  words  fall  and  phrase,  this  sound  is  represented  in  one  case 
by  f  and  in  the  other  by  ph  ;  the  vowel  sound  heard  in  the  words  ape, 
aim,  veil,  day,  grey,  sleigh,  though  one  and  the  same  in  all,  is  variously 
represented  by  a,  at,  ei,  ay,  ey,  eigh.     Irregularities  of  this  kind  abound 
to  such  an  extent  in  the  ordinary  representation  of  English  as  to  make 
"orthography"  a  distinct  branch  of  education,  to  acquire  a  tolerable 
mastery  of  which  several  years  of  school  life  must  be  given. 

(9) 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


3.  The  Phonetic  Alphabet. — In  phonography  the  simple  plan  is 
adopted  of  spelling  each  word  exactly  according  to  its  sounds.     Every 
sound  has  its  own  sign  which  is  used  for  it  and  for  no  other  sound. 
The  consonants  are  represented  by  lines — straight  and  curved— while 
the  vowels  are  written  by  small  signs — dots  and  dashes — placed  beside 
the  consonant  signs.     From  the  nature  of  the  phonographic  system, 
the  consonants  must  be  considered  first.     The  term  "consonant"  is 
here  used  as  meaning  any  sound  which  is  not  a  vowel.    For  a  scientific 
classification  of  the  sounds  of  the  English  language  see  Appendix  A. 

4.  Consonants. — The  strokes  which  are  used  in  phonography  to 
represent  the  consonants  are  derived  from  the  following  geometrical 


diagrams     r — — j     (     .X     1     Tt  will  be  seen  that  the  circumference 

of  the  circle  is  divided  into  four  equal  parts,  first;  by  a  horizontal  and 
a  vertical  line,  and  second,  by  lines  slanting  to  the  right  and  to  the 
left  midway  between  the  horizontal  and  vertical  lines.  This  gives  in 
all  four  straight  lines  and  eight  curves,  clearly  distinguished  from 
each  other  by  form  or  direction.  If  these  twelve  strokes  be  made 
both  light  and  heavy  we  have  a  total  of  twenty-four  strokes  suitable 
for  the  representation  of  the  cpnsonants. 

5.  Explodents. — Those  consonants  which  are  abrupt  and  explosive 
in  their  nature  are  called  explodents  and  they  are  uniformly  repre- 
sented by  the  straight  lines,  as  follows  : 

p         b  t         d  ch         j  kg 

\  \  I  '       /    / 

Lips  Teeth  Hard  palate          Soft  palate 

The  order  in  which  these  sounds  are  arranged  accords  with  the  posi- 
tion of  the  articulating  organs  by  which  they  are  obstructed,  beginning 
with  the  lips,  the  most  external,  and  proceeding  in  regular  order  back 
to  the  soft  palate,  the  most  internal. 

6.  Shade. — It  will  be  seen  that  advantage  is  taken  of  the  relation- 
ship existing  between  the  whispered  and  voiced  consonants  to  represent 
the  whispered  member  of  each  pair  by  a  light  sign  and  the  voiced 
sound  by  the  same  sign  thickened.     Similar  sounds  are  thus  repre- 
sented by  similar  signs.     The  mind  perceives  and  the  hand  feels  the 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


consistency  of  making  a  thin  stroke  for  a  light  sound  and  a  heavier 
stroke  for  its  deeper  and  louder  mate. 

7.  Continuants.  —  The    continuants,    as    their   name    implies,    are 
sounds  capable  of  an  indefinite  degree  of  prolongation.     They  are 
uniformly  represented  by  curved  lines.     The  continuants  are  divided 
into  three  classes  called,  according  to  the  nature  of  their  articulation, 
fricatives,  liquids,  and  nasals. 

8.  Fricatives.  —  The    fricatives   are    those   continuants   which   are 
produced  by  means  of  a  friction  or  rustling  of  the  breath  upon  the 
organs  of  articulation   through   a  much  contracted,  though  not  quite 
closed,  opening.     Like  the  explodents,  they  exist  uniformly  in  pairs, 
and  the   distinction  between  the  whispered  and  voiced  members  of 
each   pair   is    maintained    by   making    the    strokes    light    and   heavy. 
They  are 

f       v  th     dh  s     z  sh     zh 


Lips  Teeth  Hard  palate 

9.  Liquids.  —  The  liquids  are  less  closely  obstructed  than  the  frica- 
tives, and  take  their  name  from  the  fact   that   their   flowing  nature 
enables  them  to  combine  readily  with  other  consonants.     They  are 

1  r 

r         ^ 

10.  Nasals.  —  Nasals  are  obstructed  in  such  a  manner  as  to  force 
the  expired  breath  through  the   nose.      They  are  all  represented  by 
horizontal  curves,  thus  : 

m  n  ng 

11.  Coalescents.  —  All   the  obstructed  sounds  of  the  language  are 
thus  provided  with  signs.     It  is  necessary,  however,  for  practical  con- 
venience, to  provide  strokes  for  the  representation  of  w  and  y,  sounds 
which  hold  a  middle  position  between  consonants  and  vowels.     These 
sounds  occur  only  immediately  preceding  a  vowel  with  which  they 
intimately  combine,  and  they  are  therefore  termed  coalescents.     They 
are  written  in  phonography 

w  y 

^\  r 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


12.  Aspirate. — Practical  convenience  demands  that  the  unobstructed 
whisper,  or  aspirate,  //,  shall  also  be  given  a  stroke  sign, 

h 

'S* 

13.  Supplementary  Strokes. — Besides  the  foregoing  signs,  we  have 

x^"  as  an  additional  stroke  for  r  (the  sign  being  more  slanting  than 
that  for  ch),  and  the  stroke  >"^  which  is  not  needed  for  the  representa- 
tion of  any  elementary  sound  and  which  is  usefully  employed  to  write 
the  frequent  combination  tnp,  and  rarely  nib. 

14.  Tabulation. — The  table  on  the  following  page  shows  the  con- 
sonant signs  divided  into  groups  according  to  the  classes  of  sounds 
represented.     In  the  second  column  a  name  is  provided  for  each  con- 
sonant for  convenience  in  speaking  of  it.     It  must,  however,  be  clearly 
understood  that,  although  the  name  of  \  is  "  pe,"  its  value  in  writing 
words  is'simply  the  whispered  sound  heard  at  the  beginning  of  the 
word/w/  or  at  the  end  of  the  word  rope,  as  shown  in  the  third  column. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  sound  J  does  not  begin  or  end  any  true 
English  word.  It  is  heard,  however,  medially  in  many  words  like 
pleasure,  treasure,  vision,  etc.  In  the  last  column  are  given  the  letters 
which  most  frequently  represent  the  consonants  in  ordinary  spelling. 
"  Dh  "  is  used  to  indicate  the  voiced  sound  heard  at  the  beginning  of 
thy,  as  the  ordinary  spelling  does  not  employ  a  distinctive  sign  or  even 
a  distinctive  combination  of  signs  to  represent  this  sound.  The  letters 
in  this  column  are  printed  in  accordance  with  the  scheme  of  typic  no- 
tation shown  in  Appendix  B. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.                                        13 

CONSONANTS, 

their  Signs,  Names  and  Powers. 

PHONOGRAPH. 

NAME. 

EXAMPLE   OF    ITS    POWER. 

LETTER. 

Initial.                 Final. 

\ 
\ 

pe 

be 

/ost              ro/e 
^oast            ro^e 

P 

B 

te 

/eem             fa/e 

T 

Explodcnts     • 

/ 

de 
chay 

deem            fade 
chest             etch 

D 
Ch 

/ 

jay 

jest               edge 

J 

— 

kay 

cane              loc^ 

K 

_  

gay 

£-ain              log 

G 

'   ^. 

ef 

/ear              sa/e 

F 

^ 

ve 

z/eer              save 

V 

1. 

c 

\ 

ith 
the 

//zigh            wrea/>4 
fhy                 \\rea.the 

Th 
Dh 

1 

) 

ess 

sea\               hiss 

S 

^ 

\ 

ze 

zeal               his 

Z 

J 

-     ish 

sure              lash 

Sh 

Continuants  • 

^ 

J 

\  r 

zhe 
-    lay 

your  (Fr.)    rou^e 
/u//                fa// 

Zh 
L 

Kj         I                   \ 

ar 

roar              for 

R 

\ 

em 

met               seem 

M 

|    J    _ 

en 

net                 seen 

N 

I  <i/ 

ing 

....               si«f 

Ng 

Coalescents  •>       ., 

way 

yea 

jet 

W 
Y 

Aspirate       ^^ 

hay 

//and               .... 

H 

Supplementary     '  / 
Strokes             I   x-^ 

ray 

einp 

roar             for 
....              caw/ 

Mf 

14  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


CONSONANTS. 

15.  Direction  of  Strokes. — Of  the  consonants  on  the  opposite  page 
every  straight  line  is  written  in  the  direction  of  one  of  the  lines  in  the 
first  of  the  following  diagrams,  in  which  the  lines  are  so  drawn 
as  to  end  at  a  common  point.  Number  2  is  horizontal,  number  4 
vertical,  and  number  3  just  midway  between  them.  Number  I  slopes 
at  an  angle  of  30  degrees,  and  number  5  at  an  angle  of  60  degrees, 
from  the  horizontal  base-line  upon  which  phonography  is  always  sup- 
posed to  be  written.  The  curves  are  written  in  the  directions  shown 
in  the  other  two  diagrams.  In  both,  lines  2  and  4  are  horizontal  and 
vertical,  respectively,  and  all  remaining  lines  exactly  half  way  between. 


16.  Direction  of  Writing.— All  horizontal  strokes  are  written  from 
left  to  right.     All  vertical  and  slanting  strokes  from  top  to  bottom 
with  the  following  exceptions  :  ^^  and  <z       are  invariably  written 
up ;  (     and  _J  may  be  written  either  up  or  down. 

17.  The  Base-Line. — Upright  and  slanting  phonographic  charac- 
ters are  so  written  as  to  rest  upon  a  horizontal  base-line  ;  that  is,  the 
lowest  point  of  each  should  exactly  touch  the  line.     Horizontal  straight 
strokes  should  exactly  coincide  with   the  base-line,  while  horizontal 
curves  should  be  written  in  such  a  manner  that  the  base-line  will  form 
the  chord  of  the  arc  formed  by  the  stroke  itself,  thus ^rr^..^..^,.. 

18  Size  of  Strokes. — The  strokes  should  not  at  first  be  made 
smaller  than  on  the  following  page.  This  size  is  the  one  most  likely 
to  insure  to  the  learner  accuracy  and  neatness  in  writing.  When  all 
the  exercises  in  this  book  have  been  carefully  practised,  the  size  of 
I  may  with  advantage  be  reduced  to  one-eighth  of  an  inch. 

19.  Shade. — The  heavy  curves  should  not  be  made  heavy  through- 
out, but  merely  in  the  middle,  tapering  toward  each   end.      Let  the 
distinction  between   light  and  heavy  strokes  be   made  by  writing  the 
light  strokes  very  light,  not  by  making  the  heavy  strokes  very  heavy. 

20.  Method   of  Practise. — The  opposite  page,  as  well  as  all  the 
shorthand  exercises  that  follow,  should  be  first  read  (each  stroke  as  it 
is  named  being  traced  with  a  dry  pen),  and  afterwards  written  in  the 
copy-book  (see  "  Directions  to  the  Student,"  page  109),   each  letter 
being  pronounced  aloud  as  it  is  written.     Rewrite  as  often  as  neces- 
sary in  order  to  produce  absolutely  accurate  outlines. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  the  Consonants. 

PB       \\        \\  \\        \\       \\  \\ 

TD       I   I                 II  M              M           II  II 

ChJ      //          //  //           //        //  // 


F.V 

ThDh  ((  ((  ((  ((  ((  (( 

S     Z  ))  ))  ))  ))  )>  )) 

ShZh  JJ        JJ       JJ       JJ        JJ        JJ 

L  rrrrrrrrrr 

R  ^^^^^^^^"^"^ 


W 

Y    rrrrrrrrrr 
H    ////////  /  s 


1 6  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


CONSONANTS.— Continued. 

21.  Combinations  of  Consonants. — All  the  consonants  of  a  com- 
bination or  word  must  be  written  without  lifting  the  pen,  the  second 
stroke  beginning  where  the  first  ends,  the  third  beginning  at  the  end 
of  the  second,  etc.     See  lines  I  to  3. 

22.  Strokes  of  Variable  Direction. — When  consonants  are  joined 
to  each  other  they  should  be  written  in  the  same  direction  as  when 
standing  alone,  except  s  J/^,  which  when  standing  alone  is  written 
down,  but  when  joined  to  another  stroke  may  be  written  either  up 
or  down ;  and   f.    /,  which  when  standing  alone  is  written  up,  but 
when  joined  to  another  stroke  may  be  written   either  up  or  down. 
Upward .)  is  named  j/«y  and  downward    )  w//  ;  upward  f  is  named 
lay  and  downward  (ft* 

23.  The  Base-Line. — All  phonographic  outlines  are  written  with 
reference  to  a  base-line,  either  imaginary  or,  what  is  much  to  be  pre- 
ferred,  actually  ruled  on  the  paper.     Various  kinds  of  combinations 
are  written  with  regard  to  the  line  as  follows; 

a.  Combinations  of  horizontal  letters  should  rest  upon  the  line. 
See  line  4. 

b.  Combinations   containing   but   one    descending  or    ascending 
stroke  rest  on  the  line.     See  lines  5  to  10. 

c.  In    combinations  where   a  horizontal  stroke  is  followed  by  a 
descending  one  the  first  stroke  should  be  written  sufficiently  high  to 
allow  the  second  to  rest  upon  the  line.     See  line  II. 

d.  When  two  descending  strokes  are  combined,  as  in  lines  12  to 
14,  the   first  should  be  written    down   to   the   line    and    the  second 
below  it. 

e.  When   two  ascending  strokes  are   combined    the  first  begins 
upon  the  line.     See  line  15. 

24.  Checks. — In  every  case  there  is  a  distinct  angle  between  the 
consonants  as  combined  on  the  opposite  page.     These  ingles  should 
be  clearly  formed  in   writing  and  there  should  be  a  slight  pause  or 
check  of  the  hand  at  each  angle,  so  that  the  momentum  of  the  hand 
acquired  in  writing  the  preceding  stroke  shall  not  produce  any  dis- 
tortion in  the  form  of  the  stroke  which  follows. 

See  directions  to  the  student,  page  109.  and  writing  exercises  page  112. 


THE    MANUAL    OB   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  Joined  Consonants.  —  With  Angles. 


n 


r    r 


u 


3  X^ 

4  , — ^ 

sL_       U      L_ 

6  ^V— .     Z_          /-^       /--. 


S-    t-    ^    L. 


L     U    L_  N^ 

L_     U    \_  A 
A     C      C 


^i     S    S 


l8  THE    MANUAL   OF*PHONOGRAPHY. 


CONSONANTS.— Concluded. 

25.  Continuous  Joinings. — When  there  is  no  angle  between  two 
adjacent  strokes  in  a  combination,  there  should  be  no  check  or  pause 
of  the  hand  between  them  and  the  movement  should  be  smooth  and 
continuous  from  the  beginning  of  the  first  stroke  to  the  end  of  the 
second.     Such  joinings  are  of  various  kinds  according  to  the  relation 
of  the  strokes  to  each  other:  a.  Straight  strokes  doubled  (see  line  l) ; 
/>.  Adjacent  quadrants  (see  line  2) ;  c.  Tangent  joinings  of  (i)  straight 
strokes  with  curves  (see  lines  3  and  4)  and  (2)  opposite  curves  (see 
line  5). 

26.  Modified  Shadings. — When  heavy  strokes  are  joined  without 
angles  they  often  lose  or  gain  shading  at  some  part  of  their  length. 
a.  When  a  heavy  straight  stroke  is  joined  to  a  light  stroke  it  is  written 
wedge-shaped  so  that  there  shall  be  no  shade  at  the  point  of  joining. 
See  lines  6  and  7.     b.   When  a  heavy  curve  joins  a  heavy  stroke  it  is 
made  heavy  throughout  the  entire  half  which  lies  next  to  the  joining. 
See  line  8. 

27.  Slurs. — Certain   joinings  of  /   and  /    with    the   curves  \     \ 
)     ),   and  of   /^     with   ^_^   -^s   '  "*•  ' — -    strictly    require    a   slight 

angle  at  the  point  of  joining.  In  practise,  however,  this  angle  is 
ignored  and  the  two  strokes  are  written  with  continuous  motion. 
See  line  9.  In  like  manner  the  joinings  of  /  and  .svfc  with  (  (  )  ) 

^~~*   s~~^   ^. '    x /  and   with  each  other  are  written  with  continuous 

motion,  eliminating  the  angle  which  strictly  belongs  at  the  point 
of  joining.  See  line  10.  These  modified  joinings  are  called  slurs. 

28.  Utility  of  Continuous  Joinings. — The  joinings  on  the  opposite 
page  are  usually  somewhat  difficult  for  beginners  to  form.     When, 
however,  they  have  been  completely  mastered,  they  impart  exceeding 
grace  and  fleetness  to  the  movement  of  the  hand,  and  the  outlines  in 
which  they  occur  are  among  the  most  rapidly-formed  in  phonography. 
They  should  therefore  be  carefully  practised  ;    but  the  learner  should 
not  try  to  write  them  rapidly  at  first.     Extreme  care  should  be  taken 
to  get  correct  proportions.     Speed  and  ease  in  writing  them  will  come 
if  the  outlines  are  slowly  and  carefully  written  many  times.     This  is 
indeed  true  of  all  phonographic  outlines,  but  especially  so  of  those 
written  with  continuous  motion. 


THE   MANUAL  OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  Joined   Consonants. — Without  Angles. 

I'//—' 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


LONG  VOWELS. 

29.  The  Vowel  Scale. — The  alphabet  of  a  language  professedly 
contains  a  letter  for  every  sound  heard  in  the  distinct  utterance  of 
that  language.     The  Roman  alphabet  does  not,  as  has  been  shown, 
provide  a  sufficient   number  of  letters  to  represent  the   obstructed 
sounds,  or  consonants,  of  the  English  language ;    it  is  still  more  de- 
ficient in  providing  representative  signs  for  the  unobstructed  voiced 
sounds,  or  vowels,  of  the  language.     In   phonography  the  a-e-i-o-n 
scale  is  therefore  abandoned,  and  one  more  philosophic  and  "complete 
adopted  in  its  stead. 

30.  The  Long  Vowels. — Provision  is  first  made  for  the  six  primary 
or  long  vowels  of  the  language,  as  heard  in  the  following  words: 

eel  aim  alms  all  old  ooze 

31.  Long  Vowel  Signs. — The  first  three  sounds  are  represented  by 
a  dot  placed  respectively  at  the  beginning,  middle,  and  end  of  a  conso- 
nant ;  the  last  three  by  a  short  stroke  or  dash  similarly  placed.     These 
dots  and  dashes  are  written  close  to,  but  should  not  touch,  the  stroke 
consonant  to  which  they  are  placed  ;  thus, 


e  a  ah  aw  0  00 

The  upright  line  (the  sign  for  t)  to  which  the  vowel-signs  are  here  writ- 
ten, is  used  merely  to  indicate  the  places  of  the  vowels,  at  the  beginning, 
middle,  and  end  of  the  consonant.  These  signs  may  be  conveniently 
designated  as  first-place,  second-place,  and  third-place  vowels. 

32.  Direction  of  Dashes.  —  The  dashes  have  the  same  relative 
direction  to  all  strokes  ;  that  is,  they  are  placed  at  right  angles  to  the 
stroke  no  matter  what  its  direction  may  be.  When  written  to  curves, 
dashes  are  always  at  right  angles  to  the  imaginary  line  which  joins 


-•- 
the  beginning  and  end  of  the  curve;  thus,  _\_ 

33.  Order  of  Reading.  —  A  vowel-sign,  when  written  on  the  left 
side  of  an  upright  or  sloping  stroke,  is  read  before  the  stroke  to  which 
it  is  placed  ;  when  written  on  the  right  side,  it  is  read  after  the  stroke 
to  which  it  is  placed.  When  a  vowel-sign  is  written  to  a  horizontal 
character,  it  is  read  before  when  placed  above,  and  after  when  placed 
below  the  stroke. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  Vowels  Following  Consonants. 

i-         i.         r        K      L 


>         ).        r 


r       C 


Exercise  on  Vowels  Preceding  Consonants. 

•i  i          "I          -I          -I 


.r      r       r      ^r      r 


14 


-) 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


LONG  VOWELS.— Concluded. 

34.  Vowel  Places. — The  unvarying  rule  for  placing  and  reading 
the  vowel-signs,  is  to  reckon  from  the  beginning  of  the  stroke  to  which 
they  are  attached.     Thus,  the  strokes^    xxx"    and  ^^ being  writ- 
ten upward,  the  vowel  places  are  reckoned  from  the  bottom,  that  is, 
from  the  beginning  of  the  stroke. 

35.  Names  of  the  Vowels. — The   vowels  should  always  be  pro- 
nounced as  single  sounds ;  thus,  e,  as  heard  at  the  beginning  of  eel ;  a, 
as  in  ape;  ah,  as  at  the  beginning  of  arm  (not  as  a-attch) ;  au  as  awe 
(not  a-you) ;  o  as  owe ;  oo  as  at  the  beginning  of  ooze  (not  as  double-o). 

36.  Consonants  Written  First. — All    the    consonants  of  a  word 
must  be  written  without  lifting  the  pen,  and  the  vowel  or  vowels 
written  afterward.     The  consonants  of  a  word  form  what  is  termed 
its  phonographic  outline,  or  skeleton. 

37.  Phonetic  Spelling. — Such  are  the  deficiencies  of  the  common 
alphabet,  and  the  consequent  unphonetic  character  of  English  ortho- 
graphy, that  the  spelling  of  a  word  can  seldom  be  taken  as  a  guide 
to  its   pronunciation.     In   writing   phonographically,    therefore,    the 
student   must  note  what  are  the  actual  sounds  of  which  a  word  is 
composed,  and  then  write  the  signs  provided  for  the  representation 
of  those  sounds.     It  may  not  at  first  be  easy  for  the  student  to  de- 
termine what  are  the  exact  sounds  in  any  given  word,  but  the  difficulty 
of  determining  will   diminish  at  every  attempt,  and  the  practise  of 
noting  the  deliberate  utterance  of  a  word,  as  distinct  from  its  usual 
colloquial  sound,  will  tend  to  give  accuracy  and  finish  to  the  student's 
own  pronunciation. 

38.  Method  of  Practise. — It  is  advised  that  before  attempting 
to  write  the  exercise  on  page  114,  the  student  spell  every  word  in  it 
phonetically ;  that  is  to  say,  analyze  each  word  into  its  phonetic 
elements ;  that  is  to  say,  determine  what  consonants  and  vowels  are 
heard  in  the  word,  and  in  what  order.  Thus  the  word  take  contains 
but  three  elements — first,  the  consonant  /,  second,  the  vowel  a  (second- 
place  dot),  and  third,  the  consonant  k ;  though  has  only  two  elements — 
the  consonant  dk,  and  the  vowel  6  (second-place  dash.)  This  practise 
need  not  be  confined  to  the  writing  exercises,  and  should  be  pursued 
persistently  until  all  difficulty  is  entirely  overcome. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY 


Exercise  on  Words  Containing  Long  Vowels. 

<• 


A     __    < 


J 


c 

v 


\  V" 


X] 


X 


> 

XI        XT      XI 


'x     A 


r 


A" 


24  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

SHORT  VOWELS. 

39.  Short  Vowel  Scale. — In  addition  to  the  six  long  vowels,  there 
are  six  short  vowels  used  in  English  speech,  as  heard  in  the  following 
words : 

it  ell  am  odd  up  pull 

Between  the  short  and  long  vowels  there  exists  a  close  relationship, 
which  results  from  the  fact  that  the  position  of  the  organs  of  speech 
in  pronouncing  the  long  vowels  is  nearly  the  same  as  that  required 
for  the  utterance  of  the  short  ones,  as  will  be  perceived  on  pronounc- 
ing the  words, 

eat  ale  alms  awed  ope  pool 

40.  Short  Vowel  Signs. — The  short  vowels  are  therefore  appro- 
priately represented   by   dots  and   dashes,   written    in    the   same   places 
as  for  the    long   vowels,  but    made    light    to    indicate    their   briefer 
character.     Light  dots  may  be  written  with  a  mere  touch  of  pen  or 
pencil  to  the  paper.     A  little  pressure  which  causes  a  slight  separa- 
tion of  the  pen  points  will  produce  a  heavy  dot,  and  with  a  pencil 
the  same  effect  is  produced  by  giving  it  a  very  slight  turn  between 
the  thumb  and  finger.     Avoid  the  vicious  method  of  making  dots  of 
any  kind  by  drawing  a  small  circle  and  "filling  in." 

41.  Vowels  between  Consonants. — When  a  vowel  is  to  be  writ- 
ten between  two  consonant  strokes,  it  is  possible  to  write  it  either 
after  the  first,  or  before   the   second   stroke.     If,  however,  a  vowel 
falls  within  the  apex  of  the  angle   it  becomes  ambiguous,  since  it  is 
possible  to  read  it  as  a  third-place  vowel  after  the  first  stroke  or  as  a 

first-place   vowel    before  the  second  stroke;  thus  [ might  be  read 

either  tick  or  tack.     To  avoid  such  ambiguity  it  is  only  necessary  to 
observe  the  following  rules : 

a.  First-place  vowels  are  written  after  the  first  consonant. 

b.  Second-place  vowels  are  written  after  the  first  consonant  when 
they  are    long,  and  before  the   second  when    they  are  short.     (The 
length  of  a  second-place  vowel  is  thus  determined  by  the  consonant  to 
which  it  is  written,  if  it  should  not  be  by  its  size. ) 

c.  Third-place  vowels  are  written  before  the  second  consonant. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  Short  Vowels. 


r 


V       L_ 


5- 


L_ 


Cr 


\ 


26  THE  MANUAL  OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


DIPHTHONGS. 

42.  Vowel  Glides. — A  diphthong  is  not  a  simple  speech-element,  but 
is  the  result  of  continuous  voice-production  during  a  change  made  in  the 
shape  of  the  oral  cavity.     A  diphthong  may  therefore  be  described  as  a 
glide  from  the  position  of  one  vowel  to  that  of  another.     There  are  but 
three  diphthongs  in  our  language,  and  they  may  be  heard  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  words  isle,  oil,  owl,  respectively. 

43.  Diphthong-Signs. — As  the  diphthongs  are  compound  sounds,  so 
they  are  represented  by  compound  signs :  /  is  a  glide  from  the  position  of 

•  v 

m    to  the  position  of        and  is  written  See  lines  i  to  6.      Oi  is  a 

glide  from  the  position  of     |   to  the  position  of         and  is  written 
See  lines  7  to  9.     Ow  is  a  glide  from  the  position  of  ,     to  the  position  of 


and  is  written 


See  lines  10  to  12.     In  writing  these  characters, 


both  strokes  should  be  formed  before  lifting  the  pen  from  the  paper. 

44.  Places  of  Diphthong-Signs. — The  place  of  a  diphthong-sign  is 
properly  determined  by  that  of  the  final  vowel  of  the  glide.     /  and  oi  are 
therefore  written  in  the  first  place  and  ow  in  the  third.     However,  as  v  is 
represented  by  an  absolute  sign,  that  is,  one  which  does  not  depend  upon 
its  place  for  its  legibility,  it  may,  for  greater  convenience,  be  written  in 
any  place.     The  rules  given  in  par.  41  apply  to  diphthongs  as  well  as  to 
vowels.     Oi  is  written  after  the  first  and  ow  before  the  second  of  two  con- 
sonants between  which  they  occur.    /  may  be  written  either  after  the  first, 
or  before  the  second  consonant. 

45.  Direction  of   Diphthong-Signs  Invariable. — The  diphthong- 
signs  should  always  point  exactly  up  and  down.    They  never  change  their 
direction  to  correspond  with  that  of  the  stroke  to  which  they  may  happen 
to  be  written.     In  this  respect  they  are  unlike  the  dash  vowel-signs. 
Compare  par.  32. 

46.  Joined  Diphthong-Signs. — When  i  or  oi  begins  a  word,  and 
when  i  or  ow  'ends  a  word,  the  diphthong-sign  may  be  joined  to  the  ad- 
jacent stroke  without  lifting  the  pen  whenever  it  forms  a  distinct  angle 
with  it.     See  lines  13  to  15. 

NOTE. — On  account  of  its  great  frequency  the  word  now  may  be  imperfectly 
but  conveniently  vocalized  by  attaching  only  the  second  half  of  the  diphthong- 
sign  without  lifting  the  pen  ;  thus  v — **  now. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


27 


A 


A( 


13 


15 


Exercise  on  the  Diphthongs. 

!v  ^         (v  )v 

V 

(  ^    '      I 

Vv  t  L—y 


^ 


/' 


V 


<L 

'/ 


> 


( 


L 


X3 


A 

r 


N      ^ 

\rv\r          vv 
^\  M  . 

J 
<^      x 


•K 


v 

A/' 

b' 

1. 


c       \ 


28  THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

COALESCENTS. 

47.  Two-fold  Nature  of  the  Coalescents.— The  vowels  oo  and  ee, 
the  two  extreme  members  of  the  long-vowel  scale,  are,  from  the  ex- 
ceeding closeness  of  their  formation  in  the  mouth,  of  such  a  nature 
that  any  vowel  may  readily  follow  either  of  them  and  coalesce  with 
it  in  the  same  syllable,  forming  a  combination  much  like  a  diphthong. 
In  such  cases  oo  and  ee  are  formed  even  closer  than  usual,  and  so 
nearly  approach  true  obstructed  sounds  that  they  are  often  consid- 
ered as  consonants  and  given  consonantal  representation  by  the  strokes 

^  and  f      to  which  the  vowel  which  follows  may  be  written. 

48.  Coalescent  Vowel-Signs. — It  is  convenient,  however,  to  use 
vowel-signs  for  the  coalescents  in  combination  with  the  vowels,  thus: 

we    I         wa   c|        wah  c|        waw     1         wo    \        woo    J 

ye     I  ya  "|          yah   J          yaw     |          yo     \         yoo   „] 

These  signs  are  shaded  to  indicate  the  coalescence  of  oo  and  ee  with 
the  long  vowels,  but  with  short  vowels  they  are  light. 

49.  The  Triphthong  Wi. — When  w  coalesces  with  v  the  resulting 
triphthong  is  written 

50.  Direction  of  Coalescent  Vowel-signs  Invariable. — All  these 
signs  retain   their  own  direction  and  do  not  vary  with  the  stroke  to 
which  they  are  placed.     Compare  paragraphs  32  and  45. 

51.  Joined  Coalescent  Vowel-signs. — Like  the  diphthongs  (see 
par.  46)  the  first-place  and  third-place  coalescent  vowel-signs  may  be 
joined  to  the  adjacent  stroke,  whenever  they  form  a  distinct  angle. 

NOTE. — When  u  is  joined  after  n  it  may  be  slightly  slanted  as  in  rennv,  line  15. 

52.  Rules  for  the   Strokes  and   Vowel-signs   for  W  and  Y. — 
a.   When  a  word  begins  with  w  or y  (i)  the  vowel-sign  is  used  if  it 
can  be  joined  to  the  following  consonant  without  lifting  the  pen  (see 
lines  I  to  3),  but  (2)  if  this  cannot  be  done  the  stroke  form  is  written 
(see  lines  4  to  7)  except  in  cases  where  its  joining  with  the  following 
stroke  is  inconvenient,  and  then  (3)  the  disjoined  vowel-sign  is  used 
as  in  lines  8  to  10.     b.  When  w  or  y  occurs  medially  or  in  coalescence 
with  a  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word  the  vowel-sign  is  generally  pre- 
ferred.    See  lines  n   to  15.     c.   When  a  word  begins  with  a  vowel 
followed  by  w  or  y  the  stroke  must  be  used,  as       ^ awake. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  the  Coalescents. 


,1 

21- 

sl 


13 
14 


1 

7s 


i 

f 

"V 


r\ 


7 


v_     "I 


I      U.    "\ 

V          U-^          I 

I        —       C        i 


30  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

CONCURRENT  VOWELS. 

53.  Consecutive  Vowels  Written  Separately. — a.  When  a  word 
begins  with  two  consecutive  vowels  the  first  is  written  further  away 
from  and  the  second  nearer  to  the  following  stroke.     See  line  i.     l>. 
When  a  word  ends  with  two  consecutive  vowels  the  first  is  written 
nearer  to  and  the  second  further  away  from  the  preceding  stroke.    See 
line  2.     c.  When  two  consecutive  vowels  occur  in  the  middle  of  a 
word  the  first  is  written  to  the  preceding  stroke  and  the  second  to  the 
following  stroke  (see  lines  3  to  6)  unless  (d]  the  angle  between  the 
two  strokes  is  so  acute  as  to  render  it  impracticable  to  write  a  third- 
place  vowel  within  it,  in  which  case  both  vowels  may  be  written  to 
one  of  the  strokes,  as  at  the  end  of  line  6. 

54.  Dissyllabic  Diphthongs. — When  the  first  of  two  concurrent 
vowels  is  long  and  the  second  is  an  unaccented  short  or  obscure  vowel 
they  may  be  conveniently  written  with  the  following  compound  signs: 

e'-u  *"(       a'-u  <|       ah'-u  J       aw'-u  ^|      o'-u  >|       oo'-u  >| 

in  which  u  stands  for  any  short  or  obscure  unaccented  vowel.  See 
lines  7  to  9.  A  little  tick  may  in  like  manner  be  struck  at  an  acute 
angle  after  a"  diphthong  or  coalescent-sign  to  indicate  a  following  un- 
accented short  or  obscure  vowel.  See  lines  10  and  n. 

55.  Approximate    Representation    of    Concurrent    Vowels    by 
Coalescent  Vowel-Signs. — When  the  first  of  two  concurrent  vowels 

is  an  unaccented  I  or  a  coalescent-sign  of  the  y  series  may  be 
conveniently  employed  to  represent  the  two  vowels.  See  lines  12  to  15. 
This  indicates  a  pronunciation  which  though  not  strictly  accurate  is 
sufficiently  so  for  practical  purposes  and  is,  indeed,  often  employed  by 
the  poets.  Thus,  Shakespeare  uses  period  sometimes  as  a  word  of  two 
\X|  sometimes  as  one  of  three  syllables  \Si  (See  Antony  and 
Cleopatra,  act  iv,  for  both  uses). 


Exercise  on  Concurrent  Vowels 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


THE  ASPIRATE. 

56.  The   Tick-h.  — When  h  hegins  a  word  and  is  followed  by  k,  g, 
s,  z,  lay,  ar,  m,  mp  or  w,  the  aspirate  is  represented  by  a  light  short  tick 
struck  down  invariably  in  the  direction  of  ch.     See  lines  I  to  5.     Tt 
will  be  observed  that  the  tick  is  employed  in  every  ca'se  where  it  forms 
an  acute  angle  with  the  following  stroke. 

NOTE. — In  order  to  produce  a  distinct  outline  the  tick  may  be  made  somewhat 
longer  before  Jay   than  in  other  cases. 

57.  The  Stroke-h.  — When  //  begins  a  word  and  is  followed  by  any 
stroke  other  than  those  mentioned  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  the 
stroke  form  ^/  should  be  used.    See  lines  6  to  10.     The  stroke  is  also 
employed,  of  necessity,  when  there  is  no  other  consonant  in  the  word 
and  when  a  vowel  begins  the  word  followed  by  //.     See  line  n. 

58.  The  Dot-h.  — a.  When  h  is  medial,  that  is  to  say,  when  it  has 
one  or  more  consonants  preceding  and  following  it,  the  regular  form 
of  representation  is  by  a  dot  placed  before  the  sign  of  the  vowel  which 
follows  the  aspirate,  as  shown  in  line  12.     />.   The  dot  aspirate  is  used 
initially  before  joined  coalescents  and  in  a  very  few  other  words.     See 
line  13.     When  the  dot  aspirate  is  placed  to  a  dash  it  should  be  writ- 
ten at  its  side  rather  than  at  the  end.     When  it  is  placed  to  a  dot  it 
should  be  in  such  a  position  that  a  line  connecting  the  two  dots  would 
be  at  a  right  angle  to  the  stroke  to  which  they  are  placed. 

59.  Medial  H. — While  the  dot  is  the  normal  form  for  representing 
the  medial  //,  the  tick  is  more   convenient   when  it  forms  an  acute 
angle  with  both  the  preceding  and  following  strokes  (see  line  14)  and 
even  the  stroke  may  be  employed  to  advantage  in  a  few  cases.     See 
line  15.     When  the  stroke  h  is  written  medially  it  is  sometimes  im- 
possible perfectly  to  form   the   hook    which   in    such   cases  must  be 
adapted  to  the  preceding  stroke  as  a  slight  offset. 

60.  Wh. — The  student  may  find  some  difficulty  at  first  with  such 
words  as  those  at  the  end  of  line  5  until  he  has  learned  that  all  words 
beginning  with  10/1  in   the  ordinary   spelling   really   begin    with    the 
sounds  hw  —  that  -why  would  be  much  more  properly  spelled  hn'y. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


33 


Exercise  on  the  Aspirate. 


•r      r 


.         i\ 
r      r 


r    ., 


1       1 


J 


vi 


34  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


UPWARD  AND  DOWNWARD  L,  R  AND  SH. 

61.  Initial  L. — a.  When  /  begins  a  word  followed  by  k,  g,  m,  mp 
or  «,  use  lay  (see  lines  i  and  2) ;  but  (b)  should  an  initial  vowel  pre- 
cede /  followed  by  these  strokes,  use  el  (see  line  3). 

62.  Final  L. — a.  When  /  ends  a  word  after  f,  v,  ray  or  two  con- 
current vowels,  one  of  which  is  accented,  use  el  (see  lines  4  and  5) ; 
but  (£)  should  a  final  vowel  follow  /  thus  preceded,  use /ay  (see  line  6). 
f.    When  /  following  n  or  ng  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word,  use  el 
whether  a  vowel  follows  or  not  (see  line  7). 

63.  L  in  Other  Cases,     a.  When  /  precedes  ng,  use  el.     See  line  8. 
b.  When  /  is  the  first  or  last  consonant  in  a  word  in  any  case  not 
covered  by  the  foregoing  rules,  use  lay  unless  an  inconvenient  outline 
would  result  from  so  doing,  in  which  case  el  may  be  used.     c.  When 
/  is  medial,  use  either  el  or  lay  according  to  convenience. 

64.  Initial  R. — a.    When  r  begins  a  word,  use   ray   (see  line  9), 
except  (6)  when  followed  by  m  or  mp,  in  which  case  ar  should  be 
used  (see  line  10).     c.   When  a  vowel  begins  the  word  and  is  fol- 
lowed by  r,  use  ar  (see   line  li)  except  (</)  when  the  r  is  followed 
by  a  descending  stroke  (other  than  ar  or  isA)  when  ray  should  be 
used  (see  line  12). 

65.  Final  R. — a.  When  r  ends  a  word,  use  ar  (see  line  13)  except 
(b)  after  m,  mp,  ray,  stroke-^,  or  two  descending  strokes,  when  ray 
should  be  used  (see  line  14).     c.   When  a  vowel  ends  the  word  pre- 
ceded by  r,  use  ray  (see  line  15)- 

66.  R  in  Other  Cases. — a.  When  r  is   medial,    ray  is  generally 
used,  but  ar  may  be  used  if  more  convenient,     b.   When  r  is  the  only 
consonant  in  the  word,  use  ar  when  a  vowel  precedes ;  ray,  when  a 
vowel  follows ;  and  ar  when  r  is  both  preceded  and  followed  by  a 
vowel. 

67.  Sh. — The  choice  between   the   upward  and  downward  forms 
of  sh  is  entirely  determined  by   convenience  in  forming  the  outline; 
the  accompanying  vowels  have  no  effect  in  determining  the  choice. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


35 


Exercise  on  Upward  and  Downward  L  and  R. 


I   I. 


3   • 


sC 


~Y        T 

C       O 
xi     ^ 


c 

^ 


K 

V 


X)' 


12 

< 

13 

H    < 

>5  X 


//     >/ 


-< 


K 


36  THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

LOGOGRAMS. 

68.  Unequal  Recurrence  of  Words. — It   is  an   ascertained  fact 
that   fewer  than   two  hundred   words,  through  being  frequently  re- 
peated, make  up  at  least  one-half  the  bulk  of  any  ordinary  written  or 
spoken  discourse.     To  write  these  words  with  their  full  phonographic 
representation  would  be  inconvenient  even  in  the  fullest  style  of  pho- 
nography, and  impossible  in  the  briefer  form  known  as  the  "reporting 
style,"  where  the  object  to  be  attained  is  to  keep  pace  with  the  utter- 
ance of  a  rapid  speaker. 

69.  Logograms. — These  words  are,  therefore,  abbreviated  in  pho- 
nography and  written  for  the  most  part,  with  but  a  single  motion  of 
the  pen,  and  in  anv,case  with  but  a  single  sign — vowel  or  consonant. 
These  signs  are  eailed  logograms,  and  the  words  they  represent  are 
called  gramrffalogues.     A  logogram  always  consists  of  some  part  of 
the  complete  representation  of  its  grammalogue,  and,  in  most  cases, 
that  part  is  chosen  which  is  most  likely  to  suggest  the  full  word. 

70.  Vowel  Logograms. — The  following  are  the  vowel  logograms: 


the*  a  an,  and 

\  I  ' 

-*  \ 

all*        too,  two        already*        before        ought*,  aught*       who 
i  x 

\  i 

of*  to  or*  but  on*  should 

Those  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  written  above  the  line,  as  high  as 
the  top  of  a  stroke  I.  The  dashes  are  utilized  by  writing  them  in 
three  directions,  both  on  and  above  the  line.  Thus  each  is  made  to  do 
duty  as  six  distinct  Iggograms.  The  dash-logograms  are  all  struck 
down  except  on  and  should,  which  should  be  written  in  the  direction 
of  ray.  When  the  same  sign  stands  for  more  than  one  word  the  words 
are  of  such  a  nature  that  their  meanings  do  not  clash,  the  context 
making  perfectly  clear  which  is  intended.  The  student  is  advised  to 
commit  to  memory  the  words  in  the  last  two  lines  of  this  list  in  the 
order  in  which  they  are  given,  and,  while  repeating  them  a  great 
many  times,  to  associate  in  his  mind  the  signs  with  the  words,  remem- 
bering the  changes  of  direction  and  the  alternation  of  position. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


37 


Exercise  on  Vowel  Logograms. 
/TV.        s        \        N     n)       ^        x       \ 


V 


N    r 


I-      S        ('        ^ 


7-  Cr  x  .  ^  ^ 

8   N  x  »0 

9  <•  ,    r  .   i-  ^ 

o  (•   ^   <.  x  •  x   ,  r\  ,  (• 


A. 


H 
15 


<S\    x   L 

Sx  c 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


CONSONANT  LOGOGRAMS. 

\     up  common*  (_  think 

\    be  _  come  \  them 

it  give-n*  J  so 

I      do  -  together  )  was 

/       which  V  for  J  shall-  1 

/       advantage  v.  have  ^X  usual-ly 

71.  Logograms  Represent  Derivative  Words  as  well  as  Prim- 
itives. —  It  will  be  noticed  that  when  a  logogram  represents  a  primitive 
word  it  also  frequently  represents  one  or  more  of  its  derivatives.     In 
printing  these  in  the  foregoing  table,  for  the  sake  of  compactness  the 
termination    only  of   the   derivative    word   is  given    attached    to    the 

primitive  with  a  hyphen.  Thus,  represents  both  give  and  giren. 
Of  course,  only  such  derivative  words  as  will  not  conflict  with  the 
primitive  word  in  meaning  are  represented  by  the  sign  of  the 
primitive. 

72.  Position  of  Horizontal  Logograms.  —  Just  as  the  vowel  logo- 
grams are  written  in  two  positions  —  on  and  above  the  line  (see  par. 
70)  —  so  also  may  horizontal  consonant  logograms  be  written.     It  will 
be  noticed  that,  with  few  exceptions,  logograms  are  written  above  the 
line  to  represent  words  whose  accented  vowels  are  of  the  first  place. 
The  distance  above  the  line  at  which  such  vowel  and  horizontal  con- 
sonant logograms  are  written  is  exactly  the  height  of  stroke-/. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


39 


Exercise  on  Consonant  Logograms. 


3   V 
4 
5 
6  • 


11  V 

12  (' 

x 
13 

.4I 

15 


\ 


\    ^^ 

.  (v 


\ 


-)./ 


i-  . 


r  <r'    }'  Y    ^ 

'     '?         ^  ^  \  "~    x 

X.          ^  V  (•  ,         (       )x 

|.       \v        I'  (A  J  \       ^\ 


40 

THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

r 
x 

CONSONANT  LOGOGRAMS 

will                                '     in,*  any* 
are                            v  x    no,  know 

—  Concluded. 

\    way 
I         your 

me,*  my*  ^~*     thing*  important-ce* 

him,   may  x, ;    young  /"^  improve 

•^  ment 

73.  The  Nominal  Consonant. — It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  write 
a  vowel  or  diphthong  considered  apart  from  any  consonant,  as  in 
writing  a  word  which  consists  of  a  vowel  only,  like  the  words  awe, 
owe,  ah,  oh.  In  such  cases  the  sign  J,  or  \  ,  called  the  nominal 
consonant,  is  used  simply  to  furnish  a  stroke  of  no  definite  consonantal 
value  to  which  the  vowel  may  be  placed.  The  little  cross  tick  at  the 
end  of  the  stroke  may  be  considered  as  canceling  the  consonant.  The 
dash  vowels  may  be  struck  through  the  stroke,  tnus  canceling  the 
stroke  and  writing  the  vowel  with  a  single  movement  of  the  pen. 
The  six  long  vowels  are  thus  represented:  J.  J!  T.  "f  -I 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


4' 


I  (• 

2      . 

s'- 

3 

4  " 

5  (' 

-> 

6 
7 


Exercise  on  Consonant  Logograms  —  II. 

S   ,  V  ' 

s.       ^"^ 

\  s        ^-x 


r 


\       /'I 

~Y       \v 

\    O 

.    L_ 

^v  I 

\V  r 
x    i  * 


/ 


r 


A 

\ 


V. 


.     C 


13 


14 


•    r  /   ..( 

N      xt    > 


I    ^_^ 


-  Cs 

\  .r  .1 


42  THE    MANUAL    OK    PHONOGRAPHY. 


DIPHTHONG,  COALESCENT  AND  ASPIRATE 
LOGOGRAMS. 


with    ^  were  what  would 


ye  yet  beyond  you 

v  / 

A 

I,  eye  how  he 

74.  Coalescent    Logograms    Unshaded. —  We,  ye   and  you    are 
theoretically  written  with  heavy  signs,  but  in  practise  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  shade  them. 

75.  "Ye"  Distinguished  from  "I." — The  sign  for  ye  should  be 
carefully  curved  at  the  bottom  in  order  that  in  rapid  writing  it  may 
not  clash  with  /. 

76.  Direction   of    "He." — The   disjoined   tick->£    representing  he 
should  invariably  be  struck  down  in  the  direction  of  the  stroke  ch. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


43 


3  V 

4  Ai 

5 
6 

7 


Exercise  on  Diphthong  Logograms. 

^  /?        '^         V         (       V       ^ 

J       \       S\     V     c     I 

.    >  -  .   (   .  r   c.  x 
^  rx      \    X 

\       <^\        x        \ 


y  N  J 


13 

.H 
15 


X  .( 

.  c  ^ 


44  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

APPENDAGES. 

77.  Briefer  Signs  Supplied.  —With  the  signs  already  given  it  is 
possible  to  write  any  word  in  the  language  in  a  manner  phonetically 
correct  and  complete.     But  while  these  signs  are  much  briefer  than 
those  of  ordinary  longhand,  they  are  still  inadequate  for  the  purposes 
of  a  practical  shorthand.     Certain  of  the  most  frequently-recurring 
sounds  are  therefore  represented  by  additional  signs  —  circles,  hooks 
and  loops  —  called  appendages,  because   they  are  attached  in  various 
ways  to  the  strokes.     By  means  of  these  supplementary  signs  the  ut- 
most desirable  brevity  of  form  is  secured. 

78.  Two  Kinds  of  Curvilinear  Motion.  —  In  writing  and  drawing, 
all  curved  lines  are  made  with  one  of  two  kinds  of  motion.     In  tracing 
the  upper  half  of  a  circle  the  hand  moves  either  from  left  to  right  or 
from  right  to  left.     The  movement  of  the  hand  in  the  former  case 

may  be  called  evolute  (        J  ;  that  made  in  the  latter  involute 
motion.  ~\  *** 


f       ) 

f  S*.  y 

0^>       wi 


The  strokes  ^~>       are  made  with  evolute  and         >       with    involute 

motion.     In  attaching  the  appendages  to  strokes  either  kind  of  motion 
may  be  employed  according  to  circumstances. 

CIRCLES  S  AND  Z. 

79.  Manner  of  Attaching  the  Circles.  —  One  of  the  most  fre- 
quently-recurring pairs  of  sounds  in  the  language  is  s-z.  These 
sounds  are  represented  by  the  most  easily-formed  appendage  —  a  small 
circle  ,  which  may  be  attached  at  either  the  beginning  or  the  end 
of  any  stroke,  as  follows:  a.  When  attached  to  a  straight  stroke,  it 
is  written  with  involute  motion.  See  lines  I  and  4.  />.  When  attached 
to  a  curve  it  takes  the  motion  of  the  curve  ;  that  is,  it  is  written  on  the 
concave  side.  See  lines  2,  3,  5  and  6.  c.  When  between  two  straight 
strokes  the  circle  is  written  with  involute  motion  if  the  straight  strokes 
are  in  the  same  direction  (see  line  7),  but  if  they  are  of  a  different 
direction  the  circle  is  written  in  the  shortest  way,  that  is,  on  the  out- 
side of  the  angle.  See  line  8.  d.  When  written  between  two  curved 
strokes  it  is  usually  placed  inside  of  the  first  (see  lines  9  and  10), 
though  rarely  inside  of  the  second  (see  line  n).  e.  When  written 
between  a  straight  and  a  curved  stroke  it  is  invariably  placed  within 
the  curve,  see  lines  12  to  15. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY.                                   45 

Exercise  on  the  Circles  S  and  Z. 

•i  X 

XL       I      /      /     _„      _^ 

3     Vo 

v^)              "o              vj               <y               <y             o/              o^S 

i  r 

~~\                                     ^s    r 

o             '    &             ^'o            >  9             N^,^1              d         b 

4<X 

\     r     f    /°   f   ^_    o_ 

5^- 

L       C       C       °)        *)     J      J 

6    C 

°^\                            ^  /^° 

^  —  x              <5^^         Q  '            v~_-/ 

'X 

1         /           „           'S'       L      V 

r   /                    X 

8    \p 

V-    <^   •/    <,    ^         \ 

9    V? 

s  /°   *5  ^  ^  y 

10      <^_s 

X   rv    c    T  x,  -r 

ii    Vg  —  „ 

v^s    v  ^r  ^  r  ^r 

12      VP 

V     ^     f     f    <    r" 

J 

^~         X_        -^     ^~1      ^       ^"f 

13    CX^ 

d                   -^5 

,4>^ 

v^    r    ^     L   ^    /^ 

15    Q_ 

-  —  ^-  -^  ^    V  u 

46  THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

CIRCLES  S  AND  Z.— Concluded. 

80.  Vocalization  of  Outlines  Containing  Circles. — In  vocalizing, 
that  is,  inserting  vowels  in,  outlines  in  which  the  circle-.?  or  2  is  used, 
the   unvarying   rule    is    that    the    vowels   are  written  and  read  with 
reference  to  the  stroke  and  not  with  reference  to  the  circle,  to  which 
a  vowel  can  never  be  placed ;  thus, 

N       r     _     /      j     .r 

pea  tea  caw         age  asli  eel 

v.     c     ^    f     J     -c 

peace         tease         cause         sage  sash  seal 

81.  Rules   for  Writing  Stroke   and   Circle   Forms  of  S-Z.—  a. 
When  a  word  ends  with  j-  or  z  use  the  circle  See  lines  I   to  4,  except 
(6)  when  the  s  or  z  is  preceded  by  two  vowels  one  of  which  is  accented, 
when  the  stroke  should  be  used.    See  line  5.     c.  When  a  word  begins 
with  s  use  the  circle  (see  lines  6  to  8),  except  (i/)  when  the  s  is  fol- 
lowed by   two   vowels,  one  of  which  is  accented,  when   the  stroke 
should  be  used  (see  line  9).     e.  When  a  word  ends  with  a  vowel,  pre- 
ceded by  s  or  z,  use  the  stroke.     See  line  10.    f.   When  a  word  begins 
with  a  vowel  followed  by  s  or  z  use  the  stroke.    See  line  II.    g.  When 
a  word  begins  with  z  use  the  stroke.     See  line  12.     h.   When  s  or  z 
occurs  in  the  middle  of  a  word  the  circle  is  generally  used.     See  lines 
13  to  15. 

82.  Rules  for  Reading. — a.  When  an  outline  begins  with  a  circle, 
the  word  begins  with  j.     b.   When   an  outline  ends  with  a  circle,  the 
word  ends  with  s  or  z. 

83.  Vowel  Expression  between  a  Stroke  and  a  Circle. — It  must 
be  remembered  that  the  rules  given  in  paragraph  41    apply  only  to 
vowels  written  between  two  stroke  consonants.     When  one  consonant 
is  represented  by  a  circle  the  intervening  vowel   must  of  course  be 

placed  to  the  stroke.     Thus  <f —    task,  not  <j — - 

84.  S  and  Z  Circles   Distinguished. — When    great    accuracy  is 
necessary  the  small  circle  may  be  shaded  to  represent  2  as  distinct 
from  s.     This  distinction  is  quite  unnecessary  under  all  ordinary  cir- 
cumstances. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


47 


Words  Containing  Circles  S  and  Z. 

I\o      (7     /      — °      X>     ~L  /A 

2  X      C      /  X     .1       4 


r 


\       T)       / 

^  J  ) 


s          •  T) 

VV  ^ 

6    T  .f 


/\ 
r    "^ 

r  i 


.r 


14 

,5 


V 


/ 

h,     £  K  •  ) 

^ 
b 


X° 


48  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


CIRCLE  SES,  SEZ,  ZES,  ZEZ. 

85.  Representation  of  Plurals. — It  will  have  been  perceived  that 
one  of  the  most  important  uses  of  the  circle  s-z  is  the  representation 
of  the  plural  number  of  nouns.      In  cases  where  the  singular  already 
ends  with  a  circle  the  plural  is  formed  by  enlarging  the  circle.     See 
lines  I  to  8.     When  the  singular  ends  with  .r  the  corresponding  plural 
ending  is  sez.      When   the   singular   ends    with   2  the    corresponding 
plural  ending  is  zez.    Similarly,  when  the  outline  of  the  infinitive  of  a 
verb  ends  with  a  small  circle,  the  circle  is  enlarged  to  form  the  third- 
person  singular,  indicative. 

86.  The  Large  Circle  in  other  Cases. — The  syllables  ses  and  zez, 
as  well  as  sts  and  zes,  are  also  represented  in  other  cases  by  the  large 
circle.     See  lines  9  and  10. 

87.  Sez-ez. — When  the  singular  ends  with  a  large  circle  the  plural 
is  formed  by  adding  a  small  circle-::,  and  the  verb  is  treated  similarly. 
See  line  1 1. 

88.  Suggestive  Vocalization  of  the   Large    Circle. — It   will,  be 
observed  that,   unlike  any  phonographic  character  heretofore  given, 
the  large  circle  has  a  syllabic  and   not  an  elementary  value,  and  that 
the  vowel  in  the  syllable  represented  is  normally  <? — the  second-place 
light  dot.     To  a  limited  extent,  however,  other  vowels  may  be  sug- 
gestively indicated,  as  follows:   I  (the  first-place  light  dot)  by  a  light 
dot  within  the  large  circle  (see  line  12);  <?  (the  first-place  heavy  dot) 
by  a  heavy  dot  within  the  circle  (see  line  13) ;  I  by  the  diphthong-sign 
within  the  circle  (see  line  14) ;  u  (second-place  light  dash)  by  a  light 
dash  within  the  circle  (see  line  15) ;  aw  (first-place  heavy  dash)  by  a 
heavy  dash  within  the  circle  (see  line  15) ;  a  (third-place  light  dot)  by 
a  small  circle  within  the  large  circle  (see  end  of  line  15) ;  any  coales- 
cent  by  its  sign  turned  in  its  proper  direction  (see  end  of  line  15)- 

89.  Zez,  zes  and  sez,  ses  Circles  Distinguished. — Zez,  zes,  may 
be  represented  by  the  shaded  circle  to  distinguish  them  from  sez,  ses, 
(see  lines  5  to  8)  though  such  distinction  is  necessary  only  in  critically 
accurate  writing. 

90.  Manner  of  Attachment  to   Strokes. — All  the  rules  for  the 
attachment  of  the  small  circle  to  and  between  straight  and  curved 
strokes  (see  paragraph  80)  apply  equally  to  the  large  circle. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

49 

Exercise  on  the  Large  Circles. 

I      NO                     X)                 V,                  NO                 b 

£ 

*/         <?         <         <         — 

^> 

3^               Vo                V*,             Vto                O 

(^ 

,                                             A.                     .        A                                A                      /X 

4  —  D            —  o            ^_p              ^_9                3 

^ 

5  NO                \D                X,               X}               V) 

NO 

6t        b         fc-         b-        I 

•b 

7pJ              ,_D                -^              _$            ^ 

-^ 

8    xx>                 vD                    VD                  VD             v  9 

^ 

9                 \ 
n      .  Q                  O                 f                        >3             o  f  O 

<0 

-^P                       \/                     /              *-P                \. 
10        V.              —^^            v_£K                                          No 

V 

-V                                              ^ 

r 

/ 

jj        .  Q                      Q                      /'^                           :C                   n   1  g) 

\D 

-No                       _^                     fe                _^^               ^f 

^ 

13   \3                    ®                 <©            x-  <^>^S>           N© 

n 

•<S   •               N  5>          -ix®         S^> 

14       .  Q                             V©                    •    /                      \.                             V^_ 

•I 

•5^             -C             \          ^            ^ 

*A 

v^. 

I 

THE    MANUAL   OF    1'HONOGRAPHY. 


LOOP-ST. 

gi.  The  Small  Loop. — St  with  no  intervening  voVel  is  represented 
in  phonography  by  a  small  loop  one-half  the  length  of  the  stroke  to 
which  it  is  attached,  written  in  the  involute  direction  to  straight 
strokes  and  on  the  concave  side  of  curves  (compare  paragraph  79).  It 
is  used  chiefly  (a)  at  the  end  of  strokes  (see  lines  I  to  3)  but  (^)  may 
also  be  initial  (see  lines  8  to  10).  It  is  used  to  a  slight  extent  (c)  in 
the  middle  of  words  (see  line  n),  but  never  when  the  stroke  which 
follows  is  of  such  a  direction  as  to  cut  through  the  stroke  to  which 
the  loop  is  attached.  The  loop  cannot  be  used  in  words  like  vestige, 

92.  Vocalization  of  Outlines  Containing  Loops. — As  in  the  case 
of  the  circle  (see  paragraph  80)  a  vowel  cannot  be  placed  to  the  loop, 
but  must  be  written  and  read  with  reference  to  the  stroke. 

93.  Rules  for  the  Use  of  Loop-St. — a.  When  a  word  begins  with 
st  use  the  loop.     b.  When  the  word  begins  with  a  vowel  followed  by 
st  use  the  stroke-.?,     c.  When  the  word  ends  with  st  use  the  loop.     d. 
When  the  word  ends  with  a  vowel  preceded  by  st  use  the  circles  and 
stroke-/,  as  gust  ~~f=>,  gusty    ~"j~T    .     e.  When  a  vowel  occurs  between 
s  and  /,  the  loop  cannot  be  used. 

94.  Representation  of  Zd. — a.  The  small  loop  may  be  used  to 
represent  zd  at  the  end  of  outlines  which  contain  two  or  more  strokes 
(see  line  5).     b.  After  a  single  stroke  the  form    |      must  be  used  (see 
line  6)  except  (f)  after  (       //  ^_^  and  <^  when  the  loop  may  be 
used,  but  must  be  shaded  (see  line  7). 

95.  Loop  and  Circle  Combined. — When  the  loop  st  is  followed 
by  s,  the  circle  should  be  written   through   the  stroke  as  in  line  4. 
These  forms  are  chiefly  used  in  writing  the  plural  of  nouns,  and  the 
third-person  singular  of  verbs. 

LOOP-STR. 

96.  The    Large    Loop. — A  large   final   loop   written  involute  on 
straight  strokes  and  on  the  concave  side  of  curves,  represents  str  with- 
out intervening  vowels   (see  lines    12  and    13).     This  loop  extends 
about  two-thirds  the  length  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  attached  and 
is  never  used  initially.     When  a  vowel  ends  a  word  after  str  the  loop 
cannot  be  employed. 

97.  Large  Loops  and  Circles  Combined. — The  circle  s  follows  the 
loop  str  (see  line  14)  just  as  it  follows  the  small  loop  (compare  line  4). 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  51 

Exercise  on  the  Loop-st. 

s.    •  s  •    •  &      r  IT    / 

w    j       >     e  ~\     ^ 


-0 


8-\  \  -p  -r  /  /  ^ 

9    ^^  ^—  '0  '  fc7~^  d^""*  ^x 

<^\                                     r\  <ci.  p  »^v^  ^7 

«'?-  \  ^  /..  L  k-  ^P 


Exercise  on  the  Loop-str. 

12  \i-       M        b-       b-      A 


14 


^       b-       b- 


52  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

CIRCLE  AND  LOOP  LOGOGRAMS. 

o      is,  his*  /       such  £       yours 

0  as,  has  Vo      this  &      first 
b       its                            <s—*    some                         fi      just 

1  said  <s~^    seem*  "~^    most,  must 
n   n    six*                         0_^     seen*  -*~&    next 

98.  Manner  of  Writing  Disjoined  Circles  and  Loop. — The  dis- 
joined circles  used  as  logograms  should  be  written  with  evolute  motion, 
while  the  disjoined  loop,  representing^/?;^,  should  be  written  with  in- 
volute motion. 

99.  Circle-s    Added    to  Logograms. — The    circle-.?  or  2  may  be 
added  to  a  logogram  for  any  of  the  following  purposes  : 

a.  If  the  logogram  represents  a  noun,  to  form  the  plural  or  pos- 
sessive case,  as  5    advantages,  ^-^   thing's. 

b.  If  the  logogram  represents  a  verb,   to  form  the  third  person, 
singular,  present  indicative,  as  L   thinks,  > p  kncrws,  \,  does. 

100.  Loop-st  Added  to  Logograms. — The  loop-j^  may  be  added 
to  a  logogram  which  represents  an  adjective,  to  form  the  superlative 
degree,  as  >^P  youngest. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


53 


Exercise  on  the  Circle  and  Loop  Logograms. 

J  \  e-  .   •  r   j    \ 


,  i  °  r,  i   j 

/  \—o  0          N 


t  _ 


)    ^^_     6  •  fe  > 

^ 

•       < 
i  No. 

I         ^ 


-p 

1 


x 


,2  -f    .    U 

.3  ' 

r,   I 

HI 

\ 


/  ^  4 


^  r 


J    i    u 


1 

9  '-^  X 

/o  C!    N  v 

/  O  n  D  \     .     \ 


54  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

THE  N-HOOK. 

101.  Manner  of  Attachment. — A  small  final  hook  may  be  attached 
to  any  stroke  to  represent  w.     When  attached  to  straight  strokes  the 
«-hook  is  written  in  the  evolute  direction  (see  lines  I  to  3) ;  when 
attached  to  curves  it  is  written  on  the  concave  side  of  the  curve  (see 
lines  4  to  6). 

102.  Rules  for  Stroke  and  Hook  Forms  of  N. — a.  When  n  is  the 
last  sound  in  a  word  use  the  hook  as  pen  \  ;  except  (6)  when  the  n  is 
preceded  by  two  vowels,  one  of  which  is  accented,  in  which  case  the 
stroke  form  should  be  used,  as  pecan     \^_^  ;  c.  When  a  word  ends 

with  a  vowel  preceded  by  n  use  the  stroke,  as  penny   \_^/ 

103.  Medial  Use  of  N-hook. — The  «-hook  is  most  frequently  used 
at  the  end  of  words,  but  it  is  sometimes  employed  in  the  middle  of  an 
outline,  in  order  to  obtain  a  more  convenient  form.     See  line  7. 

104.  Combined    N-hook    and    Circles. — The    circle   s-z   may  be 
written  within  the  w-hook  and  the  combination  thus  obtained  is  read 
ns  or  «z.     See  line  8.     This  combination  is  chiefly  useful  in  writing 
the  plurals  of  nouns  outlines  of  the  singular  of  which  end  with  an  «- 
hook,  but  it  is  often  used  in  other  cases,  and  sometimes  medially,  as 
in  line  9. 

105.  Contracted  Combination  on  Straight  Strokes. — When  s  or 
2  ends  a  word  after  an  «-hook  attached  to  a  straight  stroke,  the  combi- 
nation may  be  contracted  to  a  small  circle  written  with  evolute  motion. 
See  lines  10  to  12.     This  will  not  be  mistaken  for  the  circle  s,  which 
is  always  written   after   straight   strokes  with  involute  motion.     See 
paragraph  79  a. 

106.  Combined   N-hook    and    Circle-sez. — N-sez   is  written  (a] 
after  a  straight  stroke  with  a  large  evolute  circle  (see  line  13).     The 
large  circle,  however,  cannot  be  written  (b)  within  the  «-hook  after  a 
curve,  but  must  be  written  after  the  stroke-w,  as  shown  in  line  14. 

107.  Combined  N-hook  and  Loop. — In  like  manner  the  loops  st 
and  str  are  expressed  as  following  the  w-hook  on  straight  strokes  by 
writing  them  with  evolute  motion  (see  line  15),  whereas  the  simple  st 
and  str  following  a  straight  stroke  are  written  with  involute  motion 
(see  paragraphs  92  and  97).     Of  course,  neither  loop  can  be  written 
within  an  w-hook  following  a  curve. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


55 


Exercise  on  the  N-hook. 


r 


>   >    / 


9  r- 


S 


12 
13 

'4 

15  \ 


X  Jn  J- 


.1 


r 

ci 


r~°      ~r° 

/° 

~<y 


56  THE    MANUAL    OK    PHONOGRAPHY. 


THE  F-V   HOOK. 

108.  Manner  of  Attachment. — A  small    final   hook  may  be  at- 
tached   to   any    straight    stroke    with    involute    motion    to    represent 

f  or  "v- 

109.  F  and  V  Distinguished. — When  critical  accuracy  is  required 
the  /-hook  is  made  light  (see  lines  I  to  3)  and  the  w-hook  is  shaded 
(see  lines  4  to  7).     In  ordinary  writing  this  distinction  is  wholly  un- 
necessary (compare  paragraph  84). 

no.  Rules  for  Stroke  and  Hook  Forms  of  F  and  V. — a.  When 
f  or  v  is  the  last  sound  in  a  word  and  is  preceded  by  an  explodent, 
ray  or  stroke-A,  use  the  hook.  See  lines  I  to  7.  b.  When  a  word  ends 
with  a  vowel  preceded  by/or  v  use  the  stroke.  See  lines  8  to  10. 

in.  Medial  Use  of  F-V  Hook. — The/-?' hook  is  most  frequently 
used  at  the  end  of  words,  but  it  may  sometimes  be  employed  in  the 
middle  of  an  outline  when  a  more  convenient  form  is  thereby  obtained. 
See  lines  n  to  13. 

112.  Combined  F-V  Hook  and  Circle-s. — The  circle  s-z  may  be 
written  within  the/-hook  and  the  combination  thus  obtained  is  read 
fs  or  vz.  See  lines  14  and  15.  This  combination  is  chiefly  useful  in 
writing  the  plurals  of  nouns  the  singulars  of  which  are  written  with 
outlines  ending  with  the/-z>  hook,  but  it  is  also  used  in  other  cases. 
The  large  circle  and  the  loops  do  not  combine  with  the/-z'  hook. 

1 120.  Compound  Strokes  in  Relation  to  the  Base-line. — The 
attachment  of  an  appendage — circle,  hook  or  loop — to  a  stroke  does 
not  in  any  way  affect  the  relation  of  such  stroke  to  the  base-line. 
Thus,  £/"and  kn  are  so  written  that  the  stroke  shall  precisely  coincide 
with  the  base-line => -, 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


57 


Exercise  on  the  F-V  Hook 

V      \        IT      "I 


Ir 


V 


/" 


"V 


V  t 


VX 


'3 


tsj/x 


C 

_|  A| 

' 


_ 


I/         /' 


58  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

THE  SHUN-HOOK. 

113.  The    Shun-hook. — The   syllable    which   is  variously   repre- 
sented in  longhand  by  sion,  sian,  shion,  tion,  tian,  don,  dan,  may  in 
phonography  be  expressed  by  a  large  final  hook. 

114.  Manner  of  Attachment. — a.   Following  curves  the  jv$««-hook 
is  written  on  the  concave  side.     See  lines   I  andr2.     b.  Following 
straight  strokes  the  ^«;/-hook  may  be  written  on  oiinor  side,  with  the 
following  restrictions:  (i)  When  the  straight  stroke  is  preceded  by  an 
appendage,  or  by  a  curved  stroke  which  joins  it  at  a  tangent  (com- 
pare par.  25),  the  sAurt-hook  is  written  on  the  side  opposite  the  pre- 
ceding curve  (see  lines  3  to  5).    (2)  When  no  such  curve  or  appendage 
precedes  the  straight  stroke,  the  shun-hook  is  written  on  the  side  op- 
posite the  accented  vowel  (see  lines  6  and  7),  except  (3)  after   | 

/  /  to  which  it  is  written  on  the  right  side  (see  line  8).  (4)  When 
the  shitn-hocik  is  used  in  the  middle  of  outlines  it  may  be  written  on 
either  side  of  the  straight  stroke,  according  to  convenience. (See  1.  9.) 

115.  Rules   for  the   Use   of    Shun-hook   and   Sh    N-hook. — a. 
When  shun  ends  a  word  use  the  skun-\\ook,  except  (b)  when  it  is  pre- 
ceded by  two  vowels,  one  of  which  is  accented,  in  which  case  the 
form  ^y  should  in  general  be  used.     See  line  10.     However,  (<:)  in 
words  like  association,  initiation,  etc.,  where  shun  is  preceded  by  a 
stroke-.?/',  the  shnn-\\oo\i   is  preferable,  as  also  in  a  few  other  cases 
where  very  awkward  outlines  would  result  from  the  use  of  <-/ 

116.  Combined  Shun-hook  and  Circle-s. — The  circles  may  be 
written   within   the  s/iun-hooli   to  indicate  the  plural.     See  lines  n 
and  12. 

117.  Backward  Shun-hook. — After  the  circle-*  or  contracted  ns 
(see  par.    105)  shun  is  written  as  a  small  hook  turned  through  the 
stroke.     See  lines  13  and  14.     The  vowel  which  comes  between  the 
circle  and  the  shun  is  expressed  by  writing  the  dot  before  the  combined 
circle  and  hook  for  a  first-place  vowel,  and  after  the  combined  circle 
and  hook  for  a  second-place  vowel.     No  third-place  vowel  occurs  in 
any  word  written  with  a  backward  shun-\\ook.     The  circle-j  may  be 
written  within  the  backward  shun-\iook.     See  line  15. 

118.  Zhun  Distinguished   from   Shun. — When  the  syllable  ex- 
pressed by  the  s/mn-hook  is  pronounced  zhun  the  fact  may  be  indicated 
by  shading  the  hook  (see  line  2),  but  this  is  unnecessary  in  practise. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


59 


14 


Exercise  on  the  Shim-Hook. 


<> 


i 


n, 


•l_5    r 


/          / 


I          V, 


60  THE   MANUAL  OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

FINAL-HOOK  LOGOGRAMS. 
\   upon  Vo   phonography  N^  above 

\  been  (s     then»  than  [    whatever 

J    ten  f       alone  I     difieredt 

ent-ce 

J    done  '~~s  man  ft     whichever 

J     general-ly  men  *  =>  gave 

— 3  can  opinion*  =  gone*" 

_,  again  > — ?   none 

PUNCTUATION,  ETC. 

119.  Punctuation. — The  same  marks  of  punctuation  are  used  in 
phonography  as  in  longhand  except  the  period     x    ,  the  exclamation 
mark    J,  ,  the  dash    -/-    and  the  hyphen    ^   .     The  comma  should 
be  written  with  a  carefully-shaded  dot  (,)  that  it  may  not  be  mistaken 
for  the  logogram  would.     The   parenthesis  should  be  written  either 
decidedly  long — longer  than  double-length  th  or  .r — or  with  a  short 

cross  stroke     y  \"  .     A  second  form  of  the  period      /    ,  of  the  quo- 

O  V7 

and  of  the  interrogation  mark  T  is  some- 
times used  by  reporters.  The  hyphen  is  not  used  in  writing  com- 
pound words  in  phonography  when  the  outlines  of  the  component 
words  join  readily.  Thus,  words  like  day-book  and  air-gun  are  written 
with  single  outlines.  In  words  like  chain-gang,  cast-off,  the  hyphen 
may  be  used. 

120.  Capitalization. — Properly  speaking,  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
capitalization  in  phonography,  but  a  proper  noun  or  adjective  may  be 


indicated  by  underscoring  it  twice  ;  thus, 

121.  Figures. — Except  the  grammalogues  one,  two,  three,  six,  ten, 
twelve,  figures  are  best  expressed  by  the  Arabic  numerals.  Ordinals 
may  generally  be  expressed  by  Arabic  cardinals,  except  first,  second, 
third,  sixth,  tenth,  twelfth,  which  should  be  written  phonographically. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


61 


Exercise  on  the  Final-hook  Logograms. 


-, 

*• 

4 

5  \ 

6  L 

7  . 


I  >1  O  2 

I       Xvl 

\        J       V 


\   J 


/     •  x  \  .a*.  ^ 


II     Al 

13 
H 


r 


r 


±..n~r;-i?, 

c 
:> 

,  \ 

^  v  c  \  £  ^  /  ( 


62  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

THE  SMALL  W-HOOK. 

122.  The  Small  W-hook. — A  small  hook  at  the  beginning  of  /, 
ray,  m,  and  n  represents  w.     See  lines  I  to  n. 

123.  Attachment  to  Curves. — Like   all   other  hooks   the  w-hook 
takes  the  motion  of  the  curve ;    that  is  to  say,  it  is  written  on  the 
concave  side  of  the  curve. 

124.  Attachment  to  Ray. — Attached  to  ray  the  w-hook  is  written 
with  involute  motion. 

125.  Vocalization  of  Outlines  Containing  the  W-hook. — The 
unvarying  rule  in  vocalizing  outlines  containing  the  w-hook  is  to  write 
and  read  the  vowels  with  reference  to  the  stroke  and  not  with  refer- 
ence to  the  hook,  to  which  a  vowel  can  never  be  placed.     In  this  re- 
spect the  w-hook  is  like  the  circle-.?.     Compare  paragraph  80. 

126.  Rules  for  Writing  the  Stroke  and  Hook  Forms  of  W. — 
a.  When  a  word  begins  with  w  and  the  following  consonant  is  /,  ray, 
m  or  n,  use  the  w-hook,  except  when  the  w  is  followed  by  two  vowels, 


one  of  which  is  accented  ;    thus,  write  wear 

\ 

b.  When  a  word  begins  with  a  vowel  followed  by  w  use  the  stroke ; 
thus,  ware    c^"^   •>  aware     X^^ 

127.  Medial  Use  of  Small  W-hook. — While  the  small  w-hook  is 
most  useful  at  the  beginning  of  words  it  may  occasionally  appear  in 
middle,  as  in  line  7. 

128.  Combined  Circle-s   and  W-hook. — S  preceding  w  may  be 
expressed  by  placing  the  circle  within  the  hook.     See  lines  12  and  13. 

129.  Hw.  — When  h  precedes  w  it  may  be  indicated  by  shading  the 
hook.     See  lines  14  and  15,  and  compare  paragraph  60. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


63 


r 


11  (J- 

12  -ft 

13  c?~^ 

14  »6 


Exercise  on  the  Small  W-hook. 


r 


r 


r    rv 


^r     YI 


v/ 


V 


"5  _  x 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 

130.  The  Liquids. — The  peculiar  quality  of  /  and  r,  which  causes 
them  to  be  classed  as  "  liquids,"  is  their  power  of  combining  with  or, 
so  to  speak,  flowing  into  other  consonants.    Either  /or  rmay  combine 
with  a  preceding  consonant  and  'unite  closely  with  it  in  the  same  syl- 
lable.    The  combinations  thus  formed  may  be   aptly  spoken  of  as 
doiMe  consonants.     These  combined  sounds  are  heard  at  the  beginning 
of  such  words  as  play,  pray,  blew,  brew,  fly,  fry. 

131.  The  L-hook. — Double  consonants  of  the  /  series  are  repre- 
sented in  phonography  by  attaching  a  small  initial  involute  hook  to 
the  stroke  consonant  which  precedes  the  /.     The  /  hook  is  regularly 

attached  to  the  following  strokes  only:  ^  //,  \  bl,  \  tl,   \  dl,  /    chl, 

//7»e ^>c gl,  V/,  ^vl,    ^thl,   (^dhl,  cJ  ski.     Shi  is  always 

written  upward  and  never  stands  alone,  but  must  be  joined  to  some 
other  stroke,  as  it  would  otherwise  be  read  shn.    See  pars.  22  and  101. 

132.  Double  Consonants  Considered  as  Indivisible  Compounds. 
— The  learner  must  accustom  himself  to  thinking  of  a  double-conson- 
ant sign  as  representing  an   indivisible  compound,  and  should  not 
consider   the  hook  as  separately  representing  the  /.     It  is  therefore 
best,  in  speaking  of  the  double  consonants,  to  name  each  by  a  single 
syllable  ;  thus    \  is//,  as  heard  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  word  apple, 
and  no\.pee-el,  which  would  indicate  \f    . 

133.  Vocalization   of    Double   Consonants. — Double  consonants 
are  vocalized  exactly  like  simple   consonants.     If  a  vowel  follows  a 
double  consonant,  both  consonants  represented  by  the  combined  sign 
are  read  before  the  vowel.     See  lines  i  to  8.     If  a  vowel  precedes  the 
double  consonant  it  is  read  before  either  of  the  consonants  represented 
by  the  combined  sign.     See  lines  9  to  15- 

134.  Imperfect  Hooks. — When  the  /-hook  appears  in  the  middle 
of  an  outline  it  cannot  always  be  made  perfect  in  form,  but  must 
sometimes  adapt  itself  to  the  preceding  stroke  as  a  slight  offset,  more 
or  less  closely  resembling  the  form  of  the  perfect  hook.     See  lines  14 
and  15,  and  compare  par.  59. 


THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


8\ 
9\ 

10 


Exercise  on  the  L-Hook. 

\  \v  V  \  V 


\ 


XD 


\   V    V 


14 


'5 


/\ 


(i 

-v. 


66  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

DOUBLE  CONSONANTS.— Continued. 

135.  The  R-hook. — Double  consonants  of  the  r  series  are  repre- 
sented  by  attaching   a   small    initial   evolute  hook    to  the   following 
strokes:     \pr,  \6r,    I   tr,    I    dr,  /  c/ir,   / jr,  c — kr, c — gr,      \fr, 

\  vr,    )  thr,    )  dhr,  _J  shr,  Jr  zhr. 

136.  R-hook  on  Curved  Strokes. — As  a  hook  can  be  written  only 
on  the  concave  side  of  a  curved  stroke,  it  is  evident  that  the  /-hook 
can  be  regularly  attached  to  involute  and  the  r-hook  to  evolute  curves 
only.     But  as  the  combination  rr  is  relatively  infrequent  and  is  easily 
written  with  the  joined  strokes,  and  as  the  combinations  lur,  sr,  zr  are 
already  well  provided   for  in   the  phonographic  system  (see  pars.  79 
and  123),  a  great  advantage  is  obtained  by  writing  _/>-,  vr,  thr,  dhr  as 
shown   in   the   last  paragraph.     These  signs,  it  will  be  seen,  agree 
exactly  with  the  straight  strokes  in  this  respect,  that  the  r-hook  com- 
binations are  simply  the  /-hook  combinations  inverted.     If  the  sign  // 
\  for  instance,  be  made  of  a  piece  of  wire,  and  then  turned  over, 
it  becomes  pr    \;  in  like  manner  by  inversion  ft   \_  becomes  fr      \ 
rl  \^  becomes  vr    \  ////  (_    becomes  thr    ),  dhl  \    becomes  dhr    ) 

137.  Mnemonics  for  L  and  R-hooks. — If  the  Zeft  hand  be  held 

up  with  the  first  finger  crooked,  the  outline  of  the 
//  will  appear,  and  by  turning  the  hand  in  the 
various  positions  of/,  t,  ch,  k,  all  the  double  con- 
sonants of  the  /-hook  series  will  be  formed.  In 
like  manner,  the  .tfight  hand  will  give  the  r-hook 
series.  The  learner  may  also  remember  that  the 
involute  motion  with  which  the  /-hooks  are  formed 
is  "Zeft-hand"  motion,  and  the  evolute  motion 
which  forms  the  r-hooks  is  "A'ight-hand  "  motion. 
See  paragraph  78. 

137*7.  Tick-h  before  Double  Consonants. — Tick-^  may  be  writ- 
ten before  any  double  consonant  except  /'/,  gl,  shl,  rl,  ml,  kr,  gr,  fr, 
vr,  Ir,  mr. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


67 


Exercise  on  the  R-hook. 


V      X 


V 


,o 


'3 

14 
15 


N, 


I 


-1      -1 


7        > 


J 


f      > 


s 


t 


- 


3- 


V 


S 


P- 


68  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

DOUBLE  CONSONANTS.— Concluded. 

138.  Irregular  Double  Consonants. — Since  the  small  initial  hook 
attached   to  (    <r        <• •>  ^_^  represents  w  (see  paragraph  123)  it  is 
evident   that  /  and  r-hooks    cannot  be  regularly  attached  to  these 
strokes.     The  combinations  rl,  ml,  nl,  ngl  and  Ir  are  therefore  distin- 
guished by  making  the  hook  large  (see  lines  I  to  4),  and  the  combi- 
nations mr  and  nr  by  shading  the  strokes  (see  lines  5  and  6).     These 
signs  are  termed  irregular,  ml  and  nr  being  especially  so. 

139.  Use   of  the.  Double    Consonant-signs. —  In    general,    the 
double  consonant-signs  should  not  be  used  when  a  distinct  long  vowel, 
a  diphthong  or  an  accented  short  vowel  occurs  between  the  two  conso- 
nants,  as    in   the  words  pole  \f~ " ,    pile       >/      ,  repel   /f\f~ ',  but 
should  be  used  when  no  vowel  occurs  between  the  letters  (see  page 
65,  lines  I  to  8 ;  page  67,  lines  I  to  8)  or  when  the  vowel  is  an  unac- 
cented short  or  obscure  vowel  (see  page  65,  lines  9  to  15;  page  67, 
lines  9  to  15). 

140.  Intervocalization  of  Double  Consonants. — Strict  adherence 
to  the  rule  given  in  paragraph  139  would  occasionally  cause  long  and 
awkward  outlines  for  words  which  might  be  written  with  convenient 
forms  could  a  vowel  be  expressed  as  between  the  two  consonants  of  a 
double  consonant.     Intervocalization  may  therefore  be  indicated  in 
such  cases  by  writing,  in  the  same  position  as  for  the  regular  sign, 
a  small  circle  before  the  double  consonant    stroke    to    represent  the 
heavy  dot   vowels,  and   after  the    stroke   to  represent  the  light  dot 
vowels  (see  lines  7  to  9).     The  dash  vowels,  diphthongs  and  coales- 
cent-signs,  both  light  and  heavy,  are  struck  through  the  double  con- 
nant  stroke  (see  lines  10  to  14).     If  the  first  or  third-place  dash  inter- 
feres with  an  initial  or  final  hook  or  circle,  place  it  just  before  the 
beginning  or  just  after  the  end  of  the  stroke.     The  beginner  should 
use  intervocalization  with  caution,  employing  it  chiefly  in  outlines  of 
considerable  length. 

NOTE. — When  a  word  begins  with  rand  /is  the  next  consonant  the  intervocal- 
ized  r/-hook  is  generally  employed,  in  order  to  avoid  the  inconvenient  forms  which 
result  from  the  use  of  ray-el  and  ray-lay  ;  thus  write  with  the  r/-hook  the  words 
rail,  roll,  rule,  relative,  relation,  realm,  relish,  and  the  like. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


69 


Exercise  on  the  Irregular  Double  Consonants. 


v.  • 


3 


-**- 


Exercise  on  Intervocalization. 


v 


. 


^ 


U 


70  THE   MANUAL  OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

TRIPLE  AND   QUADRUPLE  CONSONANTS. 

141.  Triple  Consonants. — When  s  precedes  the  double  consonants 
a  series  of  triple  consonants  is  formed,  as  heard  at  the  beginning  of 
such  words  as  splash,  spray,  straw,  scream,  etc.     This  series  of  sounds 
is  expressed  in  phonography  by  writing  the  circle-j  within  the  /  or 
r-hook,  as  in  lines  I  to  3. 

1410.  Vocalizing  of  Triple  Consonants.  When  a  vowel  is 
written  after  a  triple  consonant  it 'is  read  last  (see  line  i),  but  when 
it  is  placed  before,  it  is  read  after  the  s  and  before  the  double  con- 
sonant. See  lines  2  and  3,  and  compare  par.  &2a. 

142.  Medial    Triple    Consonants. — Triple    consonants    are    fre- 
quently found  in  the  middle  of  words  (see  lines  4  to  8),  and  in  such 
cases  the  circle  may  represent  z  as  well  as  s. 

143.  Imperfect  Triple    Consonants. — When   a  circle  is    written 
within  an  imperfect  double  consonant  hook  (see  paragraph   134)  the 
circle  cannot  be  perfectly  formed  and  written  completely  within  the 
hook.     It  must  therefore  be  lengthened  into  a  loop  in  such  a  direction 
as  shall  indicate  the  hook  as  distinctly  as  possible.    See  line  8.    In  a 
few  cases  an  imperfect  str  follows  the  w-hook,  as  in  line  9. 

144.  Irregular   Triple    Consonants. — When  skr,  sgr,  sfr,  or  svr 
follows  t  or  d,  and  when  spr  or  sbr  follows  ch  or  j,  the  loop  becomes  so 
imperfect  as  to  be  too  difficult  for  practise  and  the  forms  are  therefore 
written  irregularly,  as  shown  in  line  10. 

145.  Initial   Spr   Series. — When    the    circle   precedes   a   straight 
double  consonant  of  the  r-hook  series  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  it 
is  not  necessary  to  write  it  within  the  hook,  but  the  whole  combina- 
tion may  be  contracted  to  a  small  circle  on  the  evolute  side  of  the 
stroke  (see  lines  n  to  14).    This  will  be  perfectly  legible,  as  the  small 
circle  is  always  written  to  straight  strokes  with  involute  motion  to  re- 
present s.     See  par.  79  a,  and  compare  par.  105.  . 

146.  S  before  Stroke-h. — By  analogy  with  the  spr  series,  s  may  be 
written  before  stroke-/*  with  the  outline  f  ,    This  form  is  rarely  used 
but  may  be  employed  in  writing  such  words  as  Soho,  Sa/iara. 

147.  Quadruple  Consonants. — The  loop-.rf  may  be  expressed  as 
preceding  a  straight  stroke  of  the  r-hook  series  at  the  beginning  of 
the  word  by  writing  the  loop  with  evolute  motion.     See  line  15,  and 
compare  par.  107. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


71 


Exercise  on  Triple  and  Quadruple  Consonants. 

\       V    V    Vf      \       \ 

\     -r     .r  v 


13 


\ 


A- 


*    T-         f~y- 

0. 


h  h 


<r 

J 


1 


x 


V       3- 


72  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

THE  BACKWARD  N-HOOK. 

148.  Backward  N-hook.  —  A  small  backward  hook  written  through 
the  stroke  may  be  used  to  represent  the  initial  syllables  in,  en,  tin,  as 
preceding  (a)  any  straight  triple  consonant  of  the  spr  series  (see  lines 
I  to  3),  or  (b)  any  evolute  circle  attached  to  a  curve  (see  lines  4  107). 
It  will  be  noticed  that  this  backward  hook  differs  from  the  final  w-hook 
in  that  it  has  a  syllabic  and  not  an  elementary  value.     Compare  para- 
graphs 88  and  113. 

THE  LARGE  W-HOOK. 

149.  Large  W-hook.  —  A  large   initial   involute  hook  may  be  at- 
tached to  the  strokes  /,  d,  k,  g,  to  represent  the  combinations  tw,  dw, 
kw,  gw,  (see  lines  8  to  12).     These  combinations  are  best  named  hvay, 
dway,  kway,  gvuay. 

150.  Use  of  Tway,  Dway,  Kway  and  Gway.  —  a.  When  a  word 
begins  with  tw,  dw,  kw,  or  gw,  use  the  large  w-hook.    b.  In  the  middle 
of  a  word  the  hook  may  be  used  if  perfectly  convenient,  as  in  line  13, 
but  it  should  not  be  used  if  at  all  difficult  or  inconvenient  to  form. 


Thus  in  words  like  esquire  £  —  \  ,  entwine  ^^  ,  the  hook  should  be 

omitted  and  the  proper  coalescent-sign  used. 

151.  Phonetic  Analysis  of  Qu.  —  It  is  sometimes  difficult  for  be- 
ginners to  analyze  words  which  in   the  ordinary  spelling  contain  the 
letters  qu,  but  the  difficulty  will  disappear  when  it  is  understood  that 
the  sounds  always  represented  by  these  letters  are  really  kw. 

152.  Circle-s  before  Large  W-hook.  —  The  circle-j  may  precede 
the  large  w-hook  either  at  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  an  out- 
line by  being  written  entirely  within  the  hook.     See  line  14. 

153.  Large  W-hook    in    Foreign  Words.  —  In    addition    to    the 
strokes  metioned  in  paragraph  149,  the  large  w-hook  may  be  written 
to/and£.     These  combinations  are  useful  in  writing  many  foreign 

word,  as  X    pueblo  (Spanish),  V    bois  (French),  but  are  of  no  utility  in 
English.     X 

154.  Y-hook  after  B.  —  The  form  ^\  may  be  written  to  represent 
the  combination  of  b  and;)',  heard  at  the  beginning  of  many  Scandi- 
navian names,  as  Bjornson,  but  is  of  no  utility  in  English. 


THE    MANUAL    OK    PHONOGRAPHY. 


73 


3         v 

4 
5 


I3 


(2 


Exercise  on  the  Backward  N-hook. 


\  \  \ 

\       \      \ 


< 


A   .       / 


"it 


Exercise  on  the  Large  W-hook. 


<L 


74 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


INITIAL  HOOK  LOGOGRAMS. 

(j        well  v_      full-y  >    every,  very 

c^        where  C^x  only  J     three 

when* 

<i_>    one 

p 

tell,  till 

twelve 

call* 

difficult-y 


\      principle-al-ly  /  their,  there 

\     remember-ed  _/  sure-ly 

I       truth  _s  pleasure 
dear 


Mr.,  remark  ,  , 

able-} 


,_ —     care 
\     from 


more 
near,  nor  * 


INITIAL  LETTERS,  Etc. 

155.  Initials. — Initials  of  names  or  titles  may  be  written  in  phono- 
graphy or  in  longhand,  many  writers  preferring  the  distinctiveness  of 
the  latter  method.    In  any  case,  C,  G  (soft),  Q  and  ^Tmust  be  written 
in  longhand,  as  there  are  no  phonographic  equivalents  for  these  letters. 
In  writing  vowel  initials    phonographically   the    nominal   consonant 
must  be  used.     See  paragraph  73. 

156.  Emphasis. — Emphasis  is  expressed  by  striking  a  wave  line 
(^^-^^]  under  a  single  word  and  a  straight  line  under  several  con- 
secutive words. 

157.  Accent. — If  for  any  critical  purpose  it  is  necessary  to  indicate 
the  accent  of  a  word,  it  may  be  done  by  writing  a  small  cross  beside 
the  accented  vowel ;  thus,  *)'  ^'.raj,  •)•*  £r.?0y/' 


THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


75 


Exercise  on  the  Initial-hook  Logograms. 


4. 


C 


T 


\on 


Y      I 

/        J 


C 


-3  J 


\       f      x     \    " 


s     \     ^ 


76  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 

158.  Vocal  Affinity. — A  strong  affinity  exists,  in  the  English  and 
in  other  languages,  between  sounds  of  a  like  nature  with  respect  to 
vocality — that  is  to  say,  a  voiced  sound  is  much  more  likely  to  be 
immediately  followed  by  a  voiced  than  by  a  whispered  sound ;  con- 
versely, a  whispered  sound  is  more  likely  to  be  immediately  followed 
by  a  whispered  than  by  a  voiced  sound.     This  is  observed  in  plurals, 
which  are  regularly  formed  by  adding  s  (a  whispered  sound)  to  the 
form  of  the  singular  when  that  ends  with  a  whispered  sound,  as  lock, 
locks;  and  z  (a  voiced  sound)  when  the  singular  ends  with  a  voiced 
sound,  as  log,  logs  (=logz).     Vocal  affinity  has  an  equally  strong  il- 
lustration in  the  formation  of  the  past  tenses  of  weak  verbs — those  of 
which  the  past  tense  is  usually  represented  by  ed  in  the  ordinary  spell- 
ing.    The  sound  which  forms  these  past  tenses  is  t  (whispered)  when- 
ever the  present  tense  ends  with  a  whispered  sound,  as  pluck,  plucked 
(=pluckt),  and  d  (voiced)  whenever  the  present  tense  ends  with  a 
voiced  sound,  as  plug ,  plugged  (=plugd). 

159.  The  Halving  Principle. — The  frequent  occurrence  of  t  and  d 
in  past  tenses,  as  well  as  in  other  cases,  is  provided  for  in  phonography 
by  what  is  called  the  "halving  principle."     By  halving  a  consonant 
stroke,  t  or  d  is  added  according  as  the  stroke  is  light  or  heavy — t  being 
added  to  a  light  stroke  and  d  to  a  heavy  stroke.    See  lines  I  to  3. 

160.  Vocalization  of  Half-lengths. — a.  A  vowel  before  a  half- 
length  stroke  is  read  first.     See  line  4.    b.  A  vowel  after  a  half-length 
stroke  is  read  next  after  the  primary  letter  but  before  the  added  t  or  d. 
See  line  5. 

161.  Halving  of  L,  R,  M,  N. — The  rule  for  writing  given  in  par. 
159  would  agree  exactly  with  the  phonetic  principle  stated  in  par.  158 
if  it  were  not  for  the  fact  that  /,  r,  m,  and  «,  although  voiced  sounds, 
are  represented  by  light  lines,  contrary  to  the  general  method  of  re- 
presentation explained  in  par.  6.     When  these  strokes  are  halved  t  is 
added  because  they  are  light.     See  line   6.     But  as  these  strokes  re- 
present voiced  sounds  it  is  desirable  to  add  the  voiced  sound  d ;  and 
this  is  done  by  shading  the  strokes  when  halved  for  that  purpose.    See 
line  7.     This  necessitates   that  y,  w,  mp  and   ng  never  be  halved. 
Half-length  Id  should  always  be  written  down. 

162.  Tick-h  on   Halved  Strokes.— The  tick-A  is  attached  to  half- 
length  exactly  as  it  is  to  full-length  strokes.     See  line  8. 

163.  Circles  and   Loops  on   Halved   Strokes. — The  circles  and 
loops  are  attached  to  half-length    exactly  as  they  are  to  full-length 
strokes.     See  lines  9  to  12. 

164.  Halved  Double  and  Triple  Consonants. — The  /and  r-hook 
strokes,  as  also  the  large  w-hook  strokes,  are  halved  like  simple  strokes. 
See  lines  13  to  15. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


77 


Exercise  on  the  Halving  Principle. 


b 


7  r> 


1 


T  T 


11  \o 

12  "\ 

13  ^ 

14  ^ 


1- 
<X 


•«) 


78  THE   MANUAL  OF   PHONQGRAPHY. 


THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE.— Concluded. 

165.  Halved  Final-hook  Strokes. — The    final-hook   strokes -may 
be  halved  to  add  either  t  or  d.     See  lines  I  to  3.     To  distinctly  indi- 
cate the  added  d  the  hook  may  be  thickened,  but  this  is  seldom  neces- 
sary in  practise.     Although  w,  y,  mp  and  ng  cannot  be  halved  when 
simple,  they  may  be  when  followed  by  a  final  hook.     See  line  3. 

1 66.  Halved  W-hook  Strokes. — When  a  small  w-hook  stroke  is 
halved,  the  addition  of  either  t  or  d  is  indicated.     When  d  is  added 
the  stroke  is  not  shaded.     See  line  4. 

167.  Halved  Ray. — Ray  may  be  halved  whenever  it  is  joined  to 
some  other  stroke  (see  line  5)  but  it  must  not  be  halved  when  it  would 
be  the  only  stroke  in  the  word.     Words  like  rate  ^\ ,  and  write  /vl 
must  be  written  in  full. 

168.  Half-lengths  Joined  at  a  Tangent. — A  half-length  stroke 
cannot  generally  be  used  unless   it  makes  a  distinct  angle  with  its 
adjacent  stroke,  as  half-lengths  joined  at  a  tangent  (cp.  par.  25  c) 
produce  indistinct  outlines.     If,  however,  the  half-length  stroke  is  a 
heavy  curve  and  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  joined  is  light,  the  tangent 
joining  will  be  sufficiently  distinct.     See  line  6. 

169.  Half-length  S. — When  a  half-length  j  ends  an  outline  it  may 
be   written  either  upward  or  dowii»cud  according  to  convenience. 
See  line  7. 

170.  Rules  for  Writing  Past  Tenses. — a.  When  the  present  tense 
ends  with  a  full-length  stroke  (simple  or  compound)  halve  that  stroke 
to  form  the  past  tense.     See  page  77,  lines  I  to  3.     b.  Light  double 
consonants  may  be  halved  to  add  d  in  forming  past  tenses.     See  page 
79,  line  8.     <r.  When  the  final  full-length  stroke  in  the  present  tense 
forms  no  angle  with  its  preceding  stroke  the  halving  principle  cannot 
be  used  (cp.  par.  168)  and  a  stroke  t  or  d  must  be  added  (see  line  9) ; 
except  (d}  when  such  final  full-length  stroke  making  no  angle  with 
its  preceding  stroke  is  /,  in  which   case  the  t  should  be  halved  and 
disjoined  to  form  the  past  tense,  as  shown  in  line  10.     e.  When  the 
present  tense  ends  with  a  vowel  preceded  by  a  full-length  light  simple 
stroke,  the  halving  principle  should  not   be   used,  but  the  stroke-^ 
should  be  added  to  form  the  past  tense.     See  line  II.    /.  When  the 
present  tense  ends  with  a  half-length  stroke  add  the  stroke-fl'  to  form 
the  past  tense  (see  line  12),  but  (g)  if  the  stroke-*/  forms  no  angle  with 
the  preceding  half-length  stroke  or  cannot  be  coveniently  joined  to 
it,  it  must  be  disjoined  as  shown  in  line  13. 

171.  Free  Use  of  the  Halving  Principle. — In  certain  outlines, 
especially  in  those  of  two  or  more  strokes,  some  license  may  be  taken 
in  using  the  halving  principle  to  indicate  d  after  light  strokes  and  / 
after  heavy  strokes.     This,  however,  should  be  done  with  caution, 
and  only  when  a  decided  practical  advantage  and  no  ambiguity  results 
therefrom.     See  lines  14  and  15. 


THE   MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


79 


Exercise  on  the  Halving  Principle — II. 


lr 


3  6 

4  -r 


A     Vi     -Vi      Va 

\   vv>i 

h  t-i 


X 

1 


i 

13  i-l 

14  k 


rl 


il         vo*l 


\ 


8o 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


HALF-LENGTH   LOGOGRAMS. 


I 

did* 

could 

got* 
get 


after 


thought* 

without 

that* 

let 

lord,*  read* 


~>     word 


might* 

immediale-ly* 

made 

nature 

not* 

under 


172.  Logogram  for  "  Read." — The   word  read  in   the   foregoing 
table  is  the  present  tense  of  the  verb.     The  past  tense  and  participle 
are  written    /\ 

173.  Position    of   Half-length   Logograms.  —  Half-length    logo- 
grams are  written  both  on  and  above  the  line  in  accordance  with  the 
principle  explained  in  paragraphs  70  and  71.     A  half-length  logogram 
marked  *  is  so  written  that  its  highest  point  may  be  exactly  as  far 
above  the  line  as  the  top  of  a  stroke-/. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Si 


2  .        _ 

3  -^    - 

4!  = 

5   C)Uv- 
6 

7=     C 


Exercise  on  the  Half-Length  Logograms. 

-  ~  r  <  /  :f 

Nj       °        ..         o         C      o       <^ 

<  -a 


N 


\  J  I  I 

•  01 

^       --  ..        {, 


14 


1  \ 


x  \ 


82 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


HALF-LENGTH  LOGOGRAMS.— Concluded. 


particular-ly* 
"\      part 
spirit* 
behind* 
P     told 
1      toward 
77      child* 


C_ 


gentleman 

gentlemen* 

called* 

cared 

accord-ing-ly* 

quite* 

account 


cannot* 

great 
world 
seemed* 
mind* 


174.  Omitted  Consonants. — In  many  words  an  explodent  imme- 
diately follows  a  continuant  produced  in  the  same  position  of  the 
articulating  organs  (see  Appendix  A)  and  is  itself  immediately  followed 
by  some  other  consonant.  In  such  cases  the  explodent  may  generally 
be  omitted  without  lessening  the  legibility  of  the  word.  The  follow- 
ing are  the  only  important  instances  of  such  omission  : 
a.  P  omitted  after  m  : 


•l^  ^  A 

b.  A'  omitted  after  ng  : 


a-S 


c.    T  omitted  after  's  : 


\ 


x-    "\ 


Though  such  license  is  not  to  be  encouraged  in  pronunciation,  it  actu- 
ally exists  in  the  unconstrained,  colloquial  speech  of  most  persons. 
The  phonographic  outlines  which  result  from  such  omission  are  in 
a  practical  sense  so  much  superior  to  the  full  forms,  that  for  all  ordi- 
nary purposes  they  should  be  written. 

NOTE  —  For  graphic  convenience   «    may  be   omitted  from    the   prefix  trans. 


Thus  transmit  may  be  written  Js  instead  of  _£r^  .  Tras  may  be  substituted 
for  trans  with  perfect  safety  as  to  legibility,  since  there  is  not  a  single  word  in 
the  English  language  which  begins  with  the  syllable  tras. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  Half-Length   Logograms — II. 

</  /^  \?  s-9  v '          N         N«P 


3    —8 
4 
5 
6 

7 


r 


/       I 


\ 

3 

°  n 
4  .  \ 


r 


')    \    r  x  ^    V 


13 


14 

•5\ 


,  rv. 
f  <r 


/TV 


\ 


84  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

THE  DOUBLING  PRINCIPLE. 

175.  Ter  and  Der  Added  by  Doubling.— Any  curved  stroke  may  be 
doubled  in  length  to  represent  the  addition  of  ter  or  der.    See  lines  i  to  7. 

176.  Ther  and  Dher  Added  by  Doubling. — Any  curved  stroke 
may  be  doubled  in  length  to  add  thcr  or  dher  (see  lines  8  and  9)  pro- 
vided the  same  double-length  stroke,  similarly  vocalized,  is  not  already 
used  to  represent  a  word  of  the  same  part  of  speech  containing  ter  or 
der.      Thus,  feather    should   be    written    V_j\    because    V          already 
represents  fetter.  ^~-~. 

177.  Double-length  Ng. — Ng  may  be  doubled  to  add  ker  or  ger, 
and  also,  under  the  foregoing  rules,  to  add  ter,  der,  ther  or  dher.     See 
lines  10  and  n.  . 

178.  Double-length  Mp-mb. — Mp-mb  may  be  doubled  to  add  er, 
as  well  as  to  add  ter,  der,  ther  or  dher.     See  lines  12  and  13. 

178^.  The  Base-Line. — Upright  and  slanting  double-length  strokes 
do  not,  like  corresponding  single-length  strokes,  rest  upon  the  line ; 
they  are  so  written  that  the  line  shall  cut  them  at  the  middle  point. 

179.  Vocalization  of  Double-lengths. —  a.  A  vowel  placed  be- 
fore a  double-length    stroke  is  read  first,     b.  A  vowel  placed  after  a 
double-length  is  read  next  after  the  primary  stroke,  but  before  the 
added  value,  ter,  der,  etc. 

180.  Double-lengths   Joined    at   an   Angle.  —  A  double-length 
stroke  cannot  generally  be  used  unless  it  makes  a  distinct  angle  with 
its  adjacent  stroke.     Compare  paragraph  168.     Double-length  ;/  and 
ng  may  however  be  joined  with  continuous  motion  after  th  and  el. 

181.  Intervocalization  of  Double-lengths. — The  normal  vowel  in 
the  syllable  added  by  doubling  is  the  second-place  light  dash,  but  any 
short,  unaccented  vowel  may  appear  in  this  syllable  without  special 
indication.     If,  however,  the  vowel  is  long,  a  diphthong,  or  accented, 
it  should  be  indicated  by  intervocalization  in  a  manner  similar  to  the 
vocalization  of  double  consonants.     (See  line  14  and  cp.  par.  140.) 
When  a  double-length  double  consonant  is  intervocalized,   the  inter- 
vocalization takes  effect  in  the  double  consonant  and  not  in  the  syllable 
added  by  lengthening.     See  nortfiern  in  line  15. 

182.  N-hook   Added  to  Double-lengths.  — The  «-hook  may  be 
added  to  double-length  strokes,  and  is  invariably  read  after  the  syllable 
added  by  lengthening.     See  line  15. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercises  on  the  Doubling  Principle. 


86  THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


DOUBLE-LENGTH  LOGOGRAMS. 


'        letter     - ..     matter  neither* ^     another 

183.  Compounded  Logograms.— It  often  happens  that  a  gram- 
malogue  forms  a  part  of  some  other  word,  and  in  such  cases  the  corre- 
sponding logogram  may  sometimes  be  used  to  form  a  part  of  the 
phonographic  outline.  For  example,  the  word  to-morrow  may  have 
the  first  syllable  expressed  by  the  logogram  for  to  \  .  The  remainder 
of  the  word  is  joined  to  it  without  lifting  the  pen,  and  should,  of 
course,  be  vocalized.  In  such  outlines,  the  portion  written  with  the 
logogram  should  generally  be  placed  in  the  position  with  reference 
to  the  line  of  writing  which  it  would  hold  if  written  alone,  the  rest 
of  the  outline  accommodating  itself  to  the  position  of  the  logogram. 
When  two  logograms  are  used  in  the  same  outline,  the  first  is  usually 
placed  in  its  own  position  with  reference  to  the  line  of  writing.  The 
following  is  a  list  of  the  most  frequently-occurring  words  written  in 
this  manner.  Those  printed  with  the  double  hyphen  (;)  are  written 
with  broken  outlines  connected  by  the  phonographic  hyphen. 

Above-board,  aA^-mentioned,  above-named,  accordance,  accordant, 
accounta.nl,  advantageous,  after-dinner,  afternoon,  after-taste,  after- 
thought, afterward,  a//-round,  yi/-mighty,  a/most,  a/though,  altogether, 
awj'body,  anyone,  anything,  anyway,  an)>where,  become,  before-.hand, 
behindhand.,  caller,  careful,  careless,  childhood,  childish,  childless, 
<r////</like,  come-down,  commonplace,  commonwealth,  dearer,  dearest, 
dearly,  deamess,  everybody,  every-day,  everything,  ez'erywhere,  first- 
horn,  first-class,  firsthand,  forsake,  forswear,  forthwith,  forward,  full- 
ness, gentleman-like,  goodhy,  goodly,  goodnatured,  goodness,  gotten, 
greater,  greatly,  greatness,  imp>-m>able,  indeed,  \ni1ifferent-ce,  inset,  in- 
side, into,  inward,  justness,  letter-writer,  lordly,  manful,  mankind, 
man-of-war,  men-of-war,  minded,  misunderstood,  moreover,  natural, 
nearer,  nearly,  nearness,  nobody,  noway,  nowhere,  nowise,  ow^-sided, 
onward,  parted,  partly,  pleasurable,  j?jrfold,  j/^rpence,  so-called,  some- 
how, something,  somewhere,  spirited,  spin/less,  spiritual,  surer,  surety, 
teller,  telltale,  tenfold,  thereafter,  thereat,  thereby,  therefor-e,  there-of, 
there-on,  thereto,  t/tere\\nto,  thereupon,  there-.with,  threefold,  t/ireepence, 
thoughtful,  thoughtless,  to-day,  to-morrow,  ftco-faced,  twofold,  uncalled- 
for,  uncared-for,  underbid,  underdo,  undergo,  tinderhand,  underrate, 
underscore,  undersigned,  understand,  understood,  tindertake,  under- 
went, underwriter,  undid,  undo,  untoivard,  unusual,  uphold,  upright, 
upset,  «/ward,  K'flj'-bill,  wayward,  welfare,  well-being,  well-born,  well- 
bred,  wW/-known,  w^rrabouts,  whereas,  whereat,  whereby,  wherefore, 
whereof,  whereton,  whereupon,  wherewith,  workman,  worldly,  would-be. 

NOTE. — Whenever  the  logogram  men  is  joined  finally  in  compounding,  the 
vowel  must  be  written,  as  there  would  otherwise  be  danger  of  reading  it  man. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  the  Double-Length  Logograms. 

1  1  r  __  s  A  ^  '    \  o  s\  x 

2  '  ^n\  3  ~  s  *  S  (  -r*  v  •• 

3  ^  X    r  r-  i-  ^  J  v_ 


4 
5 
6 

7 
8  \ 


/     J' 


X°      ^* 


.       C 


V 


/>^        •       «       x — v       <}; 

/       ('       I      ~N/^ 
\       9    .)        f     (      /    C 


CN 


•4    ' 

.5  f  .  > 


/      ' 

( 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


THE  TICKS. 

184.  The  Ticks. — The  articles  the,  a,  an,  and  the  conjunction  and 
are  frequently  written  in  phonography  by  means  of  a  short  tick  joined 
to  the  outline  of  the  next  preceding  or  the  next  following  word.    The 
ticks  are  unshaded  and  are  about  as  long  as  a  vowel  dash ;  that  is, 
about  one-fourth  the  length  of  the  stroke  /.    The  ticks  should  be  used 
only  when   they  make   convenient  joinings.     A   tick  can  never  be 
joined  when  it  makes  an  angle  of  more  than  ninety  degrees  with  the 
stroke  to  which  it  is  attached  (unless  a  circle  intervenes  between  it 
and  such  stroke),  nor  can  it  be  joined  on  the  concave  side  of  a  curve. 

185.  Tick-the. — The  tick  which  represents  the  may  be  joined  to 
the  preceding  word  and  is  written  downward  in  the  direction  of  ch 
(see  lines  I  to  5)  or  upward  in  the  direction  of  r  (see  lines  6  to  8),  as 
may  be  most  convenient. 

186.  Tick  a-an-and. — The  words  a,  an,  and  and  are  all  represented 
by  the  same  tick.     When  joined  to  the  preceding  word  the  tick  may 
be  written  in  the  direction  of  t  (see  lines  9  and  10)  or  of  k  (see  lines 
II   and   12),   as  may  be  more  convenient;  it  is,   however,   preferably 
written  to  the  following  word,  when  it  is  invariably  written  in  the 
direction  of  k.     See  lines  13  and  14.     When  it  follows     I  /    / 
it  is  written  irregularly,  as  shown  at  the  beginning  of  line  12. 

DISJOINED  AFFIXES. 

187.  Disjoined  Affixes. — Certain   frequently-recurring  affixes  are 
conveniently  represented  by  special  signs  which  are  disjoined  from  the 
outline  of  the  main  word  or  "stem."     Disjoined  suffixes  are  placed 
near  the  end  of  the  stem-outline  and  disjoined  prefixes  near  its  be- 
ginning. 

188.  Disjoined  Suffixes. 

a.  -ing.     When  the  stem  ends  with  involute  motion  the  stroke 
^s  is  generally  the  best  form,  as  also  it  is  after  the  strokes    /*  <^-^ 
,. — N  s~^.-    After  evolute  motion  and  after  all  other  straight  strokes  use 
a  small  dot  immediately  following  the  stem-outline.  See  page  91,  line  i. 

b.  -ings.    When  -ing  is  represented  by  a  dot,  the  plural  should  be 
represented  by  a  small  circle  placed  in  the  position  of  the  dot.     See 
page  91,  line  2. 

c.  -ing-the.     When  the  follows  a  word  ending  with   the  dot-z'wf, 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  the  Tick-the. 

,^    'V  t,    v.y. 

/t  •>  > 

2  /  ^_/  <±t 

svvnj,^ 

4   V  V>  £         S         ^ 

5\  >  I          J  /         /A          ^ 

6/  /  £          J          ^         '\         ^ 

7  J-       ^      r  a'      <-ir        -s-\t       ^       -~<j 

8  V       V      L6       _^        Vv,       C- 

i 

Exercise  on  the  Tick  A-an-and. 


10  x\p             ^          kp           (>             >  jl  ^ 

•i  XL        L      /                1  1  S- 

V  \r  C- 

13!         1         7        7  X  T 

14  7                  7        T  1  (p 


90  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

DISJOINED    AFFIXES.— Concluded. 

-ing-the  may  be  expressed  by  writing  the  tick  in  the  position  of  the  dot. 
See  opposite  page,  line  3.  After  ch,j,  s,  z,  s/i,  and  zh  the  disjoined 
tick  may  be  struck  in  the  direction  of  p. 

d.  -/)'.     In  all  cases  where  final  /  does  not  join  conveniently,  -ly 
may  be   expressed   by  a  disjoined   stroke-/.     See   line  4.     In    rapid 
writing  it  is  sometimes  convenient  to  write  the  disjoined  /  downward 
rather  than  upward. 

e.  -l-ty,  -r-ty,  usually  -ility,  -ality,  and  -arity,  are  expressed  by  dis- 
joining that  stroke  which  represents  the  consonant  immediately  pre- 
ceding the  affix.    This  disjoined  stroke  should  be  written  close  to  and  a 
little  below  the  portion  of  the  outline  which  precedes  it.     See  line  5. 

f.  -ship  is  expressed  by  a  disjoined  stroke  sh. 

g.  -self,  -seh'es.     -self  is  expressed  by  a  disjoined  circle-.?  written 
at  the  side  of  the  last  stroke  of  the  stem,     -selves  is  expressed  by  a 
large  circle  similarly  placed. 

189.  Disjoined  Prefixes. 

a.  Con-,  Com-,  Cog-.     Con-  and  its  modifications  com-  and  cog- 
are  represented  by  a  light  dot  immediately  preceding  the  beginning  of 
the  stem-outline.     See  line  8.     When  either  of  these  syllables  is  found 
in  the  middle  of  a  word,  that  is  to  say,  when  it  is  preceded  by  another 
prefix,  the  con,  com,  or  cog  is  expressed  by  its  omission,  the  portion 
of  the   word  which  precedes  it  being  written  near  the  beginning  of 
the  stem-outline.      See  line  9.     This  preceding  portion  may  be  vocal- 
ized for  exactness,  but  in  general  this  is  not  necessary. 

b.  Counter-,    Contra-,    Contri-,    Contra-    are    expressed  by  a  short 
tick  generally  in  the  direction  of  ch,  but  before  ray  and  m  it  may  be 
written  in  the  direction  of/.     See  line  10. 

c.  Circum-  is  expressed  by  a  disjoined  circle-J  placed  at  the  side 
of  the  first  stroke  of  the  stem-outline.     See  line  n. 

d.  Self-  is  expressed  by  the  disjoined  circle-.?  placed  at  the  side  of 
the  first  stroke  of  the  stem-outline.     If  self-  is  followed  by  -con-,  -com-, 
or  -cog-,  the  circle  should  be  written  in-  the  position  of  the  dot  con; 
that  is,  at  the  beginning  of  the  stroke.     See  line  12. 

e.  Inter-,  Intro-,  Enter-  are  expressed  by  half-length  n  disjoined. 
See  line  13. 

f.  Magni-,  Magna-  are  expressed  by  stroke-w  disjoined.  See  line  14. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  on  Disjoined  Suffixes. 


/A 


3>       y 

4V       > 

5  <£ 

6  - 

•-3 

7 


. 


-r 


<V 

L 


y 


•^9 


Exercise  on  Disjoined  Prefixes. 


j-  t  1 


t 


i 


12 


13 


•>-* 


v^j.     '          I      -7; 


92  THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

OUTLINE  FORMATION. 

190.  New  Kind  of  Practise  Recommended. — The  student  who 
has  thus  far  carefully  studied  the  text  and  illustrations  and  who  has 
mastered  the  writing  exercises,  is  prepared  to  benefit  by  practise  of  a 
new  kind ;  that  is,  copying  into  phonography  connected  matter  taken, 
say,  from  any  well-written  English  book  or  from  the  editorial  page  of 
a  daily  newspaper,  and  also,  writing  from  dictation  such  matter  at  a 
rate  of  speed  just  within  his  power  to  follow  the  reader   and   write 
accurately.     In   writing  such   matter  he  will,  of  course,  come  upon 
many  words  not  contained  in  the  writing  exercises  of  this  Manual, 
but  if  these  writing  exercises  have  been  faithfully  practised  and  truly 
mastered,  the  student  will  have  acquired  a  thorough  familiarity  with 
all  the  leading  principles  of  outline  formation  and  will  write  most  of 
these  new  words  without  hesitation. 

191.  Variety  of  Outlines    Possible. — Occasionally,   however,   he 
will  meet  with  problems  which  will  have  to  be  solved.     Since  /,  d,  f, 
v,  s,  z,  sh,  zh,  /,  r,  n,  w,  y  and  h  are   represented   in   phonography  in 
more  than  one  way,  it  is  evident  that  many  words  may  be  written 
with  several  possible  outlines.     The  word  abbreviation,  for  instance, 
has  no  less  than  twenty-one  possible  forms,  though  not  more  than  two 
of  these  can  be  considered  as  in  any  way  available  in  practise. 

192.  Initial  and  Final  Consonants. — The  observant  student  of 
the  foregoing  pages  will  have  recognized  the  fact  that  most  of  the 
rules  respecting  outline  formation  therein  given  are  such  as  apply  to 
the  manner  of  writing  the  first  and  last  consonants  of  outlines.     See 
paragraphs  56,  57,  61,  62,  63,  64,  65,  66,  81,  93,  94,  96,  102,  105,  106, 
107,  no,  115,  126,  145,  147,  148,  170.     These   rules   are    sufficiently 
extensive  in  their  application  to  leave  little,  if  any,  doubt  as  to  how  to 
write  initial  and  final  consonants. 

193.  Medial  Consonants. — No  hard  and  fast  rules  can  be  formu- 
lated for  determining  the  manner  of  writing  those  consonants  which 
lie  between  the   first  and  last   consonants  of  any  word.     In  many, 
indeed  most,  cases  it   is   the  necessary  result  of  the  kind  of  phono- 
graphic  material  available  for  writing  the  word.     In  certain  cases, 
however,  the  medial  consonant  is  capable  of  se'veral  forms  of  expres- 
sion and  the  learner  may  sometimes  well  be  in  doubt  in  determining 
whether  to  express  medial  consonants  by  means  of  appendages  and 


THE   MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


93 


EXERCISES  IN  THE  CORRESPONDING  STYLE. 


Benevolence. 


J    ,  .  ")  IL,  s  •  A- 

-  - 


.  -^  1  4  \,  c  °  If,  J 

7  ^^^,  /  )  %.,  .U 


.i  A 


,  )  >  r  '  ^  ) 


'^-  4  *",  ~  . 

C    \  I  ,  -1   I 


^  r 


\  >v  v,  .  V  r,  " 


94  THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

modified  strokes  or  to  write  them  out  "in  full"  with  the  alphabetic 
strokes.  In  the  case  of  medial  s  and  z  no  difficulty  is  felt,  for  the 
circle  is  almost  invariably  the  available  and  desirable  form.  See 
paragraph  81  h.  The  medial  use  of  the  loop  to  represent  st  is  quite 
restricted  (see  paragraph  91  c]  owing  to  the  fact  that  in  most  cases 
the  loop  would,  if  used,  be  followed  by  a  stroke  written  in  such  a 
direction  as  to  cut  through  the  stroke  to  which  the  loop  is  attached. 
Most  of  the  doubtful  cases  are,  therefore,  those  of  medial  consonants 
which  may  be  expressed  by  hooks. 

194.  Motives  of  Outline  Formation. — The  two  all-important 
considerations  which  must  guide  the  phonographer  in  determining 
whether  to  use  the  hook  or  the  stroke  representation  of  such  medial 
consonants  are  certainty  in  reading  and  facility  in  writing,  which  are, 
indeed,  only  equivalent  expressions  for  legibility  and  speed.  Growing 
out  of  these  considerations  are  certain  "motives"  of  outline  formation 
which  in  the  absence  of  definite  rules,  must  determine  the  particular 
form  to  be  used.  These  may  best  be  illustrated  by  outlines  contain- 
ing a  medial  n.  They  are : 

a.  Balance  of  Motion.     It  is  desirable  to  avoid  the  occurrence  of 
the  same  kind  of  curvilinear  motion  both  preceding  and  following  a 
straight  stroke  and  at  a  tangent  thereto.     For  this  reason  words  like 
branch,  apprentice,  springe,  cringe,  grange,  are  written  with  the  stroke-w, 
and  words  like  plunge,  sponge,  blanch,   blench,   are   written  with  the 
hook.     This  secures  in  both   cases  what  has  been  aptly  called  the 
"balance  of  motion"  and  maintains  the  straightness  of  the  stroke, 
which  otherwise,  in  rapid  writing,  would  tend  to  become  a  curve. 

b.  Avoidance  of  Obtuse  Angles.     It  is  desirable  to  eliminate  obtuse 
angles,  as  checked  joinings  (see  par.  24)  are  easily  and  rapidly  made 
in  exact  proportion  to  the  diminution  of  the  angle.     For  this  reason 
words   like  serenity,   warranty,  wrench,   range,   are   written    with  the 
stroke-;/  instead  of  the  hook,  and  words  like  tinge,  dingy,  Dante,  are 
written  with  the  hook  instead  of  the  stroke. 

c.  Avoidance  of  Unnecessary  Checks.     It  is  desirable  to  reduce  the 
number  of  checks  in  any  outline,  and  for  this  reason  the  use  of  the 
hook  in  such  words  as  clinic,  tinge,  jaunty,  canopy,  chinchilla,  is  prefer- 
able to  the  use  of  the  stroke. 

d.  Avoidance  of  Abrupt  Checks.     It  is  desirable  to  avoid  abrupt 


THE   MANUAL   CF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


95 


,  h_  C  ^    V      , 
./  » 


Bridging  East  River. 


o  o 


l8ll 


V. 

r 


\  . 

s 


96  THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

or  "jerky"  checks  and  to  substitute  for  them,  whenever  possible,  such 
as  produce  smooth,  flowing  outlines.  Thus,  the  stroke  is  to  be  pre- 
ferred to  the  hook  in  such  words  as  month,  Monday,  eminence,  promi- 
nence, manage,  impinge,  etc. 

e.  Avoidance  of  Imperfect  Hooks.    It  is  desirable  to  avoid  imperfect 
hooks,  especially  such  as  are  highly  imperfect,  and  for  this  reason  the 
use  of  the  stroke  in  words  like  tonic,  carbonic,  panic,  is  preferable  to 
the  use  of  the  hook.     In  like  manner,  in  words  like  assignor,  dinner, 

joiner,  the  wr-hook  is  preferable  to  the  w-hook  followed  by  a  down- 
ward r. 

f.  Derivation.    It  is  desirable  to  write  derivative  words  in  accord- 
ance with  the  outlines  used  for  the  primitive  words  from  which  they 
are  immediately  taken.     For  this  reason  it  is  better  to  use  the  hook  in 
such  words  as  finer,  finest,  finely,  fineness,  finery,  thus  building  the 
outlines  for  these  words  upon  the  form  of  the  primitiveyJW. 

195.  Conflicting  Motives. — It   will  be  seen  that  in  deciding  the 
outline  for  a  given  word  we  may  have  to  consider  two  or  even  more 
conflicting  motives,  each  of  which,  if  considered  by  itself,  would  lead 
to  an  outline  different  from  that  indicated  by  the  others.     In  such 
cases  the  balance  of  advantage  must  be  kept  in  view ;    and  here  it  is 
that  outline-building  affords  some  play  for  individual  judgment  and 
taste.     Happily,  the  opinions  of  the  best  reporters  do  not  vary  widely 
in  such  matters;  but  there  will  probably  never  be  absolute  uniformity 
of  practise  among  them,  as  some  will  always  attach  greater  value  to 
certain  motives  than  do  others.     Whatever  variation  may  exist,  how- 
ever, among  well-trained  phonographers  will  not  in  the  slightest  de- 
gree affect  their  power  to  read  each  other's  notes,  so  long  as  the  latter 
are  written  with  reasonable  care  as  to  penmanship. 

196.  Use    of   the    "Phonographic    Dictionary." — Whenever   in 
copying  printed  matter  into  phonography  the  learner  meets  with  a 
word  the  correct  outline  for  which  does  not  unhesitatingly  come  into 
his  mind,   he  should  carefully  weigh  the  principles  and  motives  of 
outline  formation  which  should  lead  him  to  a  decision,  and  he  should 
then  write  the  word  in  accordance  with  his  own  judgment.     On  read- 
ing his  notes — for  all  notes  should  be  carefully  read  and  criticised  by 
the  learner— each  doubtful  word  should  be  marked  and  the  student's 
outline  compared  with  that  given  for  the  word  in  the  Phonographic  Die- 


THK    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


97 


c  ^  x      r  _ 
i  °  r  (  x 


v 


/  --  X  ^ 


• 


,  "3  r 


..i  \ 


f 


V  . 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


tionary.  Should  any  discrepancy  exist  between  the  two,  he  should  then 
endeavor  to  discover  the  reason  therefor,  and  by  repeatedly  copying 
the  Dictionary  form  make  it  thoroughly  his  own.  In  writing  from  dic- 
tation, the  young  phonographer  must  not  pause  to  split  hairs  in 
deciding  upon  a  dubious  outline,  but  should  promptly  and  boldly 
write  an  outline  for  the  word,  which,  if  not  the  best  possible,  shall,  at 
least,  express  all  its  consonants  in  their  proper  order  and  in  such  form 
as  to  be  •vocalizable.  On  reading  the  notes  so  taken,  the  outline  should 
be  marked  and  compared  with  the  Dictionary  form.  The  Dictionary 
should  never  be  used  to  save  tJie  learner  the  trouble  of  thinking  how  an 
outline  should  be  written.  Successful  phonographers  are  not  made  by 
any  process  of  mere  memorizing  of  outlines.  If,  however,  the  Dic- 
tionary is  consulted  after  the  student  has  done  his  best  in  any  case,  it 
will  prove  a  helpful  friend  and  an  invaluable  timesaver,  especially  to 
the  self-instructed  student. 

197.  The    Study   of  Printed    Phonography. — The   learner   who 
wishes  to  avail  himself  of  all  possible  helps  will  not  neglect  to  read 
and  copy  a  great  deal  of  printed  phonography.     By  observing,  com- 
paring and  reflecting  upon  the  outlines  which  he  will  there  find,  he 
will  rapidly  gain  familiarity  with  the  best  methods  of  outline  forma- 
tion.    It  is  also  an   excellent  exercise   to  transcribe   into  longhand 
printed   phonographic    pages    which    have    been   carefully  read  and 
studied  and  then  turn  the  matter  back  into  phonography  either  by 
copying  or  from  dictation.     The  fidelity  with  which  notes  so  written 
correspond  to  the  printed  notes  should  then  be  observed  and  discrep- 
ancies marked  for  special  practise.     Suitable  printed  phonography  for 
the  kind  of  practise  here  recommended  will  be  found  on  the  pages 
opposite  this  chapter,  in   the  Phonographic  Readers,  and  in  monthly 
instalments  in  the  pages  of  the  Phonographic  Magazine. 

198.  Deviations  from  the  Standard  in  Rapid  Writing. — As  the 
student  through  prolonged  and  faithful  practise  gains  more  and  more 
familiarity  with  phonographic  forms,  he  will  find  it  easier  and  easier 
to  execute  them  with  the  pen  or  pencil  rapidly  and  gracefully.     In  so 
doing  minor  deviations  from   the    absolute    standard    of   proportion, 
slant  and  shade  will  of  necessity  creep  into  his   writing,   but  these 
should  be  carefully  kept  within  the  narrowest  limits  consistent  with 
an    easy  and   natural   style   of  writing.     The   student  who    has  most 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


99 


Franklin  as  a  Printer. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


conscientiously  adhered  to  the  exact  standard  of  proportion  in  the 
earlier  stages  of  his  practise  will  be  the  one  who  can,  with  greatest 
safety  and  in  the  shortest  time,  adopt  a  dashing,  cursive  mode  of 
writing  without  diminishing  the  legibility  of  his  notes.  No  fixed 
standard  of  size  can  be  prescribed  which  will  be  equally  suitable  to  all 
writers,  but  the  size  adopted  in  these  pages  is  that  best  adapted  to  the 
average  phonographer,  who  should  avoid,  on  the  one  hand,  a  large 
and  clumsy  style  of  writing,  and,  on  the  other,  one  too  much  cramped 
and  condensed.  The  matter  of  chief  importance,  however,  whatever 
standard  of  size  may  be  adopted,  is  to  retain  the  proper  proportion  be- 
tween the  full-length,  half-length  and  double-length  strokes.  This 
caution  is  especially  necessary  in  the  case  of  strokes  which  stand 
alone — not  joined  to  other  strokes.  Many  learners  show  a  tendency 
to  efface  the  distinction  between  the  three  sizes  of  strokes  by  making 
the  half-lengths  a  little  too  long  and  the  jdouble-lengths  a  little  too 
short.  This  should  be  carefully  guarded  against  and  if  any  deviation 
from  the  true  standard  be  allowed  it  should  be  in  precisely  the  oppo- 
site direction— that  of  making  the  half-lengths  a  trifle  shorter  and  the 
double-lengths  a  trifle  longer  than  their  true  proportions.  No  detri- 
ment to  legibility  can  result  from  this  course,  and,  unless  it  be  pushed 
to  an  unreasonable  extent,  it  will  impose  no  restriction  upon  the 
writer's  speed. 

199.  The  "Corresponding  Style." — The  student  whose  object  in 
learning  phonography  is  simply  to  find  in  it  a  convenient  and  time- 
saving  substitute  for  longhand  in  letter-writing,  diarizing,  personal 
memoranda,  and  the  like,  need  give  his  further  attention  only  to  the 
faithful  practise  of  vocalized  phonography  as  explained  in  the  fore- 
going paragraphs.  He  will,  however,  find  it  convenient  to  omit  the 
vowels  from  the  frequently-recurring  words  given  on  page  102.  The 
form  of  writing  thus  produced  has  been  called,  for  the  sake  of  dis- 
tinction, the  "corresponding  style"  of  phonography.  No  doubt, 
however,  most  learners  of  the  art  desire  to  acquire  at  least  that  degree 
of  skill  in  phonographic  writing  which  will  enable  them  to  take 
dictations  with  considerable  speed,  and  such  are  advised  to  proceed  at 
once  to  the  study  of  the  "easy  reporting  style"  on  page  172. 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


'    t  (    (o  !        I    ) 


< 


J       5-e-  *L     \  r^\ 


U 


-H? 


IO2 

THK    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

OUTLINES  OF  WORDS 

OF   FREQUENT   OCCURENCE,  UNNECESSARY   TO  VOCALIZE. 

-= 

/-.    against 
(    >    also 

S~              f~    little 
^     long 

r^ 

.                       always 
d         £—  •  —    America 

make 
*•  —  •  '—~—,   many 

•  —  i^— 

x    among 
-         ^_p^       answer 

f                    material 
•/                 »   method 

\ 

V    article 
being 

/  belief-ve 

^~\                ^~C    Misses 
/             Mrs 

•"---  -r                   /    month 

\ 

V^     better 

'         v_iX      necessary 

c 

between 
—  '-^  came 

*--P             v_^        necessity 
N  nothing 

OS  ' 

certain 
'    1  credit 

\^          perhaps 
X_^   person 

/^ 

-^       ^-^i        earnest 
^~-   enough 

^-j                   s^    quality 
rapid 

<^-x 

c^       firm 

S                 s)   refer 

V 

^—  forget,  forgot 

(/        relation 

«-\ 

further 

s~—^      s\       render 

> 

^          //1^^^     heretofore 

S    v<   report 

-i 

^--j  hundred 
•  "    indeed 

•     ;>             ^_^   return 
"^                6         seldom 

I         sometime 
a-~^^              1  —   take 

indebted 
s"^»-   independent 

1 

instead 
^~   intend 

1    s>                   p   turn 
v     twenty 

S—  ] 

—  \     into 

^    unless 

keep 

whether 

c 

/<L-j>   learn 
'           likewise 

/  —              s\   work 
</                r    '  yesterday 

THK    MANUAL   OK    PHONOGRAPHY. 

103 

TABLE  OF  GRAMMALOGUES. 

ARRANGED    ALPHABETICALLY    FOR   THE   WRITER. 

A 

Be                            \ 

did* 

1 

above                          v> 

been                          \, 

differ-edf 
ent-ce 

[ 

accord-ing-ly*        <=  — 

before 

difficult-y 

=— 

account                   —  =, 

behind*                      ^ 

do 

1 

advantage                / 

beyond*                     ° 

done 

J 

after                          \^ 

but                                I 

Every 

^ 

again                       = 

Call*                       c  

First 

0 

all  *                            N 

called*                     <^_ 

for 

^ 

alone                        f 

can                           -  —  3 

from 

^ 

already*                    ' 

cannot*                     ~~^> 

full-y 

A 

an 

care 

Gave 

—  = 

and 

cared                         ^~ 

general-ly 

/ 

another            . 

could                          

gentleman 

(/ 

any*                         ^^ 

child* 

gentlemen* 

' 

are                          // 

come                       

get 

— 

as                               o 

common* 

give-n* 



aught*                       f 

Deai- 

gone* 

-^ 

*  The  logogram  is  written  above  the  line. 

IO4                                    THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

TABLE  OF  GRAMMALOGUES.—  Continued. 

good                        — 

lord®                          ~> 

not® 

- 

got® 

Made 

Of* 

\ 

great 

man                        ^~~s 

on® 

' 

Has                        ° 

matter          ,  . 

one 

^ 

have                       ^^ 

may 

only 

^ 

he* 

me® 

opinion* 

^ 

him 

men* 

or* 

I 

his®                          o 

might® 

ought* 

' 

how                          A 

mind*                     ^ 

Part 

^ 

I® 

more                     e^ 

particular-ly® 

^ 

immediate-ly®       ^ 

most                     ^^s> 

phonography 

V, 

important-ce*       /~^ 

Mr.®                       <T^ 

pleasure 

J 

ed 
improve-                ^^ 
ment 

must                       ^^5> 

princip  ,  , 

\ 

in®                            ^ 

my® 

Quite® 

c_ 

is*                             o 

Nature 

Read* 

^ 

it                                 1 

near*                      <^^ 

remark* 

^ 

its                              ^ 

neither®       --  _^ 

remember-ed 

X 

Just                          / 

next                       ^y 

Said 

r 

Know                     ^^. 

no 

seem* 

o— 

Let                           f~ 

none                       ^__? 

seemed* 

^ 

letter                 f 

nor*                        s^_s 

seen* 

^ 

THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.                                    10$ 

TABLE  OF  GRAMMALOGUES.—  Concluded. 

shall-t                      J 

three                        J 

what*                      D 

should 

till                             f 

whatever                \ 

six*                         o   o 

to                             N 

when*                   c  > 

so                                ) 

together               

where                   ^/ 

some                       6  —  - 

told                          P 

which                     / 

spirit*                     °\ 

too                            \ 

whichever             & 

such                         / 

toward                     T 

who                          / 

sure-ly                      _/ 

truth 

will                         (^ 

Tell 

twelve                     \j 

with*                        c 

ten                             J 

two                           \ 

without                    ( 

than                         >> 

Under                     -~> 

word                         "^ 

that*                        ( 

up                              \ 

world                      </ 

the* 

upon 

would                       3 

their                         / 

usual-ly                  ^/ 

Ye* 

them                       V 

Very                         ^ 

yet 

then                        V, 

Was                          ) 

you                            0 

there                        ) 

way                              ) 

young                     ^^ 

thing*                    **-s 

we*                            c 

your                      f 

think                        V 

well                         f 

yours                      fe 

this                          4 

went                        *-• 

thought*                  ( 

were                          c 

106                                    THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

TABLE    OF  LOGOGRAMS. 

ARRANGED    PHONETICALLY    FOR    THE    READER. 

\     up 

b      twelve 

common* 

\    upon 

P      told 

come 

\    P™cipjj.ly 

1       toward 

n     n      six* 

^       particular-ly* 

do 

—  3    can 

^      part 

1       said 

c  call* 

^      spirit* 

J       done 

c  difficult-y 

\    be 
\)    been 

I 

I      differ-ed, 
ent-ce 

1 
1       dear 

c  —    care 
—      could 

\i    above 

1       did* 

—a     cannot* 

<V 

>    remember-ed 

/       which 

—3     account 

^     behind* 

/       such 

.-  _     called* 

it 

S     child* 

c—      accord-ing-ly* 

L      its 

/      advantage 

c^—      cared 

J       ten 

/     just 

C_     quite* 

{,       whatever 

v       general-ly 

give-n* 

f      tell,  till 

</      gentleman 

together 

1       truth 

</     gentlemen* 

—  .,    again 

*The  logogram  is  written  above  the  line. 

THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY.                                  107 

TABLE   OF  LOGOGRAMS.—  Continued. 

—  =   gone* 

(       without 

s~^    my,  me* 

3   gave 

)      so 

^~^    him,  may 

—      got* 

0      first 

o~~^    some 

—     good,  get 

)      was 

6    "    seem* 

c—      great 

o      is,  his* 

^^a    most,  must 

V     for 

o      as,  has 

^~^>    men* 

V^    phonography 

J    shall-t 

f^~~^    man 

V.    full-y 

.x     sure-ly 

£~^     Mr.,  remark* 

1    from 

tS     usual-ly 

<?~^    more 

*s-      after 

Jr     pleasure 

>—      might* 

v^    have 

f        will 

-^      immediate-ly* 

«     every,  very 
\       think 

f       alone 
C     well 

—  >      made 
^     seemed* 

)      three 

r      let 

^  — 

^      mind* 

(       thought* 

f        letter 

s~^     important-ce* 

\       them 
Vo      this 

//^  are 

t/       where 

ed 
'    s     improve- 
ment 

,  ^  matter 

\5      than,  then 

(/       world 

^_^.     in,   any* 

*)      their 
re 

">      lord,  read* 

^_^     no,  know 

(       that* 

"^      word 

q_^    seen* 

108                                  THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

TABLE  OF  LOGOGRAMS.—  Concluded. 

^£?    next 

^    way 

I       or* 

v  ?    opinion* 

f         your 

I       but 

?    none 

b         yours 

/      on* 

o__^     when* 

/      he* 

/      should 

<^^i    one 

.       the* 

v      I* 

<^y   only 

•      a 

A      how 

c:  '    nor,  near* 

an,  and 

c       we* 

^      not* 

\      all* 

c       with* 

-.j      nature 

^      too,  two 

c       were 

^      under 

1       already* 

3      what* 

^     went 

1       before 

^       would 

neither* 

/       ought,  aught* 

o        ye* 

^  another 

/      who 

<->      you 

—     thing* 

\       of* 

u      yet 

^s    young 

\        to 

"      beyond* 

WRITING  EXERCISES. 


DIRECTIONS  TO  THE  STUDENT 

200.  Necessity  for  Writing   Exercises. — The  explanations  and 
reading  exercises  in  the  preceding  portion  of  this  book  will,  if  care- 
fully studied,  enable  the  learner  correctly  and  rapidly  to  read  printed 
phonography.     The  power  to  do  this,  however,  does  not  of  necessity 
imply  the  power  to  write  phonography  either   correctly   or  rapidly. 
The  way  to  learn  to  write  phonography  is  to  write  it,  and  no  learner 
can  hope  to  become  a  skillful  reporter,  who  is  not  willing  to  cover 
reams  of  paper    with    phonographic  notes  written    with   painstaking 
care.     The  following  exercises  have  been  prepared  with  great  care  in 
order  to  furnish   the  exact  kind   of   writing   practise   needed   by  the 
student  as  he  progresses  from  point  to  point  in  learning  the  system, 
and  until  he  has  fully  mastered  these  exercises,  he  should  confine  his 
writing  practise  strictly  to  them,  after  which   he  may  with  advantage 
practise  upon  a  great  variety  of  matter  of  his  own  selection. 

201.  Writing  Materials. — Before  setting  out  to  write  the  exercises, 
the  student  must,  of  course,  provide   himself  with  the  necessary  writ- 
ing materials,  consisting  of  paper,  pen  and  ink,  and  pencil,  and  the 
very  best  quality  of  each  should  be  selected.     All  are  so  cheap  that 
no  economy  can  be  exercised  in  chosing  an  inferior  grade. 

202.  Paper. — Phonography  should  be  written  on  ruled  paper  only. 
Expressly  for  the  use  of  learners  copy-books  are  prepared  with  double 
lines  between  which  the  phonographic  characters  are  to  be  written. 
Double-ruled  paper,  though  not  a  necessity  to  the  "beginner,  is  a  great 
help  to  him,  as  it  assists  him  to  secure  uniformity  of  size  in  writing. 
The  student  is  advised  to  get  at  least  four  phonographic  copy-books, 
or    their    equivalent    in    "student's  paper"    to  be   used  as  hereafter 
directed. 

203.  Pen  and  Ink — Pencil. — Pen  and  ink  are,  under  all  ordinary 
circumstances,  to  be  preferred  to  the  pencil,  and  the  learner  should 
begin   to   use   them   at  once.     A  rather   fine-pointed,  soft,  steel  pen 
should  be  selected,  such  as  the   Phonographic  Institute  Steel  Pen  No. 

. (109) 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


I,  the  Spencerian  Nos.  I  and  2,  or  the  Gillott  No.  332.  Many  excellent 
inks  are  in  the  market,  and  it  is  unnecessary  to  specify  any  particular 
make.  Use  the  pen  generally  and  occasionally  the  pencil,  but  do  not 
confine  yourself  exclusively  to  either.  The  pencil,  when  used,  should 
be  of  medium  hardness  and  small  diameter,  such  as  the  Phonographic 
Institute  Lead  Pencil. 

204.  Manner  of   Holding  the   Pen  or   Pencil. — The  opinion  of 
phonographers  will  probably  remain  divided  as  to  the  best  method 
of  holding  the  pen  or  pencil.     The  learner  is  advised  to  hold  his  pen 
or  pencil   in   the  manner  usual   in   writing  long-hand — between  the 
thumb  and  the  first  and  second  fingers — unless  he  finds  that  in  so 
doing,  he  is  unable  easily  and  accurately  to  write  the  stroke  /  in  an 
exactly  vertical  direction.     If  after  a  few  day's  practise  any  difficulty 
which  may  be  found  in  doing  this  does  not  disappear,  he  may  find  it 
of  advantage  to  hold  the  pen  between  the  first  and  second  fingers, 
keeping  it  in  place  with  the  thumb.     Whichever  method  is  adopted, 
the  hand  should  be  supported  lightly  on  the  nails  of  the  third  and 
fourth  finger,  and  the  student  should  sit  squarely  in  front  of  the  desk 
or  table,  steadying  his  body  with  the  left  arm,  so  that  the  right  arm 
may  be  perfectly  free  and  unimpeded  as  the  hand  glides  smoothly  and 
easily  from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  each  line  of  writing. 

205.  Preparation  for  the  Writing  Exercise. — The  learner  should 
take  up  writing  Exercise  I,  and  each  exercise  thereafter,  only  after 
having  made  careful  preparation   for  each,  in  turn,  by  studying  the 
text  corresponding  to  it  and  copying  many  times  the  reading  exercise 
on  the  page  opposite  the  text.     He  is  advised  to  do  this  in  the  follow- 
ing manner:    Take  one  of  the   four    copy-books  referred  to  in  para- 
graph  202  and  mark   it  "Practise   Book."     Write    in    this   practise 
book  each  outline  of  the  engraved  reading  exercises  on  page  17,  plac- 
ing each  outline  on  a  separate  line  and  at  the  extreme  left  end  thereof. 
When  the  exercise  is  thus  finished,  it  will  be  in  column  at  the  left 
side  of  several  succeeding  pages  of  the  book.     These  outlines  should 
now  be  carefully  criticised  and  corrected  by  the  teacher,  or  by  the 
student   himself,    if  self-instructed.     Now    begin  with  the  first  line, 
and  fill  it  with  as  many  repetitions  of  the  outline  that  begins  it  as  can 
be  made  to  go  on   the  line  without  undue   crowding.     Each  form 
should   be  made  slowly,   neatly  and  carefully,  and  each  should  be 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


compared  with  those  preceding  it,  so  that  any  inaccuracy  in  its 
formation  may  be  improved  upon  in  the  next.  When  all  the  lines 
are  filled  in  this  manner,  the  work  should  again  be  criticised,  but 
this  time  at  the  right  side  of  the  page.  All  slovenly,  misshapen,  or 
otherwise  defective  outlines  should  be  marked  and  rewritten  in  the 
second  copy-book  (which  should  be  marked  "Correction  Book"), 
at  least  one  line  being  written  of  each  corrected  outline. 

206.  How  to  Practise  the  Writing  Exercise. — When  this  tho- 
rough preparation  has  been  completed,  the  learner  should  take  up  the 
writing  exercise.      Write  the  words  "in  column,"  in  the  third  copy- 
book,   which    should    be   marked    "  Exercise   Book."     This  first,  or 
left-hand,    column    should   then   receive    careful    criticism    from    the 
teacher,  or  from  the  student  himself,  after  which  each  line  should  be 
carefully  filled.     Finally,  the  right-hand  column  should  be  criticised, 
and  all  defective  outlines  again  practised  in  the  correction  book. 

207.  Dictation  Exercises. — So  much  practise  of  the  lesson,  slowly 
and  carefully  written,  will  have  fitted  the  learner  to  benefit  greatly  by 
the  dictation  exercise  which  follows  the  writing  exercise.    This  should 
now  be  read  aloud  by  the  teacher  or  other   reader,  and  the  words 
should   be   written   and   rewritten  in  the   fourth   copy-book  (marked 
"  Dictation  Book")  until  the  learner  can  write  every  word  in  it  with- 
out an  instant's  hesitation.     It  is  not  recommended  that  the  learner 
should  try  to  write  the  outline  itself  with  any  great  speed,  though, 
of  course,  he  should  be  prompt  and  waste  no  time  in  writing  it.     No 
speed  will  be  gained  by  trying  to  "  hurry  up  "  but  rather  by  acquiring 
perfect  familiarity  with  each  principle  in  turn  through  such  frequent 
repetition  of  the  dictation  exercise  as  will  insure  that  every  outline 
can  be  written  with  perfect  promptitude  and  with  no  trace  of  the  hesi- 
tation which  comes  of  having  to   "stop  to  think,"  even  momentarily, 
how  any  outline  shall  be  written. 

208.  Hints  to  Self-instructed  Learners. — Write  slowly  and  care- 
fully at  the  outset.     The  foundation  of  a  good  style  of  writing  can 
be  laid  only  by  precision  in  the  formation  of  the  phonographic  cha- 
racters in  the  early  exercises.     Form  your  first  outlines  just  as  if  you 
were  drawing  rather  than  writing  them.     Rapidity  can  be  secured  by 
repetition  and  practise,   and  by  diligent   practise   both   rapidity  and 
accuracy  may  be  attained.     If,  however,  your  desire  to  write  fast  is 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


permitted  to  outweigh  your  resolution  to  write  well,  you  will  not  only 
delay  your  attainment  of  real  swiftness,  but  you  will,  most  likely, 
confirm  in  yourself  a  slovenly  and  illegible  habit  of  writing.  During 
the  first  month  of  your  practise  you  should  make  it  a  rule  [a]  to  name 
each  character  aloud  as  you  write  it ;  (6)  to  trace  each  character  as 
you  read  it.  By  pronouncing  each  character  aloud  as  you  write  it, 
the  ear,  eye  and  hand  are  trained  at  the  same  time — the  ear  to  recog- 
nize the  sound,  the  hand  to  shape  the  sign,  and  the  eye  to  judge  of 
the  accuracy  of  the  formation.  No  student  can  expect  to  become  a 
good  writer  of  phonography,  whose  ear,  eye  and  hand  have  not  been 
equally  and  harmoniously  trained.  When  reading  printed  phono- 
graphic exercises,  or  your  own  writing,  let  your  practise  be  to  trace 
the  outline  of  each  word  as  you  read  it,  by  using  a  wooden  stick 
sharpened  to  a  point,  or  a  pen  without  ink.  It  will  greatly  facilitate 
your  acquirement  of  phonography  carefully  to  read  and  review  each 
day  the  exercises  written  on  the  preceding  one.  They  should  be  read 
and  re-read,  aloud,  until  this  can  be  done  without  hesitation.  The 
neglect  of  this  rule  will  waste  your  time,  cause  you  to  over-look  much 
that;  you  might  profitably  review,  and  in  other  ways  hinder  your 
progress.  Do  not  read  through  the  entire  book  before  beginning  to 
write,  but  master  each  writing  exercise  in  turn  before  proceeding  to 
the  study  of  the  next  principle.  Still  less  need  you  display  your  skill 
by  attempting  to  "  puzzle  out  "  sentences  at  the  end  of  the  book, 
before  you  are  familiar  with  the  elements  of  which  they  are  composed. 
This  advice  will  be  needed  only  by  those  who  have  not  the  good  sense 
to  perceive,  or  whose  minds  have  not  been  so  far  disciplined  by  study 
as  to  know  that  no  art  or  science  can  be  truly  mastered,  the  study  of 
which  is  not  begun  and  continued  in  a  systematic  manner. 

EXERCISE   I. 

Combinations  of  Consonants. — See  paragraphs  21  to  24. 

Pars.  21  and  22. — P-lay,  b-ray,  d-lay,  ch-lay,  j-ray,  v-lay,  s-lay, 
lay-b,  lay-d,  lay-f,  lay-dh,  ray-d,  ray-p,  ray-v,  ray-ish. 

Par,  23  a. — K-m,  k-ng,  g-mp,  m-g,  n-k,  n-ng. 

Par.  23  b. — P-g,  b-k,  b-mp,  t-m,  t-ng,  d-m,  d-ng,  ch-mp,  j-g,  j-n, 
f-ng,  v-n,  th-m,  s-m,  ish-k,  ish-n,  lay-n,  ray-n,  ar-g,  ar-n,  w-ng,  k-lay, 
g-ray,  mp-lay. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  113 

Par.  23  c. — K-b,  k-ch,  k-v,  k-ish,  g-t,  g-f,  g-ish,  m-ch,  mv,  mb-d, 
n-b,  n-ch,  n-v,  n-el. 

Par.  23  d. — P-d,  p-f,  p-ar,  b-j,  b-dh,  t-p,  t-th,  t-ar,  d-ch,  d-z,  ch-p, 
ch-d,  j-b,  j-s,  f-p,  f-ch,  f-s,  f-el,  v-el,  th-f,  ar-ar,  w-j,  w-ar,  y-el. 

Par.  23  e. — Lay-ray,  lay-lay,  ray-lay,  h-lay. 

Dictation  Exercise.  —  P-ray,  b-lay,  t-lay,  t-ray,  d-ray,  d-shay, 
ch-ray,  j-lay,  f-lay,  f-ray,  v-ray,  th-ray,  z-lay,  z-ray,  ish-ray,  lay-p, 
lay-t,  lay-ch,  lay-j,  lay-v,  lay-th,  ar-lay,  ar-ray,  ray-b,  ray-t,  ray-ch, 
ray-j,  ray-th,  ray-z,  ray-zh,  ray-el,  k-n,  k-mp,  g-m,  g-n,  g-ng,  m-k, 
m-m,  mb-m,  n-g,  n-n,  ng-k,  p-k,  p-m,  p-mp,  b-g,  b-m,  t-k,  t-g,  t-mp, 
t-n,  d-k,  d-g,  d-mp,  d-n,  ch-k,  ch-m,  ch-n,  j-k,  j-m,  j-mp,  f-m,  f-n, 
v-m,  v-mp,  v-ng,  th-k,  th-mp,  s-k,  s-n,  z-n,  ish-g,  ish-m,  lay-m,  lay-mp, 
ray-k,  ray-g,  ray-ng,  ar-k,  ar-m,  ar-mp,  w-k,  w-g,  y-k,  y-m,  k-ray, 
g-lay,  m-lay,  m-ray,  mp-ray,  k-p,  k-t,  k-d,  k-j,  k-f,  k-th,  k-z,  g-p,  g-b, 
g-d,  g-j>  g-th,  g-z,  ni-t,  m-d,  m-j,  m-f,  m-th,  mp-t,  mp-ch,  n-p,  n-t, 
n-d,  n-j,  n-f,  n-z,  n-ish,  n-ar,  p-t,  p-ch,  p-j,  p-th,  p-ish,  b-t,  b-ch,  b-v, 
b-th,  b-ish,  b-ar,  t-b,  t-ch,  t-dh,  t-el,  d-p,  d-b,  d-j,  d-th,  d-el,  d-ar, 
ch-b,  ch-t,  ch-f,  ch-ar,  j-t,  j-d,  j-el,  j-ar,  f-b,  f-d,  f-j,  f-th,  f-z,  f-ish,  v-t, 
v-ch,  th-d,  th-ch,  th-v,  th-el,  w-p,  w-b,  w-k,  w-g,  lay-lay,  ray-lay, 
t-m-lay,  d-m-ray,  t-mp-lay,  ray-p-ar,  n-t-m,  n-v-d,  b-lay-t,  n-g-j, 
b-k-m,  t-ray-f,  p-ar-lay,  ray-v-n,  d-n-ng,  ar-m-d,  ray-b-k,  b-ray-d, 
v-lay-v,  k-v-t,  d-n-d,  lay-v-t,  ray-b-ray,  lay-lay-t,  ar-m-v,  t-ray-n, 
v-ray-t,  m-ray-t,  k-ray-d,  ray-d-lay,  n-f-m,  lay-v-ng,  m-ray-k,  ray-n-d, 
g-lay-f,  t-n-s,  el-k-lay,  f-m-lay,  f-ray-th,  d-k-d,  m-m-ray,  p-ray-ish, 
h-p-lay,  ray-b-t,  d-p-t,  n-t-ray,  p-ray-t,  p-ray-d,  ray-ng-k,  d-shay-ng, 
k-m-Iay,  m-lay-t,  n-b-lay-t,  k-p-lay-ray,  p-ray-s-d,  b-m-ray-ng,  n-t- 
ray-el,  ar-m-v-ng,  n-t-ray-t,  mp-lay-f-ng,  n-t-lay-p. 

EXERCISE  II. 

Combinations  of  Consonants. — Continued. — See  paragraphs 
25  to  28. 

Par.  25  a. — P-p,  d-d,  k-k. 

Par.  25  b. — F-shay,  th-ng,  lay-w,  m-z. 

Par.  25  c. — P-ng,  t-ish,  t-v,  v-k,  m-p,  f-ar,  dh-s,  z-th,  lay-shay,  m-n, 
n-m,  w-f. 

Par.  26  a. — B-n,  d-t,  ch-j,  g-k,  th-b. 

Par.  26  b.— B-ng,  d-v,  dh-b,  zh-y,  w-v. 

Par.  27. — Ch-th,  j-dh,  z-ch,  dh-shay,  lay-s,  el-ng. 

Dictation  Exercise.  —  B-b,  t-t,  ch-ch,  j-j,  g-g,  ray-ray,  v-shay, 
th-n,  dh-n,  lay-ar,  ar-ish,  m-s,  mp-s,  p-n,  p-s,  p-z,  t-zh,  t-f,  k-ar,  f-k, 
th-p,  lay-k,  w-t,  y-t,  v-ar,  th-s,  s-th,  s-dh,  ish-el,  zh-el,  ar-f,  ar-v,  m-ng, 
mp-n,  n-mp,  ng-m,  p-b,  b-p,  b-s,  t-d,  d-ish,  d-f,  j-ch,  k-g,  g-ar,  f-g, 
lay-g,  m-b,  b-z,  d-zh,  v-g,  v-w,  dh-z,  z-dh,  mp-z,  w-d,  y-d,  y-zh,  ch-dh, 


114  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

j-th,  s-ch,  s-j,  z-j,  th-shay,  m-ish,  mp-ish,  lay-z,  el-n,  f-el-ng,  n-m-lay, 
p-s-lay,  el-ng-th,  k-v-lay-ar,  t-d-m,  el-n-j,  n-f-ar-m,  k-r-k,  ra-n-f-k-t-ray, 
m-n-p-lay,  m-ng-k,  f-k-t,  h-ray-t,  ray-ray-lay,  n-m-t,  m-n-t-lay,  w-v-d, 
v-k-t-ray,  b-ng-k,  k-k-ray,  lay-shay-t,  f-el-shay,  f-shay-n-s,  p-lay-s, 
m-lay-ish,  d-mp-ish. 

EXERCISE  III. 

Words  Containing  Long  Vowels. — See  paragraphs  29  to  33. 

Write  the  six  long  vowels  after  the  consonants  p,  t,  g,  f,  s,  ray,  m,  n. 

Write  the  six  long  vowels  before  the  consonants  b,  d,  ch,  v,  s,  ish,  ar, 
m,  ng. 

Write  the  six  long  vowels  after  lay,  hay,  (see  par.  34). 

Dictation  Exercise. — Be,  bay,  bah,  baw,  bow,  boo;  dee,  day, 
dah,  daw,  dough,  doo ;  key,  kay,  kah,  kaw,  ko,  koo;  re,  ray,  rah, 
raw,  ro,  roo ;  the,  thay,  thah,  thaw,  tho,  thoo ;  she,  shay,  shah,  shaw, 
sho,  shoo  ;  lee,  lay,  lah,  law,  low,  loo  ;  we,  way,  wah,  waw,  wo,  woo  ; 
epe,  ape,  ahp,  awp,  ope,  oop;  etc,  ate,  aht,  awt,  ote,  oot ;  eke,  ake, 
ahk,  awk,  oke,  ook ;  efe,  afe,  ahf,  awf,  ofe,  oof;  eeth,  ayth,  ahlh, 
awth,  oath,  ooth  ;  eeze,  aze,  ahz,  awz,  oze,  ooz ;  eel,  ale,  ahl,  av--l, 
ole,  ool ;  een,  ane,  aim,  awn,  own,  oon. 

EXERCISE  IV. 

Words  Containing  Long  Vowels. — Continued. — See  paragraphs 
34  to  38. 

In  writing  this  exercise  the  pupil  must  pay  no  attention  to  the  usual 
spelling  of  a  word,  but  simply  to  its  sound  when  deliberately  pro- 
nounced. Write  lay,  shay  and  ray  unless  /,  sh  and  r  are  printed  with 
an  italic  letter,  when  el,  ish  nudar  should  be  used. 

Me,  may,  nay,  no,  gnaw,  see,  say,  bee,  bay,  bah,  tea,  toe,  pay, 
day,  do,  though,  haw,  paw,  eat,  hay,  oat,  ate,  ale,  owes,  ooze,  each, 
chew,  team,  hoe,  jaw,  meek,  peak,  poke,  name,  came,  babe,  balk, 
both,  mail,  bathe,  peel,  Paul,  beam,  teach,  maim,  teeth,  tale,  boat, 
tall,  fade,  deep,  peep,  sha.de,  shape,  shave,  sheep,  daub,  deal,  beak, 
dale,  also,  below,  detail,  vacate,  dado,  aid,  caw,  daw,  ease,  cheek, 
gnawed,  heap,  jay,  rage. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Ace,  ache,  age,  ail,  aim,  ape,  awed,  awes, 
awl,  bail,  bait,  bake,  bale,  ball,  bajb,  barge,  beach,  beat,  became, 
bedaub,  belay,  beneath,  bole,  bought,  bow,  bowl,  cage,  cake,  caked, 
cape,  caulk,  caulked,  cawed,  chalk,  cheap,  choke,  coach,  coal,  cocoa, 
code,  coke,  comb,  coo,  cope,  cork,  dame,  date,  debauch,  decay, 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


deem,  defame,  delay,  depot,  doe,  doge,  dole,  dome,  dote,  dough, 
eel,  eke,  elope,  Esau,  eve,  evoke,  evoked,  fa,  faith,  fame,  fay,  fee, 
feed,  female,  fief,  Fiji,  foam,  foe,  folk,  forego,  foresee,  forge,  fork, 
form,  forth,  gage,  gale,  gall,  Galway,  game,  gay,  go,  goal,  goat, 
gorge,  heath,  heed,  jail,  Jew,  Jerome,  Job,  Joe,  joke,  jole,  kale, 
keel,  keep,  key,  keyed,  knave,  knee,  laid,  lathe,  lave,  law,  lay,  lea, 
leach,  leaf,  leal,  leap,  leash,  leave,  Leech,  Leith,  Lethe,  liege,  loaf, 
loath,  loathe,  lobe,  lope,  low,  lowed,  ma,  mail-coach,  make,  Malay, 
male,  mall,  Maumee,  maw,  May-day,  may-pole,  meal,  Mobile,  mole, 
mope,  moped,  moth,  mow,  nape,  neap,  neigh,  neighed,  oaf,  oak, 
oath,  oatmeal,  obey,  ode,  off,  opaque,  Osage,  own,  pa,  page,  paid, 
pail,  pall,  pawed,  pay-day,  pea,  peach,  peal,  peeped,  peerage, 
Phosbe,  poach,  pole,  pope,  porch,  pork,  potato,  saw,  shah,  shake, 
shale,  shame,  shawl,  .S/iawnee,  she,  sheaf,  sfieath,  j//eathe,  sheave, 
shoal,  shoe,  show,  sAowed,  sow  (v.},  tail,  take,  talk,  tame,  tape,  teak, 
teem,  teethe,  thaw,  thawed,  theme,  they,  thief,  thieve,  thong, 
thonged,  toll,  tomato,  tome,  torch,  tow,  vague,  veto,  vetoed,  vogue, 
wade,  wage,  wait,  wake,  wave,  waved,  weak,  weigh,  weighed, 
weight,  woe,  woke,  woo,  wove,  wreath,  wreathe,  wrong,  wronged, 
Ya/e,  yaw/,  yea. 

EXERCISE  V. 

Words  Containing  Short  Vowels. — See  paragraphs  39  to  41. 

First-place  light  dot:  Bit,  pick,  tick,  ditch,  pitch,  pig,  pith,  big, 
Dick,  dig,  dip,  dim,  tip,  pity,  pitchy,  finny,  pithy,  ditty,  Biddy, 
busy,  tinny. 

Second-place  light  dot  (written  before  the  second  consonant):  Etch, 
beck,  debt,  bet,  peck,  peg,  egg,  edge,  deck,  fed,  death,  beg,  jet, 
fetch,  keg,  Betty,  jetty,  Jenny,  penny,  bevy,  Jessie. 

Third-place  light  dot :  Pad,  patch,  add,  ash,  at,  tack,  bag,  bat,  pap, 
batch,  nag,  match,  tap,  baggy,  taffy,  natty,  chatty,  Fanny. 

First-place  light  dash  :  Odd,  botch,  pop,  pod,  bog,  bob,  fog,  knock, 
dodge,  top,  dock,  Tom,  dot,  jockey,  Johnny,  Bobby,  poppy,  copy, 
bonny,  doggy. 

Second-place  light  dash:  Up,  us,  pup,  bug,  touch,  tuck,  duck,  pug, 
tub,  tug,  buck,  tongue,  Dutch,  dug,  puppy,  putty,  buggy,  duchy, 
dummy,  puffy,  touchy. 

Third-place  light  dash  :  Cook,  hood,  book,  look,  took,  nook,  pussy, 
cuckoo,  cooky,  goody. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Abbey,  abbot,  acid,  academy,  Adam,  adage, 
agile,  agility,  agilely,  agate,  aiming,  alley,  alp,  amity,  anthem, 


Il8  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

EXERCISE  VIII. 

Words  Containing  Medial  A. 

Careful  speakers  make  a  clear  distinction  between  the  a  in  ask, 
mica,  avow,  etc.,  and  the  vowel  in  alms,  far,  guard  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  vowel  in  am,  fat,  gad  on  the  other.  This  medial  sound  of 
a  may  be  distinctly  represented  by  sign  number  9  in  Appendix  C, 
but  in  practical  writing  it  should  be  written  with  either  the  light  or 
heavy  third-place  dot,  according  to  the  preference  of  the  writer — 
some  approaching  in  their  own  speech  more  nearly  to  one  and  some 
to  the  other.  The  usual  pronunciation  of  most  speakers  undoubtedly 
more  nearly  resembles  the  sound  of  the  third-place  light  dot  and  that 
sign  is  accordingly  used  in  printed  phonography. 

Use  the  third-place  light  dot :  Ago,  aback,  taboo,  agap,  aloof, 
appall,  abate,  ability,  mamma,  toga,  Ithaca,  Java,  comma,  Elba, 
papa,  Judah,  Panama,  malady. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Abas/t,  abet,  agape,  agog,  Agatha,  ahead, 
Aleppo,  a/ong,  Alva,  among,  anatomy,  apathy,  Apollo,  apology, 
apeak,  avai/,  awake,  awoke,  away,  bigamy,  botany,  canoe,  cockatoo, 
Dana,  data,  demagogue,  demagogy,  efficacy,  fatigue,  inca,  Jaffa, 
Jonah,  lava,  Mecca,  Mocha,  manna,  Malta,  Numa,  omega,  .S^eba, 
votary. 

EXERCISE  IX. 

Words  Containing  U  (E,  I)  before  R. 

The  vowel  heard  in  hurt,  err,  fir,  (heard  only  before  the  consonant 
r)  is  in  quantity  a  long  vowel,  but  in  quality  it  very  closely  resembles 
the  second-place  light  dash,  with  which  for  practical  purposes  it  is 
written.  A  sign  to  express  this  sound  with  critical  exactness  is  pro- 
vided in  Appendix  C. 

"Err,  hurry,  Perth,  perch,  birth,  bearer,  birch,  Burke,  lurk,  lurch, 
earl,  urge,  Kirk,  mirth,  merge,  derth,  dirge,  purr,  burrow,  Burney, 
dirty,  cur,  shirr,  murk,  murky,  Murphy. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Use  the  writing  exercise. 

EXERCISE  X. 

Words  Containing  Diphthongs. — See  paragraphs  42  to  46. 

I:  Tie,  bile,  dire,  pyre,  pie,  eyes,  vie,  thigh,  thy,  nigh,  bite,  dyke, 
type,  knife,  chide,  chime,  gibe,  live,  guile,  five,  lyre,  rhyme,  mime, 
Ni/e,  tiny,  idol,  ally,  China. 


THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


OI  :  Toy,  boy,  oil,  coy,  foi/,  toil,  boil,  decoy,  enjoy,  annoy,  alloy, 
noisy,  oily,  boiler,  toiler,  uncoil,  envoy. 

OW  :  Out,  bout,  our,  owl,  cowl,  mouth,  gouge,  thou,  fou/,  couch, 
vouch,  allow,  endow. 

Dictation  Exercise.  —  Abijah,  afou/,  aisle,  allow,  alloyed,  allied, 
ally,  allowed,  alive.)  annoy,  annoyed,  aside,  avow,  bite,  biped,  bow, 
boy,  bough,  by,  chyme,  chide,  coy,  cow,  defy,  decoy,  defied,  deny, 
denied,  decoyed,  die,  dime,  dike,  Dinah,  Dido,  dignify,  Dow,  doit, 
dowdy,  edify,  Eliza,  enjoy,  endow,  espied,  espy,  eyed,  eyebeam, 
eyetooth,  eyeteeth,  fie,  fife,  foci,  Gemini,  gout,  gouty,  guy,  haut- 
boy, hide,  high,  ice,  icy,  Ida,  Ike,  imbibe,  item,  ivy,  joy,  kneehigh, 
knife,  lie,  lousy,  magi,  magpie,  mica,  Mike,  mow,  mouth,  now, 
noisy,  ossify,  out,  outvie,  pie,  pike,  pica,  pile,  pipe,  pied,  piped, 
pouch,  shy,  sow,Vthigh,  thy,  thou,  tie,  time,  tiny,  tide,  tied,  tidy,  toy, 
toyed,  type,  typify,  untie,  untied,  unalloyed,  unallowed  unannoyed, 
Vandyke,  vie,  viny,  vow. 

EXERCISE  XI. 

Words  Containing  Coalescents.  —  See  paragraphs  47  to  52. 

Write  the  long  we,  wa,  wah,  etc.,  before  t. 

Write  the  short  wi,  -we,  wa,  etc.,  before  /. 

Write  the  long  jy^,  ya,  yah,  etc.,  before  t. 

Write  the  short  _yz',  ye,  ya,  etc.,  before  /. 

Par.  52  a-  —  (i)  Weave,  wit,  wight,  widow,  widely,  witch,  war^, 
Waba^/z,  yearly. 

Sometimes  a  first-place  coalescent  may  be  introduced  into  the  middle 
of  an  outline  :  Unweaving,  unwitty,  outwit,  bewitch. 

(2)  Weep,  wave,  wait,  wet,  wage,  weak,  awake,  wing,  yam,  yoke. 

(3)  Woof,  youth,  watch,  Eugenia,  unity. 

Par.  52  b.  —  Fume,  dupe,  occupy,  gewgaw,  puny,  beauty,  immunity, 
tulip,  cubic,  assume,  Teutonic. 

Few,  new,  sue,  anew,  avenue,  bedew,  endue  vendue. 

Dictation  Exercise.  —  Wife,  wive,  witty,  wot,  weed,  weedy,  wad, 
wide,  withe,  withy,  witchery,  \vis/i,  was/iy,  walk,  weaving,  year,  yawl. 

Wavy,  wade,  wake,  wag,  waving,  waved,  web,  weight,  weighty, 
wed,  wedge,  wipe,  wick,  wink,  wove,  wooed,  woke,  Ya/e,  yellow,  yea. 
">Euphony,  use,  usurp,  unify,  waif,  yacht,  Yarrow,  Yankee,  yore. 

Assuming,  beweep,  cube,  Cuba,  cupola,  cubeb,  duke,  duty,  feud, 
fumy,  fuzee,  Lucy,  Luna,  mewed,  occupied,  pneumatic,  puke,  pupa, 
Punic,  putid,  thwack,  tube,  tunic,  tumefy. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Adieu,  ague,  Bellevue,  cue,  dew,  due,  emu,  hew,  hue,  lieu,  pew, 
renew,  thew,  undue,  venue,  view. 
Await,  aware,  away,  awake,  awoke. 

EXERCISE  XII. 

Concurrent  Vowels. —See  paragraphs  53  to  55. 

Par.  53  a. — Iota,  lanthe,  Ionic,  aorta,  Iowa,  Eo/ic,  iambic,  iodic. 

Par.  53  b. — Payee,  bayou,  avowee,  Leo,  Fabii,  genii,  radii,  Ohio, 
Pompeii,  cacao,  Bilbao. 

Par.  53  c. — Miami,  duello,  evacuate,  naTve,  chaotic,  poetic,  duet,  in- 
nuendo, coact. 

Par.  54. — Idea,  Noah,  haying,  poem,  viewing,  Moab,  deify,  neigh- 
ing, Jewish,  bias,  Josiah,  poesy,  peon,  piety,  moiety,  shadowy,  vowing, 
yEneid,  Naj//ua,  Medea,  diet,  bowie-knife,  buoyancy,  vacuity,  gaiety, 
embower,  diadem,  Joab,  lion,  variety. 

Par.  55. — Aria,  opium,  idiom,  piazza,  mania,  Harriet,  India,  idiot, 
ammoniac,  pneumonia,  caveat,  tedium,  envying,  espionage. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Attenuate,  Diana,  duenna,  Fayette,  hyena, 
ipecacuanha,  Joanna,  Louisa,  naivete,  naively,  Tioga,  towage,  un- 
poetic,  vacuum,  Wyoming. 

Acuity,  j^gean,  yEneas,  annuity,  annoying,  avowing,  bayonet, 
being,  boa,  Boaz,  Bowie,  Boadicea,  buoyant,  buoyantly,  chaos,  coyisA, 
Darius,  deity,  defying,  deifying,  dietetic,  diatonic,  duad,  edifying, 
eying,  feeing,  fiat,  Genoa,  gnawing,  Goliath,  hewing,  Hiero,  hoeing, 
Howard,  ingenuity,  inveighing,  Isaiah,  Jewess,  ]oas/i,  joyous,  joy- 
ously, Judea,  knowing,  knowingly,  Leah,  Leon,  Messiah,  meadowy, 
naiad,  ossifying,  Owen,  owing,  Paean,  Padua,  panacea,  pioneer,  pious, 
piously,  poet,  j//owy,  j^owish,  suet,  thawing,  theory,  Tobias. 

Acadia,  ammonia,  aria,  babyish,  Batavia,  begonia^  cameo,  deviate, 
demoniac,  Dieppe,  Ethiop,  Ethiopia,  Euphemia,  Eugenia,  Fabia, 
Guiana,  Guienne,  Iliad,  Ionia,  Lydia,  maniac,  monomania,  Numidia, 
odium,  olio,  Paphia,  Pavia,  tapioca,  theology,  Vienna. 

EXERCISE  XIII. 

The  Aspirate. — See  paragraphs  56  to  60. 

Par.  56. — Hem,  whom,  hazy,  heal,  Hawley,  halo,  hallow,  hair, 
hock,  hug,  humming,  whiggijA,  help,  Hiram,  harp,  herb,  humpy, 
whiplash,  humanity,  hilarity,  hectic,  homely,  hurl,  hellish,  hackney. 

Par.  57. — Happy,  hub,  heed,  heyday,  hoed,  heathy,  higher,  hurry, 
hewer,  hyena,  hitch,  hedge,  hang,  hinge,  hayrick,  Harvey,  hurrahing, 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


heavily,  hugely,  hubbub,  horrid,  harrowed,  honeydew,  head/ong, 
Hungary. 

Hay,  haw,  hah,  hoe,  hew,  high,  ahead,  ahoy,  aha,  oho,  Ohio, 
aheap,  Ahab. 

Par.  58  a.—  Bohemia,  Mohawk,  Jehovah,  hedgehog,  uphill,  mohair, 
outhouse,  woodhouse,  ice-house,  watch-house,  whitehead,  widowhood, 
mahogany,  a/cohol,  Rehoboam,  hardihood. 

Par.  58  /$.— Wheat,  whit,  white,  whitlow,  Whitely,  buckwheat, 
half,  halve,  hath,  half-pay,  halfpenny. 

Par.  59. — Unhook,  inhale,  cohere,  bunghole,  rehear,  unhealthy, 
inhumanity,  unhealthily,  inhere,  inhume. 

Elihu,  unhitch,  Ivanhoe,  haha,  thickhead,  unhinge,  unhanged, 
bulkhead. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Ham,  haul,  hale,  Hal,  hawk,  hack,  hag, 
Hague,  haggi^,  Hallam,  harem,  harm,  hark,  harpy,  harr/;,  hawkeyed, 
hail-fellow,  harmony,  harming,  harelip,  hallowed,  Halliday,  hell, 
hear,  her,  hemming,  Hecuba,  health,  healthy,  Herrick,  hereby, 
hemp,  hemorrhage,  healthily,  heeltap,  heraldic,  healer,  hearsay, 
heresy,  Helena,  hill,  hiccup,  hilly,  hillock,  Himalaya,  hickory,  Hil- 
lery,  Hilda,  home,  holly,  hollow,  hole,  howl,  hook,  hog,  homage, 
hoggis/i,  Hoyle,  homily,  homeopathy,  Holyrood,  horror,  homing, 
horny,  holiday,  hum,  huzzy,  huzzah,  hull,  hulk,  hump,  humbug, 
humility,  Hulda,  Hume,  hymning,  hymenial,  whanged,  whanging, 
whack,  whet,  whey,  whig,  whip,  whipsaw,  whole,  why. 

Hap,  hautboy,  Haiti,  hairy,  harrow,  Harry,  Hannah,  hatch,  has/i, 
haying,  haunch,  hank,  hanging,  harrowing,  harangue,  haply,  happily, 
Hadley,  haycock,  Havana,  Harriet,  hardy,  harried,  handy,  hanged, 
harangued,  haranguing,  handily,  heap,  Hebe,  heavy,  head,  heady, 
heath,  hero,  hewing,  heroic,  Hervey,  herring,  Headley,  heavier, 
hejira,  hedgerow,  hearty,  head-gear,  heartily,  heritage,  heretic,  hid, 
hide,  highly,  Hiero,  Hindu,  hope,  hoop,  hobby,  hod,  hood,  hoary, 
houri,  Hodge,  hoeing,  horrify,  Howard,  honeyed,  hoe,  hobnob, 
horrific,  hodgepodge,  hoity-toity,  horridly,  huffy,  hurrah,  hutch, 
hung,  hunch,  hunk,  hurrying,  hurried,  huge,  hurriedly,  hunchback. 

Abhor,  abhorring,  babyhood,  behead,  Bohea,  boyhood,  kneehigh, 
unhappy,  unhoop,  unhung,  unhappily,  unhardy,  unhandy. . 

EXERCISE  XIV. 

Upward  and  Downward  L. — See  paragraphs  61  to  63. 

Par.  6 1  a.  —  Use  lay:  Limb;  loam,  leak,  lock,  luck,  lackey,  Lena, 
looming,  lunch,  lounge,  lookout,  lineage,  lenity,  Laocoon,  legate, 
luggage,  locket,  lacked,  leagued,  lugged,  logbook,  locate. 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAl'HY. 


Par.  61  b. — Use  el:  Alum,  alack,  Illinois,  alumni,  Allegheny, 
eliminate,  alcoholic  (second  /up),  alkali  (second /up). 

Par.  62  a. — Buell,  fill,  phial,  fuel,  vial,  vowel,  ideal,  Joel,  befell, 
unveil,  barrel,  royal,  burial,  Israel,  ethereal,  defile. 

Par.  62  b. — Filly,  Philo,  fellow,  volley,  uvula,  namely,  handily, 
merrily,  Riley,-  merely,  rarely,  charily. 

Par.  62  c. — Nile,  knoll,  annual,  biennially,  vanilla,  kingly,  Nelly, 
manual,  longingly,  Manila. 

Par.  63  a. — Along,  appalling,  pulling,  bawling,  oblong,  feeling, 
filing,  fowling,  availing,  dialing,  headlong,  link,  length,  longing, 
annealing,  chilling,  keeling,  culling,  galling,  befalling,  unfeeling, 
cajoling, 

Par.  63  b. — Use  lay:  Leap,  elope,  Lybia,  lobe,  elf,  alpha,  levee, 
Livy,  olive,  love,  alva,  Lethe,  lath,  leech,  ledge,  elegy,  Elias,  lassie, 
Louisa,  lousy,  laity,  Alida,  allopathy,  Levite,  limbo,  Paul,  pell,  pull, 
bile,  bowl,  Moll,  mule,  tool,  easel,  agile,  chyle,  ghoul,  billowy,  Beu- 
lah,  Milo,  wittily,  Delia,  oddly,  dahlia,  Athalia,  easily,  July,  gully, 
effectual,  camomile. 

Write  both  1's  up:  Labial,  lamely,  leal,  loll,  Lisle,  loyal,  Lowell, 
lull,  lily,  loyally,  lowly. 

Par.  63  c. — Use  lay:  Bulge,  bullock,  filthy,  foliage,  dilemma, 
caliph,  pillage,  apologue,  Bellevue,  Volga,  mulatto,  mileage,  Molucca, 
unallied,  gullied,  Islam,  epilepsy,  palladium,  belladonna,  balcony, 
phillipic,  milldam,  deathlike,  antelope,  bullfinch. 

Use  el:  Film,  filmy,  vellum,  Philomel,  Philomela,  Philomena, 
avalanche,  monologue. 

Write  both  1's  up ;    Belial,  lullaby,  Carlisle,  coolly. 

Write  both  1's  down:  Filial,  unfilial. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Lame,  lamb,  lake,  lack,  laming,  launch, 
lackaday,  lackey,  lagged,  leaky,  league,  leg,  Icon,  leakage,  legatee, 
leaked,  legged,  Lima,  lime,  lick,  like,  lion,  Limburg,  licked,  liked, 
llama,  loamy,  loom,  look,  log,  looked,  locked,  logwood,  logged,  logom- 
achy, lucky,  Luke,  Luny,  lunge,  Lynch. 

Alamo,  alma,  alike,  alchemy,  alackaday,  elm,  elk,  Electa,  Ilion, 
illuminate,  illuminati,  Olney,  Olinda,  ulna,  alimony. 

Afoul,  avail,  avowal,  Baal,  befall,  befool,  beryl,  bowel,  dial,  duel, 
dual,  espial,  fall,  fail,  feel,  fell,  file,  foil,  foal,  fool,  fowl,  jewel, 
Merrill,  parole,  peril,  towel,  vail,  veal,  vile,  viol. 

Cheerily,    duello,    ethereally,   fallow,    felly,   folly,  follow,   heavily, 


THE    MANUAL   OK    PHONOGRAPHY.  123 


ideally,  narrowly,  Ophelia,  Raleigh,  rally,  relay,  royally,  Rolla,  tho- 
roughly, valley,  villa,  wifely. 

Anneal,  annul,  annually,  biennial,  Emanuel,  gushingly,  knell, 
magnolia,  manilla,  Manuel,  nail,  Neal,  newly,  nighly,  null,  unkingly, 
youngly. 

Appealing,  bailing,  befooling,  billing,  boiling,  bowling,  coiling, 
cooling,  dealing,  defiling,  doling,  dulling,  falling,  failing,  felling, 
filling,  foiling,  foaling,  fooling,  fopling,  fueling,  gulling,  jeweling, 
killing,  kneeling,  knelling,  lank,  lengthy,  lingo,  long,  lung,  nailing, 
Oolong,  paling,  pealing,  piling,  polling,  tilling,  toiling,  tolling,  un- 
coiling, unfailing,  veiling,  youngling. 

Alabama,  alarm,  album,  Albany,  albino,  Aleppo,  alibi,  alive, 
alluvia,  allege,  allied,  alloyed,  allopathic,  Alp,  aloof,  also,  Elba, 
elegaic,  Elijah,  Eliza,  eulogium,  elbow,  eulogy,  Iliad,  lap,  laugh, 
lave,  lava,  lathy,  lathe,  latch,  lady,  Lacy,  lasso,  lazy,  laid,  laughing, 
laving,  lathing,  leaf,  leafy,  leave,  Levi,  levy,  lessee,  levity,  leaving, 
levying,  lip,  Liffy,  life,  live,  Livia,  Lieth,  lithe,  liege,  lied,  Livonia, 
living,  lifetime,  lop,  loop,  lobby,  loaf,  love,  loath,  loathe,  lodge, 
Louis,  lofty,  loving,  loathing,  logic,  luff,  Lucy,  Lydia,  Olivia. 

Adelia,  Amelia,  appeal,  appall,  appellee,  Angelo,  Apollo,  ball, 
bail,  Bailey,  ballet,  balmily,  Beal,  bell,  belie,  belay,  belly,  bellow, 
below,  beguile,  Bengal,  bill,  billow,  binomial,  boil,  Boyle,  bull,  bully, 
bylaw,  callow,  cabal,  Camilla,  calmly,  chill,  chyle,  chilly,  coil,  coal, 
cool,  cowl,  comely,  cupola,  dale,  daily,  dally,  deal,  dell,  delay,  dill, 
dimly,  Doyle,  dole,  doll,  dolly,  dull,  duly,  edile,  effectually,  Emilia, 
Emily,  foggily,  gall,  gale,  gaudily,  gaily,  galley,  Gallia,  gill,  giddily, 
goal,  Goliah,  guile,  gull,  haply,  happily,  haughtily,  Hadly,  horridly, 
hurriedly,  hugely,  Isabella,  jail,  jalap,  jelly,  jole,  jolly,  jollity,  Julia, 
jubilee,  Juliana,  keel,  Kelly,  kill,  mall,  mail,  Malay,  maypole,  mam- 
malia, mantilla,  meal,  mealy,  mellow,  mill,  mile,  mole,  Molly,  Mobile, 
moodily,  monthly,  Mongolia,  mull,  nebula,  nebulae,  needily,  oatmeal, 
opal,  Osceola,  outlie,  outlaw,  outlay,  pail,  pale,  pal,  Paley,  peal,  pec- 
cadillo, pill,  pile,  pillow,  pillowy,  pigtail,  Piccadilly,  Poll,  pole,  pool, 
Polly,  pulley,  tall,  tale,  tallow,  tally,  tallowy,  tamely,  Thule,  tile, 
timely,  toil,  toll,  uncomely,  uncouthly,  uncoil,  unduly,  untimely,  up- 
lay,  weightily,  widely. 

Ability,  Abimelich,  agility,  Amalek,  anthology,  apologue,  apology, 
asleep,  asylum,  athletic,  bailiff,  Baalam,  belch,  belove,  Bellamy,  be- 
lied, beldame,  Belknap,  Belinda,  Belgium,  bilge,  bilk,  Bilboa,  bow- 
leg,  Bolivia,  bowlegged,  bulk,  bulky,  bullied,  bulldog,  bucolic,  Caleb, 
calico,  colic,  colleague,  dallied,  delta,  deluge,  Delphic,  delve,  delv- 
ing, dialogue,  eclogue,  entomology,  epilogue,  etymology,  evolve, 
evolving,  failure,  fealty,  felony,  filth,  filch,  foolery,  Galway,  Gallo- 
way, gallop,  Galena,  Gallic,  Gaelic,  galaxy,  Goliath,  Golgotha,  gulf, 
gulp,  italic,  Kilkenny,  Malachi,  Malaga,  Malta,  malady,  mameluke, 
Malvina,  Malcolm,  mail-coach,  matchlock,  melody,  milch,  milk, 


124  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

milky,  Milwaukee,  mildew,  mollify,  moldy,  Moloch,  Molucca,  Mol- 
davia, nymphlike,  oblique,  obligate,  ophthalmia,  outleap,  outlive, 
palmetto,  pelf,  pelvic,  Philip,  pillory,  pillowed,  polity,  Pollock,  pop- 
lar, pomology,  polemic,  Polynesia,  polygamy,  Ptolemy,  pulp,  pulpy, 
public,  rallied,  theologic,  tillage,  tulip,  unallayed,  unalloyed,  valve, 
villainy,  village,  vilify,  vilifying. 

Baliol,  Delilah,  filially,  Galilee,  lilac,  lolled,  loyalty,  lulled,  owl- 
like,  unfilially. 

EXERCISE  XV. 

Upward  and  Downward  R. — See  paragraphs  64  to  66. 

Par.  64  a. — Rock,  rogue,  ruby,  wreathe,  roach,  reissue,  rag,  rang, 
Raleigh,  racy,  renew,  ready  rebuke,  royalty,  rank,  ravage,  Roanoke, 
wryneck,  rickety,  wronged,  rivet,  retouch,  radiate,  reanimate. 

Par.  64  b, — Ream,  aroma,  arm,  ram,  roomy,  remove,  roaming,  rim, 
romp,  ramifying,  ruminate. 

Par.  64  c, — Era,  ire,  awry,  array,  arrow,  Eric,  ergo,  earl,  our,  orally, 
arrear,  Aurora,  irony,  erelong,  arrogate,  arctic. 

Par.  64  d. — Europe,  orb,  aerify,  arch,  aorta,  arrayed,  Arabic, 
archly,  urbanity. 

Par.  65  a. — Peer,  pour,  power,  fire,  affair,  fewer,  attire,  widower, 
newer,  char,  corps,  cower,  lawyer,  allayer,  allure,  headgear,  Navarre, 
esquire,  polar,  boiler,  miller,  dealer,  wrongdoer,  reviewer. 

Par.  65  b.— Mere,  myrrh,  amour,  abhor,  uproar,  barrier,  terror, 
narrower,  higher,  career,  courier,  empire,  empower,  interior. 

Par.  65  c. — Opera,  apiary,  borrow,  bureau,  fairy,  ivory,  merry, 
Torrey,  deary,  dairy,  theory,  narrow,  hedgerow,  curry,  cherry,  Laura, 
foolery,  mummery,  imagery,  notary,  Victoria,  capillary,  Murray. 

Par.  66. — Use  ray:  Heroic,  horrid,  purify,  puerile,  periwig, 
barony,  forge,  verify,  mirth,  merino,  mirage,  tardy,  theorem,  rarify, 
carriage,  peril,  parade,  furrowed,  deride,  perfidy,  Barnaby,  veranda, 
temerity,  debarring,  unborrowed. 

Use  ar :  Farm,  forego,  lyric,  Newark,  Jerome,  Parma,  formula,  fire- 
lock, decorum,  alarm,  aeriform,  uniform,  caloric,  Carlisle. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Raw,  ray,  rake,  rap,  rajah,  Ravenna,  rabbi, 
wrath,,  wrathy,  rage,  rash,  rally,  rainy,  Raphael,  rayed,  raid,  range, 
rabbit,  rack,  reap,  repay,  review,  reavow,  reach,  retchy,  revealing, 
reengage,  rejudged,  recoiling,  regaling,  relay,  reed,  red,  reedy,  re- 
peal, repel,  rebel  (f),  Rebecca,  refuge,  refugee,  revive,  reveal, 


THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  125 


revenue,  revoke,  reviewing,  reassume,  renewal,  renewing,  rejudge, 
reechoed,  recoil,  regalia,  regale,  repaid,  rebate,  rebut,  retail,  retire, 
reattach,  retake,  readily,  repealing,  repelling,  rebelling,  revivify,  re- 
viving, Rhoda,  rick,  rig,  rip,  ripe,  rib,  rich,  ridge,  ridgy,  ring,  Riley, 
Riga,  rid,  ride,  riot,  richly,  ringing,  rightly,  rocky,  rook,  rope,  ropy, 
rob,  robe,  rouge,  rowing,  royal,  rowell,  Rolla,  royally,  Rousseau, 
rosy,  Rosa,  Rooney,  rod,  road,  rood,  rondeau,  rue,  rug,  rupee,  rub, 
Ruth,  rush,  Russia,  rude,  ruddy,  ruining,  rudely,  ruing,  rye,  wreak, 
wreck,  wreathe,  wretch,  wreathing,  wrench,  writhe,  writhing,  wringer, 
wroth,  wrothy,  wrong,  wronging,  wrung. 

Ramify,  ramming,  ramp,  remedy,  reembody,  removing,  reemerge, 
remarrying,  rheum,  rime,  riming,  Rome,  roam,  room,  rum,  rumage, 
rump. 

Air,  airy,  airily,  area,  ark,  arena,  army,  Arno,  armada,  arming, 
arcade,  Arcadia,  Argyle,  armadillo,  archaeology,  argue,  Aurelia,  ear, 
early,  earldom,  error,  Erie,  Ira,  Irish,  oral,  Orrery,  Uriah,  Yarrow, 
year,  yearly,  York,  Yorick. 

Arabia,  Arab,  Araby,  Arabella,  archy,  archduke,  archduchy, 
aright,  earth,  earthy,  earthly,  erratic,  erudite,  European,  orthoepy, 
urge. 

Adair,  adore,  afire,  afore,  afar,  ajar,  arrear,  assayer,  avower,  bar, 
beer,  bear,  bier,  bore,  boor,  bower,  bowler,  buyer,  Burr,  car,  catarrh, 
chair,  chore,  core,  cur,  cure,  dare,  door,  dower,  dyer,  easier,  essayer, 
fare,  far,  failure,  fear,  feeler,  fir,  filler,  fowler,  four,  gear,  gore,  guitar, 
gyre,  heavier,  inure,  jar,  jeer,  layer,  lear,  liar,  lore,  lower,  lure,  lyre, 
Malabar,  molar,  ne'er,  nigher,  pallor,  paler,  pear,  peeler,  pillar,  pore, 
poor,  purr,  pyre,  rapier,  repair,  repealer,  tare,  tar,  taller,  tailor,  tear, 
tire,  tiller,  tiler,  tore,  tour,  tower,  toiler,  unbar,  unfair,  valor,  vilifier, 
'waylayer. 

Admirer,  anterior,  aspire,  bearer,  borrower,  carrier,  currier,  em- 
pire, Farrier,  furor,  hewer,  inferior,  immure,  impair,  impure,  juror, 
mare,  mayor,  mar,  mirror,  Moor,  mure,  Myer,  rare,  rear,  repairer, 
roar,  terrier,  unmoor,  weightier. 

Assyria,  Aurora,  aviary,  barrow,  Barry,  bewray,  Bowery,  bury, 
burrough,  Gary,  cheery,  chary,  Cora,  Darrow,  Derry,  diary,  diarrhea, 
dowry,  Ellery,  Elmira,  emery,  Ezra,  farrow,  ferry,  fiery,  forray, 
furry,  furrow,  fury,  gory,  Harry,  hegira,  Iberia,  Jerry,  jury,  Kerry, 
Leary,  Lyra,  Mary,  marrow,  marry,  malaria,  memory,  miry,  morrow, 
Moray,  mulberry,  Norah,  Orrery,  parry,  Palmyra,  Perry,  Peoria, 
Peru,  peri,  Pharaoh,  raree,  rotary,  tarry,  Tara,  thorough,  tiara,  tory, 
tyro,  vary,  victory. 

Abhorring,  acerb,  acerbity,  admiring,  aforetime,  aspiring,  barb, 
barge,  barrack,  barrel,  Barbery,  beryl,  birth,  birch,  Borneo,  borrow- 
ing, borrowed,  Borodino,  Bordeaux,  burial,  Burke,  burgh,  burying, 
burrowing,  buried,  burrowed,  carp,  Caribee,  carrying,  carried,  career- 
ing, cherub,  cheerily,  charily,  Cherokee,  cherubim,  cherubic,  char- 


126  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


ioteer,  Corfu,  Corunna,  corrode,  curb,  currying,  curried,  dearth, 
debark,  demurring,  dirty,  dirge,  Doric,  emerge,  embark,  embargo, 
embowering,  emburied,  Escurial,  ethereal,  Faraday,  faradic,  farthing, 
ferriage,  ferrying,  ferried,  forage,  foredoom,  foreknowing,  furrowing, 
garb,  gorge,  gyratory,  Harvey,  harangue,  Harriet,  hardy,  harried, 
harrowed,  harangued,  haranguing,  Herrick,  Hervey,  hearth,  hearty, 
heartily,  heritage,  horrify,  Howard,  horrific,  horridly,  hurrying, 
hurried,  hurriedly,  immuring,  inamorata,  inherit,  Israel,  Jared,  Lo- 
retto,  March,  marriage,  mark,  marrying,  marring,  married,  merely, 
merrily,  merge,  Meredith,  mooring,  Mordecai,  Morocco,  Murdock, 
murky,  notoriety,  outmarch,  outpouring,  outreach,  outrage,  outride, 
outroot,  parity,  parody,  parole,  parch,  park,  parrying,  parried,  para- 
bole,  parabola,  parvenu,  parterre,  paradigm,  period,  Perth,  perch, 
peerage,  peruke,  perfume,  periodic,  pirouette,  pirogue,  porch,  por- 
ridge, pork,  Pomerania,  purvey,  purity,  purge,  purifying,  purveying, 
Pyrrhic,  rarity,  rarely,  rarifying,  reared,  roaring,  roared,  targe,  tarry- 
ing, tarried,  Tartary,  tardily,  terrify,  terrific,  terrifying,  thoroughly, 
thorny,  thyroid,  thoroughfare,  tirade,  torch,  torrid,  tyranny,  unmar- 
ried, unvaried,  unvarying,  unmarrying,  unmooring,  unearthly,  up- 
right, uproot,  usurp,  varied,  verifier,  verifying. 

Alarming,  cargo,  carl,  choleric,  cork,  delirium,  fairly,  farewell,  farm- 
ing, form,  fork,  forky,  formulae,  forming,  forelock,  forereach,  inform, 
Jeremy,  Jeremiah,  joram,  Kirk,  lark,  lurk,  Palermo,  poorly,  power-loom, 
uncork,  unfairly,  virago. 

EXERCISE  XVI. 

Upward  and  Downward  Sh. 

Par.  67.  —  Use  ish:  Abash,  ambush,  marshy,  Ishmael,  coyish> 
unshod,  charade,  famish,  Russia,  push,  shy,  hush,  oceanic,  barouche, 
shank,  perish,  shadowy,  gnash,  cashier,  wash,  shearer,  bushy,  rush, 
gush,  mash. 

Use  shay:  Dash,  sheave,  fish,  abolished,  whitish,  shelve,  lavish, 
shyly,  foo/ish,  cheviot,  polishing,  Shiloh,  toyshop,  elfish,  shell,  fore- 
shadow. 

Dictation  Exercise.  —  Acacia,  apish,  ash,  ashy,  Asia,  Ashby, 
ashore,  Ashantee,  babyish,  bearish,  bishop,  boyish,  bush,  bullrush, 
cassia,  cash,  calabash,  chamois,  cherish,  Chicago,  doggish,  foppish, 
gash,  gush,  gushingly,  hash,  Irish,  issue,  issued,  Jewish,  Joshua, 
mash,  marsh,  mashed,  mawkish,  mesh,  mush,  Nashua,  Nashville, 
newish,  Oceanica,  pasha,  parish,  Persia,  pish,  popish,  rash,  rakish, 
reissue,  Romish,  roguish,  rush,  rubbish,  Shaw,  shah,  shape,  shabby, 
shame,  sham,  Shawnee,  shake,  shag,  shaggy,  share,  shade,  shad, 
shampoo,  shamrock,  shady,  shadow,  shabbily,  shaming,  shamming, 
shanty,  she,  sheep,  Sheba,  Shem,  sheath,  sheathe,  sheer,  sherry, 


THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  127 

shed,  Shenandoah,  sheepish,  sheathing,  ship,  shiny,  shied,  shipwreck, 
shipshape,  shiboleth,  shod,  show,  showy,  shoe,  shop,  showish,  shock, 
shook,  shore,  shower,  showery,  showed,  shoed,  shoetie,  unshady, 
unsheathe,  unsheathing,  washy,  Wabash,  waggish,  wish. 

Ashley,  chevalier,  dashing,  dish,  dishing,  efficiency,  fishy,  fireship, 
knavish,  lashed,  lavishing,  polished,  ravish,  ravishing,  shave,  shav- 
ing, shawl,  shale,  shallow,  shallop,  shallowly,  sheaf,  Shelby,  shelf, 
shilling,  shoal,  shoaly,  shove,  shoving,  Theodosia,  tissue,  toyish, 
tush,  wettish. 

EXERCISE  XVII. 

Mp  and  Mb. 

When  a  vowel  comes  between  the  two  consonants  use  the  two 
strokes : 

Mope,  moped,  map,  mapped,  mop,  mopped,  Mab,  mob,  mobbed. 

When  no  vowel  intervenes,  use  the  stroke  s~^\ 

Imp,  dump,  limp,  bumping,  temple,  Pompeii,  amply,  impel,  rumple, 
lamp,  dimple,  jump,  camp,  shampoo,  umpire. 

Limbo,  timbal,  embargo,  ambiguity,  rumble,  embalm,  nimbly, 
bamboo,  fumble. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Ample,  bump,  camping,  champ,  chump, 
damp,  damping,  dumpy,  dumping,  empire,  empower,  impale,  impair, 
impede,  impeach,  impiety,  impute,  impure,  jumping,  limply,  lump, 
pimple,  pomp,  Pompey,  pump,  ramp,  romp,  rump,  tamping,  thump, 
thumping,  wampum. 

Ambush,  Bombay,  embark,  embalming,  embower,  embowering, 
embody,  imbuing,  jumble,  mumble,  nimble,  ramble,  reembody, 
shamble,  thimble,  tumble,  unimbued. 

EXERCISE  XVIII. 

Vowel  Grammalogues. 

Par.  70. — Write  the  signs  for  the  grammalogues,  filling  a  line  with 
each  sign :  The,  a,  an,  and,  all,  too,  two,  already,  before,  ought,  aught, 
who,  of,  to,  or,  but,  on,  should. 

I.  Take  no  oath;  make  no  vow;  but  if  thou  make  it  keep  it.  2. 
They  who  do  ill  to-day  may  feel  ill  to-morrow.  3.  Day  by  day,  do 
each  daily  duty  and  be  happy.  4.  Fear  to  do  wrong  to  anybody,  but 
be  ready  to  do  right  to  all.  5-  To°  much  love  of  money  may  make 
a  thief  of  anybody.  6.  Love  should  teach  us  to  pity  and  help  the 
poor  and  weak.  7-  A  knave  or  a  fool  may  lure  the  weak  to  folly. 
8.  They  who  make  the  debt  may  fail  to  pay  aught  of  it.  9.  All  of  us 


I 


128 


THE   MANUAL   OK    PHONOGRAPHY. 


ought  to  be  loving,  each  to  each.  10.  Enjoy  thy  youth  and  thy  hope 
before  they  fade  away.  II.  They  do  ill  who  add  length  to  a  tale 
already  too  long.  12.  The  foolish  heed  nothing  but  to  eat  and  be 
merry.  13.  The  ill  hap  of  an  hour  may  take  away  the  joy  of  a  life- 
time. 14.  If  two  share  a  joy  they  add  joy  to  joy.  15.  Take  time  to 
toil  and  time  to  enjoy  the  effect  of  toil. 

I  EXERCISE  XIX.\ 

Simple  Consonant  Grammalogues. 

Page  38. — Write  the  signs  for  the  grammalogues,  filling  a  line  with 
each  sign:  Up,  be,  it,  do,  which,  advantage,  common,  come,  give,  to- 
gether, for,  have,  think,  them,  so,  was,  shall,  shall,  usual,  usually. 

I.  The  falling  out  of  them  who  love  doth  renew  love.  2.  They 
who  do  ill  shall  come  to  feel  ill.  3.  They  usually  fail  who  fear  to 
make  the  essay.  4.  They  who  think  life  was  given  us  merely  to  enjoy 
it  know  nothing  of  life.  5.  The  right  way  of  living  ought  also  to  be 
the  usual  way.  6.  Do  wrong  and  thou  shall  pay  for  it.  7-  They  who 
think  of  nothing  but  to  enjoy  life  live  bul  poorly.  8.  Many  ask  for 
money  bul  few  are  ready  lo  give  it.  9.  They  who  toil  for  a.  living 
usually  have  no  lime  to  enjoy  it.  10.  They  who  aim  to  make  a  show 
of  having  much  money  usually  have  much  ado  to  keep  it  up.  II.  The 
rich  and  the  mighty  usually  aim  at  power  to  which  they  have  no 
righl.  12.  If  the  mighty  take  advantage  of  the  weak,the  weak  usually 
aim  al  revenge  on  the  mighty.  13.  No  remedy  of  the  law  should  be 
out  of  reach  of  the  common  folk.  14.  The  love  of  money  and  the 
love  of  humanity  rarely  go  together.  15.  Many  have  so  much  to  do 
they  do  it  but  poorly. 

EXERCISE  XX. 

Simple  Consonant  Grammalogues. — Concluded. 

Page  40. — For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corre- 
sponding logogram,  filling  a  line  wilh  each :  Will,  are,  me,  my,  him, 
may,  imporlanl,  imporlance,  improve,  improved,  improvemenl,  in, 
any,  no,  know,  thing,  young,  way,  your. 

I.  They  are  but  poor  who  have  too  much.  2.  Know  the  way 
to  make  your  life  a  happy  life — make  it  a  busy  life.  3.  They  are 
happy  who  toil  day  by  day  for  both  bodily  and  mental  improve- 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  129 

ment.  4.  Each  day  and  each  hour  should  be  improved  by  the  young. 
5.  The  fool  will  feel  no  love  for  them  who  wish  to  teach  him  to  im- 
prove. 6.  They  who  know  anything  which  may  be  important  for  all 
to  know  ought  to  say  so  right  away.  7.  Aim  to  know  each  thing 
which  may  be  of  much  importance  in  your  life.  8.  Love  me,  love 
my  dog.  9.  They  who  go  into  debt  may  wait  long  before  they  come 
out.  10.  Death  will  come  alike  to  youth  and  age,  to  rich  and  poor, 
to  mighty  and  lowly.  II.  The  fool  will  beat  the  bush  and  the  knave 
will  catch  the  game.  12.  Give  an  inch  to  many  and  they  will  take 
an  ell.  13.  The  fool  will  eat  the  cake  and  think  to  have  it  too.  14. 
They  who  are  far  ahead  to-day  may  be  far  to  the  rear  to-morrow. 
15.  Keep  thy  shop  and  thy  shop  will  keep  thee. 

EXERCISE  XXI. 

Diphthong,  Coalescent,  and  Aspirate  Grammalogues. 

Page  42. — For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corre- 
sponding logogram,  filling  a  line  with  each :  I,  how,  we,  with,  were, 
what,  would,  ye,  yet,  beyond,  you,  he. 

I.  Show  me  a  liar  and  I  will  show  you  a  thief.  2.  Do  what  you 
ought  to  do  and  you  will  be  happy.  3.  Aim  to  be  in  fact  what  you 
would  appear  to  be.  4.  The  poor  at  all  time  ye  have  with  you.  5. 
He  .who  would  be  happy  should  also  be  busy.  6.  They  are  happy 
who  know  how  to  improve  each  day  and  hour.  7.  We  all  carry  with 
us  a  weight  of  debt  which  we  should  have  paid  long  ago.  8.  We 
ought  to  look  beyond  the  fear  of  to-day  and  reach  out  to  the  hope 
of  to-morrow.  9.  We  have  to  thank  our  own  folly  for  much  of  the 
ill  we  bear.  10.  You  may  hear  fair  talk  come  out  of  the  mouth  of  any 
knave.  II.  Many  know  why  they  ought  to  do  right,  and  yet  dare  to 
do  wrong.  12.  If  no  money  were  to  be  had  we  should  all  be  rich 
and  poor  alike.  13.  They  who  keep  at  home  all  the  time  know  noth- 
ing beyond  home.  14.  I  am  rich  enough  if  I  am  happy  with  what  I 
have.  15.  They  are  lucky  who  love  to  do  what  they  are  paid  to  do. 

EXERCISE  XXII. 

Joining  of  Circles  S  and  Z. — See  paragraph  79. 

Par.  79  a. — P-s,  t-s,  ray-s,  s-p,  s-g,  n-t-s,  k-ch-s,  t-ray-s,  n-h-s, 
s-p-t,  s-p-ray-b,  s-t-k,  s-g-n-f,  s-ray-v,  s-t-s,  s-ray-s,  s-t-k-s,  s-j-k-s, 
s-ray-p-s. 


THE    MANUAL   OK    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Par.  79  &• — F-s,  dh-s,  ar-s,  w-s,  s-th,  s-ng,  ray-th-s,  p-z-s,  k-lay-s, 
m-n-s,  s-f-t,  s-th-k,  s-s-t,  s-z-ar,  s-n-ch,  s-ar-s,  s-lay-s,  s-m-s,  s-w-s, 
s-v-ng-s,  s-dh-ng-s,  s-z-ar-s,  s-ar-k-s,  s-n-f-s. 

Par.  79  c.— P-s-t,  p-s-k,  p-s-j,  t-s-t,  t-s-k,  d-s-k,  d-s-ray-el,  k-s-d, 
g-s-p,  ray-s-p,  ray-s-ray. 

Par.  79  d, — F-s-el,  f-s-n,  v-s-el,  v-s-n,  th-s-el,  s-s-ar,  lay-s-lay, 
el-s-ng,  ar-s-n,  m-s-ish,  m-s-m,  mp-s-m,  n-s-m ;  f-s-m,  v-s-m,  th-s-m, 
n-s-lay-ray,  v-s-lay-j,  th-s-lay. 

Par.  79  e. — D-s-ar,  ch-s-el,  ch-s-n,  j-s-n,  k-s-m,  ray-s-v,  ray-s-ng, 
h-s-ng,  f-s-k,  lay-s-p,  m-s-t,  m-s-ray,  n-s-ray. 

Dictation  Exercise. — B-s,  d-s,  ch-s,  j-s,  k-s,  g-s,  h-s,  s-p,  s-t,  s-d, 
s-ch,  s-j,  s-k,  s-ray,  ray-p-s,  ray-b-s,  b-d-s,  j-j-s,  p-k-s,  b-g-s,  s-t-k, 
s-ch-k,  s-j-k,  s-k-p,  s-p-s,  s-b-s,  s-t-s,  s-ch-s,  s-j-s,  s-k-s,  s-g-s,  s-p-k-s, 
s-b-ray-b-s,  s-d-ray-s,  s-ch-k-s,  s-k-b-s,  s-g-t-s. 

V-s,  th-s,  s-s,  z-s,  ish-s,  zh-s,  lay-s,  m-s,  mp-s,  n-s,  ng-s,  y-s,  s-f, 
s-v,  s-dh,  s-z,  s-ish,  s-zh,  s-lay,  s-ar,  s-m,  s-mp,  s-n,  s-w,  s-y,  ray-f-s, 
n-v-s,  ray-dh-s,  ray-ish-s,  ray-zh-s,  t-ar-s,  n-m-s,  f-ng-s,  t-w-s,  f-el-s, 
s-v-n,  s-dh-ng,  s-z-ar,  s-ish-b,  s-lay-p,  s-ar-lay,  s-m-lay,  s-mp-lay, 
s-n-p,  s-ng-ar,  s-w-mp,  s-f-s,  s-v-s,  s-th-s,  s-dh-s,  s-z-s,  s-ish-s,  s-zh-s, 
s-ar-s,  s-m-s,  s-n-s,  s-ng-s,  s-y-s,  s-f-el-s,  s-th-k-s,  s-s-t-s,  s-ish-p-s, 
s-el-ng-s,  s-m-k,  s-mp-lay-s,  s-ng-k-s,  s-w-mp-s. 

P-s-d,  p-s-j,  b-s-ray,  b-s-t,  p-s-ch,  p-s-k,  t-s-d,  d-s-t,  d-s-d,  d-s-g-s, 
ch-s-t-s,  j-s-t-s,  k-s-p-s,  k-s-t,  k-s-k,  k-s-ray,  g-s-t-lay,  g-s-ray,  ray-s-t, 
ray-s-d,  ray-s-k. 

F-s-f,  f-s-shay-s,  f-s-ar,  f-s-ng,  v-s-f-s,  v-s-ar,  v-s-ng,  n-th-s-ng,  s-s-n, 
el-s-v,  lay-s-ar,  lay-s-m,  el-s-n,  ar-s-ar,  ar-s-m,  m-s-v,  m-s-s,  m-s-lay, 
m-s-ar,  m-s-n,  m-s-ng,  mp-s-v,  mp-s-lay,  n-s-f,  n-s-v-ray,  n-s-el,  n-s-n, 
n-s-ng. ' 

P-s-f-el,  p-s-el,  p-s-ar,  p-s-m,  p-s-n,  p-s-ng,  b-s-v,  p-s-lay,  b-s-ar, 
b-s-m,  b-s-n,  b-s-ng,  t-s-f,  t-s-ar,  t-s-n,  d-s-v,  d-s-el,  d-s-n,  d-s-ng, 
ch-s-ar,  ch-s-ng,  j-s-f,  ray-j-s-ng,  k-s-ng,  g-s-ng,  ray-s-lay,  ray-s-n, 
h-s-lay,  h-s-n,  f-s-t,  f-s-d,  v-s-t,  lay-s-t,  m-s-k,  mb-s-k-d,  n-s-t,  ng-s-t. 

EXERCISE  XXIII. 

Words  Containing  Circles  S  and  Z. — See  paragraph  81. 

Par.  8l  a.— Base,  decks,  keels,  hops,  palace,  rouse,  oppose,  tongs, 
collapse,  rankness,  veracious,  educe,  chops,  happiness,  genius,  lus- 
cious, Thomas,  annex,  tameness,  waves,  unwise,  peruse,  arduous. 

Par.  81  b. — Pious,  bias,  Elias,  Louis,  joyous,  ^Eneas,  Jewess,  chaos, 
Tobias,  Darius,  Boaz. 

Par.  8l  c. — Seat,  said,  snow,  snub,  spool,  scathe,  Celia,  soothing, 


THE   MANUAL  OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  13! 

sleeve,  solemn,  serious,  suffice,  selvage,  secular,  solidity,  ceremony, 
survive,  sparrow,  Swede,  silly,  Samuel,  swamp,  scourge,  savagely, 
superb. 

Par.  8l  d. — Science,  sawyer,  sewer,  suet,  sower,  scion,  Suez,  Siam, 
Sienna,  sciatic,  sciatica,  sewage,  cyanic. 

Par.  8l  e. — Sigh,  pussy,  icy,  policy,  Odessa,  Esau,  fuzzy,  spicy, 
foresee,  Chelsea,  daisy,  busy,  gassy,  mossy,  Melissa,  Lucy,  pursue, 
racy,  jealousy,  legacy,  Tallahassee,  boozy,  fussy,  buoyancy. 

Par.  8i/~. — Ace,  asp,  assail,  use,  assume,  eschew,  aside,  aspire, 
asleep,  asylum,  esquire,  acerb,  Escurial,  askew,  ask,  easily,  usage, 
Israel,  useless. 

Par.  8 1  g~. — Zeal,  zero,  Zion,  zealous,  Zodiac,  zigzag. 

Par.  81  h. — Use  the  circle:  Cask,  hasp,  husky,  hasty,  decease, 
poison,  abusive,  disposal,  terseness,  duskiness,  callousness,  expelling, 
exterior,  disuse,  desperado,  upset,  evasive,  incendiary,  disseminate, 
basin,  unmask,  ferocity,  obelisk,  pencil,  lusty. 

Use  the  stroke :  Piously,  ensued,  pursued,  reassume,  busied,  lazily, 
palsied,  mossiness,  joyousness,  ingenuously,  sauciness,  lassoes. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Abyss,  accuse,  adduce,  advise,  ages,  allows, 
amuse,  ambitious,  appease,  atlas,  borax,  bulbous,  caress,  cautious, 
canvass,  choice,  coppice,  debase,  deepness,  delicious,  diffuse,  docks, 
dubious,  edges,  efface,  effects,  embarrass,  emulous,  ethics,  famous, 
fabulous,  ferocious,  gauze,  guileless,  harass,  harness,  hence,  heedless, 
hitches,  homeless,  huskiness,  ibex,  illness,  impose,  incubus,  invoice, 
jealous,  jocose,  keys,  lapse,  lawless,  lettuce,  lifeless,  luminous,  menace, 
memorize,  minus,  monotonous,  muddiness,  nameless,  narrowness, 
notice,  obvious,  officious,  onyx,  orifice,  pathless,  pause,  pierce, 
poetess,  populous,  porpoise,  pumice,  radius,  reforms,  repose,  ready- 
ness,  rejoice,  ruthless,  shapeless,  shears,  shies,  terrace,  these,  thick- 
ness, topaz,  tortoise,  tumulus,  uncase,  unhappiness,  usurious,  various, 
victimize,  vicious,  wades,  watches,  weakness,  wishes,  witness,  yel- 
lowness. 

Cease,  city,  circus,  psalm,  safe,  same,  sauce,  sallow,  sash,  sabbath, 
savage,  salary,  sagely,  sailor,  salvage,  sanitary,  sadness,  sagacious, 
scope,  scheme,  scour,  scorch,  scarce,  seedy,  sedge,  severe,  seeming, 
serried,  search,  secure,  series,  sedately,  serenity,  sedulous,  service, 
sieve,  sinew,  sightly,  silica,  sinuate,  singer,  since,  signify,  silliness, 
sketch,  slay,  slave,  slimy,  slouch,  slushy,  slang,  sluggish,  slyness, 
smoky,  smirk,  snipe,  snuff,  snatch,  sootiness,  soulless,  soothe,  soak, 
soggy,  sorrowed,  sorely,  social,  solace,  solemnly,  solidify,  spark, 
speedy,  spoil,  spunk,  sparse,  spice,  spurious,  sphere,  spacious,  stoic, 
subdue,  summary,  superior,  survey,  succumb,  suppose,  suffuse,  suffo- 


132 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


cate,  surname,  suffix,  surpass,  surmise,  sunrise,  switch,  swampy,  sym- 
phony, syllabic,  synagogue. 

Abbacy,  also,  Asa,  assay,  Betsey,  Boadicea,  cozy,  dizzy,  dozy,  easy, 
efficacy,  embassy,  ensue,  epilepsy,  essay,  fallacy,  foci,  foxy,  fuzee, 
Genesee,  goosy,  gypsy,  hearsay,  heresy,  idiocy,  intimacy,  Jessie, 
Josiah,  josey,  juicy,  Lacy,  lasso,  lassie,  leasee,  Louisa,  Macy,  massy, 
malmsey,  Manasseh,  mazy,  Messiah,  Nassau,  Nancy,  noisy,  Odyssey, 
papacy,  panacea,  palsy,  Pharisee,  piracy,  Pisa,  piazza,  posse,  poesy, 
posy,  potassa,  Ramsey,  Rousseau,  say,  see,  so,  sow,  sue,  'i  asso,  Ten- 
nessee, Theresa,  tipsy,  uneasy,  unsay,  Vesey,  waxy. 

Acid,  acerbity,  ass,  assayer,  Asaph,  assignee,  assuage,  Assyria, 
assuming,  aspiring,  assumes,  auspice,  Azores,  easel,  ease,  easier,  easi- 
ness, essayer,  espial,  espy,  Eskimo,  espionage,  espouse,  Ezra,  ice, 
iciness,  Islam,  Isaac,  Isabella,  Osceola,  ossify,  Osage,  ossifying,  ossi- 
fies, us,  usurp. 

Tsar,  Tsarina,  Xenia,  zany,  Zachariah,  Zera,  Zebedee,  Zebediah, 
Zephaniah,  Zedekiah,  Zenobia,  zinc,  zoology. 

Abusing,  absolve,  absence,  accede,  accustom,  aimlessly,  alongside, 
ambiguously,  animosity,  answer,  apposite,  arson,  assiduously,  auda- 
city, bazaar,  baseness,  beset,  beseech,  bespeak,  bison,  buxom,  capa- 
city, cancel,  caustic,  censor,  chancel,  chasm,  chastise,  citizen,  copiously, 
codicil,  damson,  dancer,  deceive,  deceit,  desire,  design,  deficit,  de- 
risive, density,  despair,  dismay,  dismal,  dislike,  disguise,  dusky, 
ecstasy,  elicit,  embezzle,  ensign,  episode,  espousal,  evincing,  excite, 
expel,  excuse,  falsely,  fasten,  facility,  fossil,  garrison,  ghostly,  gossip, 
henceforth,  heroism,  hillside,  immensely,  imbecile,  injustice,  inspire, 
incense,  jealously,  jocoseness,  knapsack,  larceny,  license,  maxim, 
message,  medicine,  misery,  modesty,  nasal,  nuisance,  obscure,  odiously, 
pacify,  paucity,  pensive,  rancid,  raisin,  Saxon,  specify,  tersely,  tena- 
city, tocsin,  unsafe,  visage,  wholesome. 

Use  the  stroke :  Busily,  busier,  ceaseless,  dizziness,  doziness,  inaus- 
picious, insomuch,  juicyness,  lazier,  lassies,  lessees,  maziness,  noisi- 
ness, pursuer,  reassuming,  rosiness,  saucily,  soothsayer,  unassayed, 
unassuming,  unaspiring,  unessayed,  uneasily,  uneasiness,  uningen- 
uously. 

EXERCISE  XXIV. 

Circles  Ses,  Sez,  Zes,  Zez. — See  paragraphs  85  to  90. 

Par.  85. — Pieces,  offices,  tosses,  horses,  kisses,  axes,  abases,  heir- 
esses, bodices,  affixes,  embosses,  atlases,  taxes,  advices,  elapses,  alli- 
ances, orifices,  annoyances,  geniuses,  forces,  carouses,  sluices,  auspices, 
poleaxes,  sciences,  doorcases. 

Arises,  roses,  amuses,  pauses,  noises,  accuses,  adzes,  peruses,  advises, 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  133 

refuses,  agonizes,  mazes,  sneezes,  polarizes,  memorizes,  anatomizes, 
victimizes,  poises,  opposes,  indisposes,  arouses,  theorizes. 

Par.  86. — Abscess,  recess,  success,  possess,  dispossess,  repossessing, 
possessive,  necessity,  excessive,  necessitous,  successful,  inaccessible. 

Par.  87. — Abscesses,  Moses's,  recesses,  excesses,  accesses,  successes, 
possesses,  repossesses,  dispossesses. 

Par.  88. — Basis,  Jesus,  Texas,  colossus,  desist,  incisive,  exist,  ex- 
haust, coexist,  undecisive,  capsizing,  subsist,  solecism,  exorcism, 
exercising,  emphasized,  ellipsis,  amanuenses. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Abysses,  abuses  («),  allowances,  announces, 
annexes,  auspices,  bases,  boxes,  bookcases,  caresses,  chases,  chalices, 
choruses,  coppices,  coerces,  collapses,  debases,  defaces,  deduces, 
Dennis's,  doses,  duchesses,  edifices,  effaces,  effervesces,  ellipses,  em- 
barrasses, entices,  enforces,  erases,  faces,  fixes,  foxes,  fusses,  gases, 
goddesses,  harnesses,  headpieces,  Horace's,  hocuses,  hostesses,  ibexes, 
invoices,  incases,  injustices,  juices,  laces,  lapses,  lattices,  leases, 
lionesses,  likenesses,  losses,  masses,  menaces,  mixes,  minxes,  mosses, 
molasses,  Morris's,  musses,  nieces,  novices,  notices,  omnibuses, 
ounces,  paces,  parses,  packhorses,  paradoxes,  peeresses,  pierces,  pick- 
axes, poultices,  porpoises,  pulses,  purses,  races,  reduces,  reposes, 
rehearses,  repulses,  reinforces,  senses,  solaces,  sources,  spices,  sphinxes, 
suffices,  tailoresses,  terraces,  Thomas's,  topazes,  uncases,  unhorses, 
vases,  vexes,  voices,  waxes,  weaknesses,  witnesses. 

Abuses  (v),  amazes,  anathematizes,  apologizes,  botanizes,  buzzes, 
causes,  catechizes,  cheeses,  chooses,  devises,  deposes,  deputizes, 
diffuses,  dozes,  dogmatizes,  effuses,  espouses,  fuses,  gauzes,  gazes, 
guises,  harmonizes,  idealizes,  infuses,  loses,  macadamizes,  muses, 
noses,  phases,  poetizes,  popularizes,  raises,  revises,  rises,  rouses, 
ruses,  snoozes,  solemnizes,  spouses,  supposes,  suffuses,  symbolizes, 
teases. 

Access,  accessible,  accessorial,  accessory,  excess,  excessively,  in- 
accessibly, Moses,  necessary,  necessitously,  necessitousness,  possessed, 
possessing,  possessor,  repossess,  repossessed,  successfully,  successive, 
successively,  unpossessed,  unsuccessful,  unsuccessfully. 

Amanuensis,  Anchises,  apotheosis,  bases  (plural  of  basis],  capsize, 
capsized,  decisive,  decisively,  dieresis,  diagnosis,  dissuasive,  em- 
phasize, emphasizing,  Ephesus,  exacerbescence,  exercise,  exegesis, 
exercisable,  exhauster,  exorcise,  exorcised,  exorcising,  gallicism, 
Genesis,  hypothesis,  hypotheses,  indecisively,  indecisiveness,  insist, 
italicise,  Mississippi,  Nemesis,  Parnassus,  resist,  stases,  stoicism, 
synopsis,  synthesis,  thesis,  theses,  Ulysses,  unsuspicious,  unsuspi- 
ciously, witticism,  Manassas. 


134  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

EXERCISE  XXV. 

Loop-st. — See  paragraphs  91  to  95. 

Par.  91  a. — Post,  best,  faced,  moist,  attest,  educed,  assist,  wrist, 
roast,  hoaxed,  ballast,  utmost,  affixed,  mixed,  lanced,  robust,  earnest, 
inmost,  announced,  annexed,  egotist,  solaced,  bombast,  Methodist, 
repulsed. 

Par.  91  b. — Stub,  state,  stood,  style,  stool,  steer,  star,  stage,  stoke, 
stupid,  stammer,  steaming,  steadier,  stealthy,  sterile,  steerage,  staunch,' 
stump,  stopcock,  stateroom,  stiffness,  stillness,  staircase,  stumble, 
stoutest. 

Par.  91  c. — Destiny,  atheistic,  theistic,  suggestion,  mystify,  sophistic, 
sophistical,  statistic,  statistics,  statistical,  statistically. 

Par.  93  d. — Pasty,  bestow,  testy,  dusty,  gusty,  fusty,  vasty,  lusty, 
rusty,  musty,  nasty,  hasty. 

Par.  93  e. — Upset,  beset,  besought,  posset,  outset,  gusset,  faucet, 
russet,  receipt,  recite. 

Par.  94  a. — Deposed,  advised,  espoused,  refused,  revised,  deputized, 
fossilized,  despised. 

Par.  94  b. — Appeased,  opposed,  effused,  teased,  caused,  suffused, 
unopposed,  supposed. 

Par.  94  c. — Noised,  raised,  roused,  perused,  theorized,  caroused, 
agonized,  sneezed,  polarized,  tyrannized,  harmonized,  imperialized, 
monopolized,  symbolized. 

Par.  95. — Guests,  tastes,  joists,  infests,  elegists,  boasts,  vests, 
lasts,  feasts,  outcasts,  pianists,  enthusiasts,  gusts,  divests. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Abased,  accost,  adjust,  amethyst,  anatomist, 
atheist,  based,  baptist,  behest,  Belfast,  bigamist,  boxed,  botanist, 
burst,  cast,  caressed,  catechist,  chest,  chemist,  copyist,  coerced,  col- 
lapsed, defaced,  detest,  digest,  dismissed,  dishonest,  dogmatist,  duel- 
ist, effaced,  elapsed,  embossed,  enticed,  enforced,  enthusiast,  eulogist, 
evinced,  fenced,  fixed,  forest,  forecast,  fossilist,  geologist,  ghost, 
harvest,  holocaust,  homeopathist,  idealist,  immersed,  incased,  incensed, 
induced,  invest,  jest,  jurist,  kissed,  last,  lapsed,  licensed,  locust,  lyrist, 
machinist,  menaced,  mist,  minced,  modest,  molest,  monopolist,  nest, 
noticed,  orthoepist,  outpost,  papist,  physiologist,  pierced,  poulticed, 
psalmist,  rehearsed,  rejoiced,  reinvest,  richest,  royalist,  seacoast, 
shamefaced,  sliced,  sophist,  spaced,  tallest,  text,  theist,  theorist, 
tossed,  tourist,  topmast,  unchaste,  unhorsed,  unharassed,  unjust,  un- 
mixed, unvexed,  vast,  vilest,  waxed,  witnessed,  zest. 

Stack,  staff,  stag,  stairway,  stale,  stalk,  stamina,  stamp,  stammerer, 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  135 


stamping,  stammeringly,  stanza,  stare,  starch,  stark,  starling,  starry, 
statue,  stately,  statuary,  states,  stateliness,  staunchness,  stave,  staves, 
steam,  steady,  steamer,  steadily,  stealthily,  steadiness,  steadfast, 
steadiest,  stead,  steep,  steed,  steel,  steeliness,  Stella,  stem,  stemming, 
stench,  step,  sterility,  sterling,  stethoscope,  stick,  stickiness,  stigma- 
tize, still,  stiletto,  stimulus,  sting,  stingy,  stingless,  stinginess,  stir, 
stirrup,  stithy,  stitch,  stock,  stockade,  stockstill,  stole,  stolid,  stolidity, 
stomach,  stoop,  stop,  stoppage,  store,  storm,  storied,  storage,  storm- 
•ing,  stout,  stoutly,  stove,  stubby,  stuck,  stucco,  stuccoed,  studious- 
ness,  study,  studio,  studious,  stuff,  stumping,  stung,  stupefy,  stupidity, 
stupidly,  sturdy,  stylish. 

Anatomized,  apologized,  catechized,  chastised,  devised,  demised, 
diffused,  disposed,  disguised,  eulogized,  excused,  ill-disposed,  infused, 
macadamized,  magnetized,  reposed,  systematized. 

Abused,  amazed,  amiised,  aroused,  assized,  buzzed,  dozed,  fused, 
mused,  poised,  unappeased,  unopposed. 

Bastes,  beasts,  boosts,  busts,  coasts,  costs,  dusts,  fasts,  fists,  lists, 
lusts,  machinists,  masts,  pastes,  pests,  pietists,  recasts,  repasts,  rests, 
roosts,  rusts,  tests,  theists,  toasts. 

EXERCISE  XXVI. 

Loop-str. — See  paragraphs  96  and  97. 

Par.  96. — Pester,  boaster,  faster,  duster,  coaster,  castor,  bolster, 
barrister,  Munster,  lobster,  chorister,  Zoroaster,  register,  barge-master, 
songster,  teamster,  master,  dexter,  Axminster. 

Par.  97. — Fosters,  toasters,  hucksters,  festers,  youngsters,  posters, 
ulsters,  barristers,  dabsters,  jesters,  bolsters,  suggesters,  readjusters, 
canisters,  ballet-masters. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Alabaster,  ancestor,  banister,  ballet-master, 
barrack-master,  canister,  Chester,  dabster,  detester,  digester,  feaster, 
fester,  foster,  forester,  gamester,  holster,  huckster,  impostor,  jester, 
juster,  luster,  minster,  muster,  pastor,  paymaster,  pilaster,  poster, 
poetaster,  readjuster,  sinister,  singing-master,  suggester,  taster,  toaster, 
ulster,  vaster.  Webster,  youngster. 

Ancestors,  banisters,  barge-masters,  barrack-masters,  bolsters, 
boasters,  castors,  Chester's,  choristers,  coasters,  detesters,  digesters, 
dusters,  feasters,  foresters,  gamesters,  holsters,  impostors,  masters, 
musters,  pastors,  paymasters,  pesters,  pilasters,  poetasters,  registers, 
singing-masters,  songsters,  teamsters,  Webster's. 

EXERCISE  XXVII. 
Circle  and  Loop  Grammalogues. 
For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corresponding 


136  THE  MANUAL  OK  PHONOGRAPHY. 

logogram,    filling   a  line  with  each;    Is,  his,  as,  has,  this,  its,  yours, 
some,  six,  said,  such,  seem,  seen,  first,  just,  must,  most,  next. 

I.  Of  two  ills  the  less  is  always  to  be  chosen;  of  six  ills  the  least. 
2.  He  who  goes  to  borrow  shall  some  day  sorrow.  3.  To  die  is  a  debt 
we  must  all  of  us  pay  at  last.  4.  They  who  think  least  are  the  most 
ready  to  talk.  5.  In  the  first  years  of  our  life  we  must  lay  by  for  the 
last.  6.  Our  time  is  as  a  shadow  which  passeth  away.  7.  He  who 
takes  the  first  step  in  the  path  of  dishonesty  must  take  the  next.  8. 
He  who  has  a  tongue  in  his  head  should  keep  it  in  check.  9.  He  has 
no  time  who  makes  no  use  of  time.  10.  They  may  be  said  to  have 
much  who  enjoy  much.  II.  Sorrow  and  shame  await  such  as  despise 
the  day  of  small  things.  12.  A  rank  knave  may  seem  to  speak  jusi 
like  any  honest  fellow.  13.  If  you  fill  the  purse  of  any  hale  fellow 
you  may  lack  enough  to  fill  yours.  14.  Many  fear  the  just  use  of  a 
thing  because  they  have  seen  its  abuse.  15.  If  we  are  wise  we  will 
seek  to  make  this  day  the  best  day  in  our  lives. 

EXERCISE  XXVIII. 

The  N-hook. — See  paragraphs  101  to  107. 

Par.  102  a. — Union,  dampen,  happen,  often,  heaven,  amain,  widen, 
attain,  weaken,  seven,  Spain,  skein,  pagan,  obtain,  balloon,  barren, 
famine,  violin,  muffin,  deepen,  dudgeon,  harpoon,  region,  enjoin, 
cannon. 

Par.  102  b. — Paeon,  peon,  Gihon,  ^Egean,  Cayenne,  Guienne,  Leon, 
lion. 

Par.  102  c. — Penny,  puny,  ebony,  funny,  euphony,  Vienna,  minnow, 
hominy,  ammonia,  mania,  tawny,  Dinah,  downy,  ninny,  Genoa,  Jenny, 
Juno,  canoe,  Helena,  Olney,  luna,  arena,  rainy. 

Par.  103. — Pinch,  bench,  finish,  vanish,  lonely,  gainsay,  potency, 
paganish,  barrenly,  habitancy,  vacancy,  milliner,  turnkey,  laconic, 
refining,  envenom,  cadenza,  sponge,  scantily,  poignancy,  penance, 
evenness,  monarch,  addendum. 

Par.  104.— Fence,  fans,  veins,  ovens,  thins,  lanes,  lens,  earns, 
nouns,  oceans,  vigilance,  excellence,  assigns,  Athens,  redolence, 
lonesome,  ransom,  sponsor,  Spencer,  kinsman. 

Par.  105. — Pins,  pains,  happens,  bounce,  whitens,  tunes,  dawns, 
widens,  dunce,  rinse,  chance,  wakens,  wagons,  pounce,  opens,  ven- 


THE    MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  137 

geance,  diligence,  dispense,  assistance,  instance,  impudence,  elegance, 
expanse,  heightens. 

Par.  106  a. — -Pounces,  tenses,  chances,  dances,  dispenses,  re- 
sponses. 

Par.  106  b. — Fences,  offenses,  evinces,  minces,  essences,  lances, 
lenses,  summonses,  dissonances,  resonances,  excellences. 

Par.  107. — Pounced,  bounced,  danced,  chanced,  canst,  against, 
rinsed,  instanced,  dispensed,  distanced. 

Punster,  spinster. 

Silenced,  fenced,  evinced,  minced,  lanced,  summonsed. 

Leinster,  minster. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Abstain,  acorn,  adorn,  anon,  arraign,  assign, 
aspen,  bane,  bastion,  beckon,  bobbin,  button,  bullion,  campaign, 
cabin,  champion,  cheapen,  chin,  colon,  coin,  dawn,  detain,  discern, 
din,  engine,  examine,  felon,  festoon,  foreign,  gammon,  haven,  hair- 
pin, herein,  heroine",  heathen,  Hessian,  hearken,  hidden,  homespun, 
humane,  illumine,  Italian,  Japan,  keen,  keystone,  lampoon,  lapstone, 
lagoon,  lemon,  legion,  linen,  liken,  masculine,  marine,  machine, 
milestone,  minion,  muslin,  open,  orphan,  oxygen,  pain,  patten,  pip- 
pin, piston,  rain,  refine,  remain,  renown,  reckon,  ripen,  roughen, 
saturnine,  Satan,  scan,  sexton,  serene,  shorn,  silken,  sloven,  smitten, 
spin,  stiffen,  stolen,  stern,  summon,  sultan,  sullen,  sustain,  surgeon, 
talon,  thin,  thine,  thorn,  turn,  uneven,  urban,  wagon,  weapon,  whet- 
stone, woven,  yearn. 

Aphony,  Arno,  assignee,  avenue,  Binney,  bonny,  bony,  China, 
coney,  Dana,  Diana,  duenna,  Egina,  Eugenia,  Fanny,  fenny,  finny, 
genii,  Guinea,  Guiana,  Havana,  hackney,  Harney,  hernia,  horny, 
Illinois,  irony,  Jonah,  Joanna,  Kinney,  Lena,  mania,  many,  money, 
Mooney,  Pawnee,  pony,  Ranney,  renew,  Rooney,  Taney,  tiny,  ulna, 
viny,  veiny. 

Athenian,  bandog,  banish,  bunch,  bunchy,  buttonweed,  button- 
wood,  buttonhole,  canary,  cabinboy,  conic,  Cognac,  downfall,  evanish, 
evening,  fawning,  fanning,  feigning,  feigningly,  finisher,  finishing, 
fining,  finance,  leanly,  leaner,  Leonora,  leavening,  lineally,  linear, 
manure,  malignly,  millenium,  millinery,  millionaire,  Minorca,  moon- 
beam, monarchy,  monarchic,  Monroe,  occupancy,  openness,  opulency, 
paunch,  piquancy,  ponderous,  poppinjay,  punisher,  pulmonic,  punch, 
punish,  ravening,  redolency,  roughening,  skindeep,  softening,  spinach, 
Spanish,  supineness,  thinness,  thinning,  tinfoil,  towntalk,  vainness, 
vanishing. 

Arraigns,  dissonance,  evince,  fawns,  feigns,  fines,  fins,  heavens, 
Hessians,  impatience,  irons,  lance,  leans,  lines,  loins,  loans,  loons, 
manes,  mince,  mines,  moans,  nuns,  offense,  omniscience,  patience, 
resonance,  shins,  shines,  summons,  thanes,  thence. 


138  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


Accidence,  attains,  atones,  awakens,  bans,  beans,  bins,  bones, 
boons,  buns,  canes,  chins,  chains,  cons,  cones,  coons,  dance,  deans, 
deigns,  dens,  dense,  distance,  dins,  dines,  dons,  downs,  duns,  ex- 
pense, gains,  gowns,  guns,  impotence,  inelegance,  joins,  kens,  pawns, 
pans,  pence,  pens,  Phillipines,  pines,  Poins,  puns,  rains,  response, 
rounce,  runs,  sapience,  suspense,  tans,  teens,  tense,  tines,  Tompkins, 
tons,  tones,  towns,  weakens. 

Assistances,  bounces,  diligences,  distances,  dunces,  elegances,  ex- 
penses, expanses,  instances,  rinses,  suspenses,  vengeances. 

EXERCISE  XXIX. 

The  F-V  Hook. — See  paragraphs  108  to  112. 

Par.  no  a. — Puff,  beef,  doff,  chaff,  calf,  Cough,  reef,  rebuff,  tariff, 
sheriff,  scuff,  seraph. 

Pave,  dive,  rave,  heave,  dative,  repave,  Argive,  bereave. 

Par.  no  b. — Puffy,  edify,  defy,  coffee,  purify,  verify. 

Agave,  bevy,  Batavia,  Davy,  Java,  Jehova,  covey,  anchovy,  purvey, 
Fairview,  larva,  larvae,  Harvey,  Hervey,  survey. 

Par.  in. — Buffer,  taffeta,  toughen,  toughness,  defeat,  chaffing, 
chafing,  cougher,  rifle,  raffle,  rougher,  refer. 

Recover,  recovery,  paver,  paving,  obviate,  bivouac,  devote,  devotee, 
rival,  revery,  revere. 

Par.  112. — Puffs,  doffs,  coughs,  reefs,  rebuffs,  tariffs,  carafes, 
seraphs. 

Calves,  achieves,  raves,  heaves,  archives,  serves. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Buff,  caitiff,  carafe,  chief,  chafe,  chuff,  cough, 
coif,  cuff,  deaf,  epitaph,  gaff,  giraffe,  guff,  hoof,  huff,  Jeff,  rife,  roof, 
rough,  scoff,  skiff,  surf. 

Achieve,  archive,  behave,  Dave,  dove  (past  tense  of  dive},  dove  (a 
bint),  gyve,  hive,  hove,  Jove,  khedive,  reave,  rive,  rove,  serve,  up- 
heave, votive. 

Beefy,  beatify,  chaffy,  citify,  deify,  horrify,  Jaffy,  Morphy,  Murphy, 
rarify,  speechify,  taffy,  terrify. 

Beefs,  buffs,  caitiffs,  chiefs,  chafes,  coifs,  cuffs,  epitaphs,  gaffs,  gi- 
raffes, hoofs,  roofs,  scoffs,  scuffs,  sheriffs,  skiffs,  surfs. 

Argives,  behaves,  bereaves,  dives,  gyves,  hives,  khedives,  paves, 
reaves,  repaves,  rives,  roves,  upheaves. 


THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  139 

EXERCISE  XXX. 

The  Shun-hook.     .See  paragraphs  113  to  118. 

Par.  1 14  a. — Fashion,  evasion,  omission,  oration,  abolition,  viola- 
tion, intimation,  mention,  division,  ignition,  ascension,  domination, 
assignation,  reanimation,  expostulation,  starvation,  definition,  postu- 
lation,  distension,  assassination,  collision,  fascination,  inanition, 
repulsion. 

Par.  114^(1). — Section,  fiction,  adhesion,  eviction,  hesitation, 
infection,  deception,  suspicion,  recitation,  exception,  execution,  ex- 
action, benefaction,  emancipation,  institution,  restitution,  ulceration, 
deification,  subsection. 

Par.  114^(2). — Option,  passion,  auction,  cushion,  abortion,  diction, 
adoration,  allegation,  erection,  inaction,  caption,  apparition,  abjec- 
tion, adaption,  reduction,  libation,  extortion,  iteration,  separation, 
seduction,  restoration,  castigation,  rejection,  assertion. 

Par.  1143(3). — Edition,  optician,  obtusion,  erudition,  agitation, 
repetition,  invitation,  cogitation,  facilitation,  expedition,  affectation. 

Par.  114^(4). — Optional,  additional,  rational,  auctioneer,  occa- 
sional, dictionary,  sectional,  executioner. 

Par.  115^. — Tuition,  situation,  variation,  evacuation,  attenuation, 
deviation  (v-hook),  alleviation,  radiation,  insinuation,  expiation, 
extenuation,  affiliation,  delineation,  humiliation,  palliation,  retal- 
iation. 

Par.  115^"- — Association,  vitiation,  emaciation,  initiation,  renun- 
ciation. 

Par.  116. — Passions,  visions,  emotions,  orations,  actions,  mansions, 
revisions,  sections,  locations,  exertions,  portions,  associations,  temp- 
tations, assertions,  occupations,  injections,  inventions,  distinctions, 
suspicions,  resolutions,  abortions,  delusions,  opticians,  repetitions, 
allegations. 

Par.  117.  —  Position,  physician,  secession,  excision,  causation, 
supposition,  vexation,  indecision,  dispossession,  annexation,  dis- 
pensation. 

Positions,  abscissions,  decisions,  recessions,  excisions,  impositions, 
sensations,  dispositions,  annexations,  pulsations. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Ablution,  abomination,  absolution,  accu- 
mulation, admission,  adulation,  allusion,  ambition,  ammunition, 


140  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


animation,  appellation,  assumption,  ascension,  attention,  cessation, 
coalition,  coagulation,  collation,  damnation,  delusion,  derision,  de- 
famation, demolition,  detention,  derivation,  dejection,  destination, 
designation,  devotion,  diffusion,  dilation,  divination,  dissension, 
dissimulation,  dissemination,  distinction,  donation,  effusion,  evolu- 
tion, elation,  elevation,  elimination,  emulation,  exhalation,  expansion, 
formation,  hallucination,  illusion,  immolation,  impulsion,  inhalation, 
infusion,  invasion,  involution,  invention,  intimation,  locomotion, 
lotion,  mansion,  manipulation,  mission,  motion,  munition,  nation, 
notion,  oblation,  oppugnation,  ovation,  pension,  pollution,  popu- 
lation, reascension,  remission,  resignation,  resolution,  retention, 
revision,  ruination,  rumination,  salivation,  scintillation,  session,  stag- 
nation, suffusion,  tension,  undulation,  vaccination,  vacillation,  vatici- 
nation, vision. 

Affection,  avocation,  bisection,  citation,  cohesion,  destitution, 
discussion,  dislocation,  dissection,  dissipation,  edification,  elucidation, 
excitation,  exertion,  exhibition,  exudation,  faction,  gestation,  im- 
bibation,  inception,  laceration,  legation,  location,  locution,  mani- 
festation, ossification,  oxidation,  pacification,  reception,  restitution, 
revisitation,  revocation,  selection,  station,  suction,  vacation,  vene- 
section, visitation,  vocation. 

Aberration,  abnegation,  action,  acceleration,  adoption,  admiration, 
alienation,  allocation,  amelioration,  apportion,  arrogation,  aspiration, 
benediction,  caution,  cooperation,  corrosion,  decoction,  defection, 
demarkation,  distortion,  ejection,  election,  elocution,  elongation, 
enaction,  eruption,  eradication,  exacerbation,  exaggeration,  exhilara- 
tion, fumigation,  inhibition,  injection,  incubation,  inspiration,  irri- 
gation, irruption,  litigation,  melioration,  negation,  occasion,  occupa- 
tion, operation,  peroration,  portion,  potion,  reaction,  reapportion, 
reelection,  reenaction,  reiteration,  reparation,  rogation,  rustication, 
subjugation,  suspiration,  usurpation,  variagation. 

Addition,  amputation,  annotation,  capitation,  deputation,  dictation, 
eructation,  felicitation,  habitation,  imputation,  inundation,  limitation, 
mutation,  notation,  palpitation,  partition,  petition,  potation,  rendition, 
rotation,  vegetation. 

Actionary,  additionally,  cautionary,  electioneer,  exceptional,  extor- 
tioner, occasionally,  petitionary,  petitioner,  rationally,  stationary, 
stationer,  stationery. 

Additions,  admissions,  allusions,  appellations,  auctions,  avocations, 
benedictions,  cautions,  carnations,  castigations,  citations,  collations, 
collisions,  coronations,  cushions,  deputations,  definitions,  derivations, 
destinations,  designations,  deceptions,  decoctions,  divisions,  dicta- 
tions, discussions,  distortions,  dissensions,  donations,  ebullitions, 
editions,  effusions,  ejections,  elisions,  elections,  elongations,  eleva- 
tions, emissions,  eruptions,  eructations,  eradications,  evasions,  exag- 
gerations, exceptions,  executions,  exhibitions,  exhalations,  expansions, 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  14! 

expeditions,  fashions,  fascinations,  fusions,  habitations,  illusions, 
impulsions,  inhalations,  inspirations,  institutions,  intimations,  innun- 
dations,  invitations,  legations,  libations,  limitations,  lotions,  mani- 
festations, mentions,  missions,  motions,  nations,  notions,  occasions, 
omissions,  operations,  ovations,  partitions,  pensions,  petitions,  pota- 
tions, potions,  reascensions,  receptions,  refashions,  remissions,  ren- 
ditions, renovations,  renunciations,  ruminations,  selections,  separa- 
tions, sessions,  stations,  undulations,  vacations,  visitations,  vocations. 

Abscission,  accession,  accusation,  apposition,  decision,  deposition, 
disposition,  dissuasion,  fossilization,  incision,  imposition,  laxation, 
nationalization,  opposition,  possession,  pulsation,  reannexation,  re- 
cession, repossession,  sensation,  solemnization,  succession,  symboliza- 
tion,  taxation. 

Accessions,  accusations,  causations,  depositions,  dissuasions,  dis- 
pensations, incisions,  laxations,  oppositions,  physicians,  possessions, 
reannexations,  secessions,  solemnizations,  successions,  suppositions, 
symbolizations,  vexations. 

EXERCISE  XXXI. 

Final  Hook    Grammalogues. 

Page  60. — For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corre- 
sponding logogram,  filling  a  line  with  each  :  Upon,  been,  ten,  done, 
general,  generally,  can,  again,  gone,  phonography,  than,  then,  alone, 
man,  men,  opinion,  none,  above,  whatever,  differ,  differed,  different, 
difference,  gave,  whichever. 

I.  The  man  who  lives  but  for  his  own  sake  is  lower  than  the  beasts. 
2.  No  opinion  is  so  general  but  some  will  refuse  to  receive  it.  3.  The 
rich  man  generally  becomes  possessed  by  his  riches  and  then  he  is  a 
slave.  4.  The  man  who  takes  pains  may  attain  success  by  which- 
ever road  he  has  gone  to  seek  it.  5.  If  the  young  but  gave  a 
small  portion  of  time  to  master  phonography  they  would  save  it 
again  and  again.  6.  Whatever  you  have  to  do,  do  as  soon  as  you  can. 
7.  If  I  have  done  all  I  can,  I  have  done  all  you  can  ask.  8.  Any  man 
can  give  an  opinion  but  few  can  take  advice.  9.  Men's  opinions  have 
always  differed  and  it  is  safe  to  say  they  always  will  differ.  10.  A 
fool  can  give  an  opinion  upon  ten  different  topics  before  a  wise  man 
can  upon  two.  II.  If  phonography  were  generally  written  we  should 
all  save  much  time  which  now  is  lost.  12.  Nothing  is  mine  alone; 
but  mine  to  use,  to  enjoy  and  to  share  with  my  fellow  men.  13.  Men 
have  long  been  of  different  opinions  as  to  the  right  of  any  man  to 
own  a  portion  of  the  earth.  14.  No  mere  difference  of  opinion  can 


142  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

f 

justify  violence  in  man  against  man.     15.  Set  your  affections  on  things 
above  and  on  none  of  the  things  on  the  earth. 

EXERCISE  XXXII. 

The  Small  W-hook. — See  paragraphs  122  to  129. 

Par.  122. — Wail,  wall,  walrus,  wane,  war,  warden,  warm,  wan, 
wealth,  weariness,  welcome,  welfare,  wench,  wile,  willow,  win,  wince, 
window,  wolf,  woman,  woolly,  wordy,  worried,  worthless,  warranty. 

Par.  127. — Edwin,  unworn,  beware,  outworn,  halfworn,  Epworth, 
unworthy,  unwearied,  wayworn. 

Par.  128. — Swam,  swain,  swarm,  swarthy,  swerve,  swill,  swirl, 
swollen,  sworn,  boatswain. 

Par.  129. — Whale,  whaler,  wheel,  whelm,  whence,  whilom,  whimsi- 
cal, whirling,  whine,  whorl,  whinny,  wheelman,  wharfage,  whaleback. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Wailer,  wain,  Wainwright,  wale,  Wallack, 
Waller,  Wallis,  wall-less,  Walloon,  wallop,  wallow,  wan-faced,  wanly, 
wanness,  wanton,  wantonness,  war-chief,  war-dance,  war-horse,  war- 
knife,  war-path,  war-ship,  war-song,  war-whoop,  war-worn,  ware, 
warehouse,  wareroom,  warfare,  warily,  wariest,  warlike,  warming, 
warmth,  warn,  warner,  warp,  Warren,  warring,  warrior,  wary,  weal, 
wealthy,  wean,  wear,  wearer,  wearing,  wearisome,  weary,  Welch, 
welkin,  Wellington,  Welsh,  wen,  werwolf,  wiliness,  wilier,  wily, 
wincing,  window-seat,  Windsor,  wine,  Winnebago,  winner,  winning, 
winnow,  winsome,  winsomeness,  wire,  wire-edge,  wire-puller,  wiri- 
ness,  wiry,  wolf-dog,  wolfish,  wolf-skin,  wolves,  womanish,  women, 
woman ishness,  women-folk,  won,  wool,  woolen,  woolpnck,  work, 
workaday,  workhouse,  worm,  worm-eaten,  wormwood,  worn,  worri- 
some, worry,  worst,  worth,  worthily,  worthier,  worthlessly,  worthy. 

Forswear,  forsworn,  swallow,  swallowed,  swan,  swarming,  swarth- 
ier, swarthiest,  swarthiness,  swear,  swell,  swim,  swimmer,  swimming, 
swine,  swinish,  swirling,  swoon,  swore,  swum. 

Whaleboat,  whalebone,  whaleman,  whale-oil,  wharf,  wharfmnn, 
wharfmaster,  wheelbarrow,  Wheeler,  wheel-house,  wheelway,  wheel- 
Work,  wheel-worn,  wheelwright,  whelk,  whelp,  wherry,  while,  whilst, 
whim,  whimsically,  whimsicalness,  whimsy,  whining,  whiningly, 
whir,  whirl,  whirligig,  whirlpool. 

EXERCISE  XXXIII. 
The  L-hook. — See  paragraphs  130  to  134. 
Par.  133. — Plea,  plow,  blow,  flee,  flow,  claw,  clay,  glue. 
Apple,  able,  idle,  addle,  eagle,  ogle,  awful,  evil,  oval,  idol. 
Apply,  ably,  idly,  eclat,  ugly,  awfully. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  143 

Plum,  Plato,  pledge,  bluff,  bleach,  flume,  flowery,  flag,  claim, 
glassy,  bleat,  clinch,  gluttony,  blossom,  classic,  flax,  plowman,  flagon, 
planet,  platonic,  flamingo,  clemency,  globular,  flabbiness,  clearance. 

Abler,  oblige,  idler,  applies,  addles,  afflict,  appliance,  eclipsing, 
acclivity,  eclectic,  affluence,  acclamation,  ableness. 

Woful,  waggle,  Bible,  facial,  meekly,  tickle,  employ,  ireful,  chapel, 
goggle,  magical,  chemical,  devilish,  speckle,  suitably,  diplomacy, 
radical,  obstacle,  vocalist,  legibly,  roguishly,  emblem,  deplore,  shuf- 
fler, unstable. 

Par.  134. — Petal,  battle,  Mitchell,  nobly,  wriggle,  novel,  bungle, 
finical,  terrible,  assailable,  revival,  ineffable,  cavalry,  memorably, 
reflect,  scuffle,  indelible,  unclasp,  replevin,  anglicize,  amicably,  fiddler, 
inflame,  unlovely,  dominical. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Blew,  blue,  clayey,  Chloe,  cloy,  clue,  flaw, 
flay,  flew,  flue,  fly,  glee,  glow,  gluey,  play,  ply. 

Blackmail,  blame,  blasphemy,  blazed,  blazoning,  blazon,  blemish, 
blessedly,  blight,  bliss,  blithe,  block,  blockhead,  bloodiness,  blueish- 
ness,  blush,  clammy,  clarifying,  clarion,  clash,  clause,  cleanse,  clearly, 
clench,  clerical,  clerk,  climax,  clip,  clog,  closely,  cloth,  clownish, 
club,  clumsy,  flaccid,  flange,  flab,  flash,  flask,  flaxen,  fleece,  Flemish, 
flog,  floridly,  florist,  flounce,  flower,  fluency,  fluid,  glance,  glass, 
glazed,  gleam,  glen,  glibly,  glimpse,  glisten,  globe,  globule,  glossy, 
glottis,  phlegm,  plan,  plank,  plastic,  platoon,  please,  pleased,  pliancy, 
pluck,  plumbago,  plume,  plunge,  plus,  Plymouth. 

Acclaim,  acclimation,  afflatus,  affliction,  afflictive,  applaud,  applause, 
apple-pie,  apples,  applicable,  applicably,  application,  awfulness,  eagles, 
eclipsed,  effloresce,  effluence,  effluvia,  effluvium,  evil-doer,  evilness, 
evils,  idleness,  idles,  idols,  ogles. 

Amiable,  arable,  audible,  available,  beneficial,  biblical,  bubble, 
buckle,  bugle,  cackle,  cheaply,  chivalry,  cubical,  curable,  declare, 
declivity,  desirably,  diploma,  double,  edible,  eligible,  employer,  es- 
pecial, esplanade,  faculty,  fickle,  firefly,  fumbler,  geological,  giggle, 
heretical,  hovel,  idiotical,  implore,  infallible,  inimitable,  juggler, 
knavishly,  lavishly,  likelihood,  localism,  logical,  mystical,  nimble, 
official,  oracle,  palatial,  pebble,  periodical,  pliable,  poetical,  powerful, 
pupil,  removal,  resumable,  shovel,  shuffle,  shuttle,  smuggle,  stifle, 
stoical,  table,  tangible,  teachable,  theistical,  thickly,  thievishly,  tick- 
lish, tipple,  total,  useful,  vocal,  weavil,  wiggle. 

Admirable,  affable,  alienable,  angler,  answerable,  barnacle,  bell- 
flower,  Bethel,  bevel,  botanical,  bottle,  bungler,  cauliflower,  cavalcade, 
cavil,  chilblain,  circle,  couple,  cynical,  dangler,  definable,  dissoluble, 
doleful,  empirical,  enable,  enviable,  feeble,  fiddle,  gavel,  gobble, 
haggle,  Hannibal,  healable,  hierarchal,  ignoble,  inclosed,  .inclusive, 


144  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

inflict,  invariably,  jungle,  knuckle,  levelness,  libel,  lovable,  mingle, 
miserable,  movably,  muffler,  navigable,  nibbler,  nickle,  novelty, 
paddle,  panoply,  pedal,  rabble,  rankly,  reasonable,  receivable,  reflex, 
regal,  repealable,  replaced,  repletion,  shackle,  snaffle,  tangle,  tech- 
nical, tinkle,  uncle,  volubly,  wrangle,  wrinkle,  wrathful. 

EXERCISE  XXXIV. 

The  R-hook.—  See  paragraphs  135  to  137. 

Par.  135. — Pry,  bray,  free,  trio,  draw,  throw,  shrew,  crow,  gray. 

Offer,  eater,  eider,  ether,  usher,  acre,  augur. 

Affray,  agree. 

Prop,  prowl,  breathe,  dream,  trudge,  freak,  crumb,  drag,  shrill, 
grieve,  bruise,  thrice,  bright,  broken,  driven,  frenzy,  prepare,  tragic, 
brevity,  critic,  trustee,  prince,  trickle,  crisis. 

April,  abridge,  utterly,  across,  egregious,  overlap,  atrocity,  adroit, 
ushers,  oversee,  apron,  approve,  address,  attrition,  oppressed,  over- 
turn, overflow,  egress,  overcome,  Africa,  eagerly,  oppressor,  average, 
approach,  aphorism. 

Poetry,  powder,  fiber,  major,  labor,  teacher,  leisure,  robber, 
knocker,  victor,  gentry,  poultry,  fabric,  theatric,  alacrity,  lethargy, 
spatter,  slavery,  flavor,  clever,  improper,  chagrin,  impress,  increase, 
patronage,  preacher. 

Defray,  wafer,  baker,  talker,  Dover,  jobber,  checker,  algebra,  out- 
break, diagram,  chatter,  tigress,  depravity,  astrology,  epigram,  mim- 
icry, taper,  arbor,  chaffer,  begrime,  joker,  wicker,  tether,  diaphragm. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Brew,  brow,  crew,  cry,  dray,  drew,  dry, 
fray,  fro,  fry,  grow,  pray,  prow,  threw,  through,  tray,  tree,  trow,  try. 

Adder,  aider,  author,  azure,  eager,  either,  ichor,  ochre,  odor,  ogre, 
Ophir,  other,  otter,  outer,  utter. 

Brain,  bravery,  breach,  bribe,  brick,  bridle,  brisk,  broom,  crab, 
crank,  crawl,  crayon,  create,  credence,  crime,  crisp,  crop,  crossed, 
cruelty,  crusty,  drain,  dreary,  drench,  drive,  droll,  drop,  drowsy, 
drudge,  frail,  frame,  fresco,  fresh,  fresher,  frost,  frothy,  grab,  gra- 
cious, graphic,  grasp,  grass,  greedy,  groom,  grudge,  gruel,  phrase, 
prefix,,  premium,  price,  princess,  prism,  process,  progress,  promise, 
propose,  proxy,  shrimp,  shrine,  shrink,  shrivel,  thread,  thresh,  thrifty, 
throes,  trace,  tracery,  track,  traffic,  trail,  train,  trash,  treatise,  trellis, 
trim,  trouble. 

Aberdeen,  Abraham,  Abrahamic,  Abram,  abrasion,  accretion,  acri- 
mony, addressed,  addressing,  Adrian,  afresh,  African,  aggregate, 
aggression,  aggressive,  aggrieve,  agreeable,  agreeably,  Agrippa, 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  145 

Akron,  appraised,  appreciable,  apprisal,  approachable,  approbation, 
approbative,  approval,  approve,  apropos,  atrocious,  authoress,  author- 
ize, authorized,  ebriety,  Ephraim,  Euphrates,  O'Brien,  offers,  ogress, 
O'Grady,  oppress,  oppressing,  oppression,  oppressive,  opprobrious, 
opprobrium,  overalls,  overbear,  overblown,  overbuy,  overdo,  over- 
done, overdose,  overdraw,  overgrowth,  overhang,  overhear,  overlay, 
overlook,  overmuch,  overpass,  overpay,  overpower,  overreach,  over- 
ride, overrun,  overruling,  overshadow,  overweening,  overwhelm,  over- 
whelming, overwork,  utterable,  utterer. 

Angry,  archer,  badger,  barber,  betray,  blubber,  cambric,  camphor, 
cater,  cleverly,  cockerel,  copper,  daughter,  dodger,  electric,  embroil, 
enshrine,  entry,  favorer,  federation,  feverish,  gather,  harbinger,  heifer, 
highpriest,  hither,  hopper,  hungry,  impressed,  improvise,  intrigue, 
labyrinth,  library,  liquor,  livery,  lodger,  lounger,  maneuver,  mongrel, 
obliger,  obtrusion,  paper,  pilgrim,  pusher,  rasher,  reapproach,  recross, 
rector,  redress,  refresh,  reproach,  rigor,  shelter,  shiver,  shoulder, 
snapper,  sugar,  sulphur,  tatter,  tawdry,  unbroken,  unthrifty,  viper, 
voucher,  wagers,  withdrawal,  worker. 

Algebraic,  ascribe,  Australasia,  autocracy,  autocratic,  autographic, 
beaker,  beggar,  beggarly,  begriming,  begrudge,  Beverly,  biographic, 
checkers,  chider,  chowder,  choker,  chopper,  dapper,  daybreak,  decree, 
decrial,  defrayer,  degree,  depressed,  deprive,  dethrone,  digger, 
digress,  fireproof,  geographer,  geographic,  harper,  hypocrisy,  jabber, 
Jeffrey,  jeopardy,  Jethro,  jigger,  leapfrog,  mackerel,  maker,  meager, 
outbrave,  outcry,  outgrown,  Picardy,  pickerel,  pucker,  Shadrach, 
smoker,  tiger,  tigerish,  Tipperary,  toper,  tubercle,  tucker,  typography, 
watchmaker,  wavers,  weaker,  weaver,  Weber,  weeper. 

EXERCISE  XXXV. 

Irregular  Double  Consonants. — See  paragraphs  138  and  139. 

Par.  138. — Panel,  final,  venal,  tunnel,  kennel,  unless,  original, 
nominal,  flannel,  spinal,  signal,  diagonal,  analyze,  channel,  penalty, 
funnel. 

Exceedingly,  glowingly,  jugglingly,  shufflingly,  cavilingly,  love- 
ingly,  bloomingly,  obligingly,  flamingly,  glaringly,  sparingly. 

Enamel,  animal,  camel,  enameling,  malignity,  animalness. 

Laurel,  coral,  carol,  caroling,  spiral,  spirally,  rural,  ruralness. 

Choler,  collar,  scholar,  Schiller,  nailer,  kneeler,  color,  Kneller, 
cooler. 

Humor,  roamer,  warmer,  calmer,  former,  Limerick,  schemer, 
primer,  tremor,  grammar. 


146  THE  MANUAL  OK  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Inner,  minor,  tenor,  tannery,  mineral,  funeral,  manner,  joiner,  shiner, 
trainer. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Aboriginal,  analogical,  analogically,  analyst, 
analyzed,  analyzer,  annals,  autumnal,  Bacchanal,  channeling,  diag- 
onally, diurnal,  enliven,  fennel,  finally,  funnel,  hexagonal,  impanel, 
impaneling,  kenneling,  marginal,  marginally,  nominally,  octagonal, 
originally,  paneling,  penal,  seminal,  tunneling,  venally. 

Blamer,  brimmer,  chimer,  clamorous,  defamer,  dreamer,  drummer, 
enamor,  ephemeral,  farmer,  femoral,  formerly,  framer,  glimmer,  grimmer, 
hammer,  hammering,  hammers,  Homer,  humoring,  humors,  rimer,  rumor, 
rumoring,  skimmer,  trimmer. 

Banner,  deanery,  dinner,  donor,  Eleanor,  generous,  honor,  honoring, 
honors,  Minerva,  owner,  panorama,  pecuniary,  Sumner,  tanner,  tinner, 
ulnar,  veneration,  ignorance. 

EXERCISE  XXXVI. 

Intervocalization. — See  paragraph  140. 

Par.  140. — Generic,  marble,  paralysis,  locality,  develop,  analogy, 
anarchic,  philology,  telescope,  barter. 

Verb,  border,  affirm,  nerve,  church,  portray,  Virgil,  allegorical, 
burglar,  Normandy,  Birmingham,  fulcrum,  purple,  moralist,  porce- 
lain, devolve,  divulge,  colony,  tolerably,  inculcate. 

Picture,  puncture,  fiduciary,  lecture,  rupture,  capture,  rapture, 
reticule,  agriculture,  lecturer,  recapture,  disfigure,  circular,  figurative, 
ridicule. 

Par.  140  (Note). — Roll,  enroll,  unroll,  enrolling,  rail,  railway,  rail- 
road, rule,  ruler,  ruleable,  unrolling,  relation,  relative,  realm,  relish, 
relevancy,  roller,  rolling,  railing. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Analogous,  chargeable,  chargeably,  envelop 
(v),  generical,  impartial,  legality,  marshal!,  marvel,  overcharge,  par- 
allel, paralytic,  philologic,  philosopher,  philosophic,  philosophize, 
philosophy,  sharpening. 

Adverb,  adverse,  allegorically,  allegory,  averse,  aversely,  aversion, 
burglary,  colonial,  Columbus,  demonology,  diabolical,  diabolically, 
diverse,  endorser,  ethnology,  hyperbole,  impervious,  infernal,  inverse, 
isothermal,  moralized,  murmurer,  murmuring,  permeable,  perjure, 
perjury,  personage,  personify,  phonology,  portrayer,  purplish,  reaf- 
firm, renerve,  sycamore,  technology,  tolerable,  turtle,  unburthen,  un- 
church, verbal,  verbally,  vermifuge,  vernal,  version. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  147 

EXERCISE  XXXVII. 
Triple  and  Quadruple  Consonants. — See  paragraphs  141  to  147. 

Par.  141. — Splash,  splice,  spleen,  splutter,  splatter,  splicing,  spliced, 
splenetic,  splenetical,  spleenishness,  Sclavonic. 

Supply,  sable,  civil,  settle,  satchel,  cycle,  civilize,  Cyclops,  sepul- 
cher,  sepulchral,  cypher,  sever,  simmer,  soother,  sooner,  suffers, 
southern,  sufferable,  sublimely,  saddlebow,  swaddle,  supplication. 

Par.  142. — Possible,  physical,  display,  plausible,  briskly,  classical, 
disoblige,  disclaim,  exclaim,  medicinal,  discipline,  obtrusively,  de- 
pressingly,  displeasing,  exclusion,  grotesquely,  repressible,  untrace- 
able,  disciple,  noticeable,  deducible,  unappeasable,  exclusive. 

Pastry,  fastener,  mastery,  destroy,  dishonor,  extra,  prisoner,  pastur- 
age, rostrum,  extreme,  fixture,  depositor,  bestride,  mistress,  solicitor, 
distrust,  expressly,  pedestrian,  apostrophize,  prosperous,  obstre- 
perous, blusterer,  blazonry,  frustration,  terrestrial,  expressively, 
disthrone. 

Par.  143. — Intrinsical,  explosive,  explicit,  explanation,  feasible, 
taxable,  invisible,  whisper,  gesture,  disprove,  ancestry,  prescription, 
proscribe,  bescrawl,  disproportion,  disperse,  disburden,  registration, 
disapproval,  shoestring,  massacre,  dulcimer,  risible,  crucible,  explain. 

Menstruum,  monstrous,  monster,  monstrosity,  monstrously,  monstrous- 
ness,  minstrel,  minstrelsy,  demonstrable,  demonstrably,  demonstrative, 
demonstrativeness,  demonstration. 

In  writing  the  following  words  it  is  necessary  to  write  the  circle 
on  the  outside  of  the  preceding  curve,  contrary  to  the  general  rule: 
Misapply,  vesper,  vestry,  masonry,  offspring,  nostrum,  nostril,  soph- 
istry, songstress,  vestryman. 

Write  the  word  necessarily  with  a  large  circle  within  the  r/-hook. 

Par.  144. — Tasker,  dissever,  disagree,  decipher,  disagreeable,  dis- 
graced, disfranchise. 

Par.  145. — Supper,  sober,  cedar,  swagger,  soprano,  cypress,  citron, 
sojourn,  superfine,  secretion,  superficial,  sacrificed,  suppression,  So- 
crates, supercargo,  superstition,  Sacramento,  supreme,  secrecy,  super- 
vision, superfluity,  suppressed,  sacristy,  superinduce,  swaggerer. 

Skirmish,  scurrilous,  spry,  strew,  spring,  strife,  stream,  strike, 
strong,  scrawl,  sprain,  spread,  struggle,  scruple,  sprinkle,  strengthen, 


148  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


scripture,  strangulation,  strode,  scurvily,  springtide,  scrupulous,  stress, 
straddle. 

Write  the  word  sister  with  the  large  initial  evolute  circle. 

Par.  147. — Stutter,  stutteringly,  slabber,  stacker,  stager,  stagger, 
stalker,  steeper,  stepper,  stitcher,  stoker,  stooper,  stopper,  stouter, 
stupor,  stutterer. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Ciphers,  civilian,  civilized,  civilizing,  civilly, 
cyclopedia,  psychological,  sables,  saddle,  saffron,  salver,  saner,  savor, 
seemer,  seether,  sepulture,  settler,  severance,  sickle,  sickliest,  sick- 
liness,  sickly,  sidle,  signer,  sinner,  southerly,  subliming,  sublimity, 
subtle,  suckle,  suffer,  sufferableness,  sufferance,  sufferer,  suffrage, 
summer,  summering,  supple,  suppleness,  suppliance,  supplicater,  sup- 
plies, suttler,  swivel,  sibyl,  sibylline. 

Adducible,  appeasable,  appeasableness,  chastisable,  chess-player, 
classically,  despisable,  disable,  disbelief,  disbelieve,  disciplinarian, 
disclose,  disobligation,  disobliger,  disobligingly,  disobligingness,  dis- 
place, displaced,  displacing,  displayer,  displease,  displeased,  dis- 
pleasedness,  disposable,  disqualify,  dropsical,  exclaimer,  exclaiming, 
exclamation,  exclamative,  'exclusively,  exclusiveness,  impressible, 
intrusively,  lackadaisical,  medicinally,  passable,  passably,  paschal, 
peaceable,  peaceableness,  peaceably,  pedestal,  phthisical,  phys- 
ically, plausibleness,  plausibly,  possibleness,  possibly,  purchasable, 
reducible,  rcducibleness,  seducible,  sidesaddle,  traceable,  tra- 
ducible. 

Abstraction,  abstrusely,  admixture,  ambassador,  Amsterdam,  apo- 
strophe, apostrophized,  atmosphere,  atmospheric,  baptistry,  besieger, 
besprinkle,  bestraddle,  bestrewn,  bestrode,  blusteringly,  boisterous- 
ness,  bowstring,  chemistry,  crusader,  designer,  destroyer,  destruction, 
dextrous,  dissuader,  distraction,  distress,  distressed,  distressfully,  dis- 
tribution, emblazonry,  excrescence,  excursion,  excursive,  expositor, 
express,  expressed,  expressible,  expression,  expressness,  expurgation, 
exterminate,  extirpation,  extraction,  extremity,  extrication,  extrinsic, 
fellow-sufferer,  gastric,  hemisphere,  illustration,  imposture,  lucifer, 
masterly,  misapprehension,  mispronounce,  mistrust,  mixture,  or- 
chestra, orchestral,  outstrip,  pasture,  poisoner,  preposterous,  prosper, 
prosperously,  prostration,  receiver,  reciprocity,  restriction,  super- 
structure, tapestry,  whomsoever. 

Bescrawling,  bescribble,  dayspring,  disapprobation,  disapproba- 
tional,  disapprobatory,  disapprove,  disapproving,  disapprovingly, 
disburse,  disbursed,  disburser,  disbursing,  dispersed,  dispersing,  dis- 
persion, disproportionable,  disproportionableness,  disproportionately, 
disproportional,  disproportionally,  disproportionate,  disproportion- 
ately, encyclopedia,  encyclopedist,  explain,  explainer,  explanatori- 
ness,  explanatory,  explicable,  explicitly,  explicitness,  explode,  explo- 
ration, explore,  explorer,  explosion,  feasible,  fusible,  ineffaceable, 


THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  149 


inexplicable,  inexplicably,  infusible,  intrinsically,  masker,  passover, 
prescribe,  prescription,  refusable,  visible,  visibly,  wiseacre. 

Cheese-press,  deceiver,  decipherable,  descry,  disaffirm,  disaffirming, 
disagreeableness,  disagreeable,  disfranchised,  disfrachising,  disgracing, 
disgracious,  disseverance,  disseveration. 

Gibber,  cider,  Cyprus,  saber,  sacker,  sacrificer,  sacrificial,  sacrificing, 
sacrilegious,  sacrilegiously,  sacrilegiousness,  sadder,  sager,  sapper, 
sappers,  satyr,  seeker,  setter,  sicker,  sipper,  soberness,  sobriety, 
solder,  sucker,  suitor,  superadd,  supercilious,  superciliously,  super- 
ciliousness, superexcellence,  superficially,  superficialness,  superfluous, 
superfluously,  superfluousness,  superhuman,  superinduced,  super- 
inducing, supernumerary,  superscribe,  supersede,  superstitious,  super- 
stitiously,  superstitiousjiess,  supervene,  supervise,  supervised,  super- 
vising, supervisor,  suppers,  suppress,  sweeter. 

Scraggy,  scramble,  scrap,  scrape,  scraper,  scratch,  scratches,  scream, 
screamer,  screech,  screen,  screw,  scribble,  scribbler,  scribe,  scrip, 
scriptural,  scrivener,  scrofulous,  scrub,  scrupulously,  scrupulousness, 
scurrilously,  scurrilousness,  scurviness,  skirmisher,  sprang,  sprawl, 
spree,  sprees,  sprig,  springiness,  sprinkler,  spruce,  sprucely,  spruce- 
ness,  sprung,  strain,  strainer,  strap,  strata,  straw,  stray,  streak,  strength- 
ening, strengthless,  stretch,  strewn,  stride,  striker,  string,  stringiness, 
stringy,  strip,  stripe,  strive,  stroke,  stroll,  stroller,  strop,  strove, 
strow,  strown,  struck,  strung. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIII. 

The  Backward  N-hook. — See  paragraph  148. 

Par.  148  a. — Unscrew,  unsoberly,  unstring,  unstrung,  inscribe,  in- 
superable, insuperableness,  insuperably,  insuppressible,  unsuppressed, 
instruction,  unscriptural,  unscripturally,  unscrupulous,  unscrupul- 
ously, unscrupulousness,  inscriber. 

Par.  148  b. — Insolence,  unseemly,  unseemliness,  unsoldierly,  un- 
soldierlike,  unsolicitous,  unceremonious,  insurrection,  insurrectionary. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Use  the  writing  exercise. 

EXERCISE  XXXIX. 

The  Large  W-hook. — See  paragraphs  149  to  153. 

Par.  150  a. — Twain,  twang,  tweak,  tweezers,  twice,  twig,  twin, 
twinkle,  twitter. 

Dwarf,  dwarfish,  dwell,  dweller,  dwelling-house,  Dwight,  dwelling- 
place. 

Guiacum,  guaniferous,  guano,  guava,  Guelph. 


150  THE    MANUAL   OF    1'HONOGRAPHY. 

Quack,  cuirass,  quake,  qualm,  quarter,  queenly,  quench,  quiver, 
query,  quibble,  quicken,  quiescence,  quietly,  quill,  quirk,  quiz, 
quota,  quadruple,  quarrel,  queer,  Quebec,  quorum,  Quincy,  Quixotic, 
quicksilver. 

Equip,  equable,  aquiline,  equalize,  equator,  equilibrium,  equation, 
equivoke,  equinox,  equivocate,  equity,  equally,  equestrian,  equi- 
angular. 

Par.  150  b. — Inquire,  require,  inquisition,  requisition,  Piqua,  liquid, 
liquefy,  liquefaction,  adequacy. 

Par.  152. — Sequacious,  sequacity,  sequel,  sequence,  sequential, 
sequester,  sequestration,  sequin,  disquiet,  disquisition,  obsequious, 
obsequies,  exquisite,  exquisitely,  exquisiteness. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Cuirassier,  cuish,  cuisine,  quacked,  quack- 
ery, quackish,  quicksilver,  quad,  quadragesima,  quadrangle,  quad- 
rangular, quadrennial,  quadrille,  quadrillion,  quadrinomial,  quadri- 
syllable, quadrisyllable,  quadroon,  quadrumana,  quadrumanous, 
quadruplication,  quaff,  quag,  quagga,  quaggy,  quagmire,  quail, 
quailing,  quaked,  Quaker,  Quakerish,  Quakerism,  qualmish,  quaran- 
tine, quarreler,  quarreling,  quarrelsome,  quarried,  quarrying,  quar- 
terly, quartermaster,  quarterstaff,  quarto,  quash,  quatrain,  quaver, 
quean,  queasiness,  queasy,  queen,  queenlike,  Queenstown,  queer- 
ish,  queerly,  quell,  queller,  quelling,  quencher,  quenchless,  quer- 
ied, querist,  quern,  querulous,  querulously,  querulousness,  querying, 
quest,  quibbler,  quick,  quickener,  quicklime,  quickly,  quickness, 
quickset,  quid,  quidity,  quiesce,  quiet,  quieter,  quietest,  quietness, 
quietus,  quilling,  quincunx,  quinine,  quinsy,  quintillian,  quip,  quire, 
quirkish,  quitch,  quixotical,  quixotically,  quixotism,  quixotry,  quizzed, 
quizzer,  quizzical,  quoth,  quotidian. 

Aquarian,  aquarium,  aquatic,  aqueous,  aqueousness,  equably,  equal, 
equalization,  equalized,  equalizing,  equaling,  equanimity,  equatorial, 
equerry,  equestrianism,  equilibration,  equilibrious,  equilibrist,  equil- 
ibrity,  equine,  equinoctial,  equipage,  equipoise,  equitation,  equivocal, 
equivocally,  equivocation,  equivocator. 

EXERCISE  XL. 

Initial  Hook  Grammalogues. 

Page  74- — For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corre- 
sponding logogram,  filling  a  line  with  each  :  Well,  where,  when,  one, 
tell,  till,  twelve,  call,  difficult,  difficulty,  full,  fully,  only,  principle, 
principal,  principally,  remember,  remembered,  truth,  dear,  care,  from, 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


every,  very,   three,  their,  there,  sure,  surely,  pleasure,  Mr.,  remark, 
remarked,  remarkable,  remarkably,  more,  near,  nor. 

i.  It  has  been  well  remarked,  "No  smoke  can  arise  till  there  has 
been  a  fire."  2.  By  close  study  and  faithful  practise  many  have  been 
able  to  master  phonography  in  a  remarkably  brief  time.  3.  We  may 
rightly  call  health  the  vital  principle  of  pleasure.  4.  Few  of  us 
always  remember  how  very  important  it  is  to  do  well  whatever  we 
may  have  to  do.  5.  Our  principal  care  should  be  to  live  fully—  with 
all  our  faculties  at  work  to  some  useful  purpose.  6.  When  twelve 
honest  men  have  no  difficulty  to  agree,  the  law  takes  their  decision  as 
being  the  truth.  7.  It  is  difficult  to  tell  the  truth  in  all  cases,  but  it 
is  surely  a  brave  and  noble  thing  to  do.  8.  Every  pleasure  we  enjoy, 
it  should  be  remembered,  flows  principally  from  our  actions.  9.  He 
who  goes  far  from  home  is  sure  to  remark  many  strange  sights.  10. 
We  leave  more  to  do  when  we  die  than  we  have  done.  II.  Every 
pleasure  seems  dear  to  us  in  proportion  as  it  is  near.  12.  Think  of 
three  things  :  Whence  you  come,  where  you  go,  and  to  whom  you 
must  answer.  13.  It  was  Washington  Irving  who  first  wrote  the  re- 
markable expression,  "the  almighty  dollar."  14.  Only  by  full  and 
free  discussion  can  men  hope  to  reach  the  truth  in  many  difficult 
cases.  15.  An  honest  man  will  make  no  rash  promises,  nor  fail  to 
keep  one  if  he  makes  it. 

EXERCISE  XLI. 

The  Halving  Principle.  —  See  paragraphs  158  to  164. 

Par.  159.  —  Fit,  aft,  east,  sheet,  hushed,  caught,  act,  heaped,  packet, 
merit,  tippet,  turret,  eject,'  enact,  adopt,  hesitate,  fatal,  esteem,  active, 
depict,  fortune,  petrify,  plucked,  enriched,  vanished. 

Ebbed,  deed,  goad,  bead,  joyed,  avoid,  bathed,  vivid,  tugged,  rigid, 
unaided,  jogged,  caged,  wisdom,  turbid,  candid,  scathed,  judicious, 
abduct,  provide,  dragged,  avidity,  argued,  elbowed. 

Par.  161.  —  Let,  art,  mat,  knit,  omit,  pilot,  helmet,  alert,  twilight, 
bullet,  hermit,  walnut,  remote,  unhurt,  quilt,  ignite,  metal,  oratory, 
native,  antic,  eminent,  cutlet,  ejaculate,  return,  climate. 

Led,  aimed,  oiled,  aired,  yard,  hand,  award,  pared,  behold,  field, 
veiled,  timid,  attired,  assailed,  index,  scold,  soundly,  framed,  en- 
deavor, twirled,  shared,  pallid,  indigo,  astound. 


152  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Write  in  full:  Weighed,  winged,  unweighed,  hanged,  whanged, 
imbued,  honey-tongued. 

Par.  162. — Hooked,  hurt,  halt,  hemmed,  herd,  humid,  hardness. 

Par.  163. — Spot,  sift,  ceased,  satiate,  scout,  smite,  sonnet,  sold, 
swiftly,  biscuit,  phosphate,  dissipate,  lacerate,  insatiate,  except,  be- 
sieged, peasant,  desert,  desolate,  result,  resound,  absurd,  officered, 
jostled,  insert. 

Shouts,  coats,  wickets,  pockets,  edicts,  garrets,  lofts,  agitates, 
benefits,  carpets,  units,  pellets,  magnets,  buds,  intents,  snorts, 
penants,  lads,  viands,  enfolds,  buzzards,  spouts,  summits,  resorts, 
chestnuts. 

Steeped,  stuffed,  stitched,  stalked,  stubbed,  stilt,  start,  steamed, 
midst. 

Par.  164. — Plate,  prate,  split,  flute,  clot,  fright,  effort,  trait,  threat, 
crate,  penult,  replete,  patriot,  autocrat,  flatly,  freightage,  sprout, 
straight,  secrete,  floatage,  recruit,  couplet,  flotilla. 

Blade,  broad,  dread,  grade,  upbraid,  inbred,  breadth,  gladly,  idled, 
hammered,  agreed,  bubbled,  leveled,  wavered,  Arnold,  Madrid, 
nibbled,  juggled,  shoveled,  bannered,  figured,  summered,  degrade, 
injured,  sobered. 

Quote,  twit,  quit,  acquit,  adequate,  requite,  squat,  banquet,  lan- 
guid, adequately,  requital,  antiquate,  equitable,  equitably,  aquatical, 
adequateness. 

The  following  words  are  written  with  halved  double  consonants 
intervocalized  :  Beard,  build,  bird,  averred,  chart,  gold,  courtly,  sport, 
cathartic,  partner. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Abashed,  accetify,  actively,  acute,  adoptive, 
afoot,  approached,  apricot,  apt,  aqueduct,  ascertain,  attract,  auster- 
ity, baked,  barefoot,  befitting,  bethought,  capital,  captive,  category, 
catnip,  clipped,  cogitate,  cottage,  cutlery,  delicate,  dipped,  earthed, 
elective,  enwrapped,  epileptic,  epitomize,  equipped,  eradicate,  eti- 
quette, fatally,  fate,  fetlock,  flushed,  freshet,  gnashed,  hitched,  hood- 
winked, hopped,  hospital,  iced,  imitator,  infatuate,  initiatory,  latched, 
lavished,  looped,  mimicked,  mocked,  muriate,  nourished,  novitiate, 
octillion,  October,  officiate,  operative,  optical,  ostrich,  palpitate, 
pirate,  pitfall,  Potomac,  pottery,  rectify,  shut,  sketched,  suppurate, 
surfeit,  taught,  thwacked,  tomahawked,  touched,  tripped,  unyoked, 
upshot,  whacked,  wished. 

Adjudicated,  aided,  alleged,  arranged,  assuaged,  avenged,  avowed, 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  1 53 


bedewed,  bequeathed,  bodied,  breathed,  brigade,  damaged,  deluged, 
died,  dodged,  eased,  emerged,  endued,  enraged,  enslaved,  envied, 
evading,  fatigued,  fervid,  forbid,  frigid,  gibed,  graduate,  jawed,  ju- 
dicial, livid,  managed,  morbid,  mouthed,  moved,  nerved,  obduracy, 
obeyed,  obliged,  overjoyed,  pervade,  pillaged,  plagued,  ranged,  rem- 
edied, reviewed,  robbed,  shadowed,  sheaved,  shelved,  shrived, 
smoothed,  sordid,  subdued,  surveyed,  tagged,  turbidly,  twinged, 
unargued,  vowed,  wagged,  wedged,  wreathed. 

Abhorrent,  acclimate,  aconite,  advent,  affiliate,  antedate,  Antioch, 
antiquary,  antler,  appellate,  aromatic,  arterial,  artful,  artillery,  as- 
sault, assimilate,  asthmatic,  belittle,  bergamot,  Charlotte,  cocoanut, 
collate,  daylight,  dilatory,  efficient,  effluent,  elate,  emulate,  entity, 
gamut,  gently,  granite,  humilate,  idiomatic,  infinite,  intense,  intimate, 
involute,  Israelite,  lateness,  lighthouse,  linnet,  litany,  lottery,  lunatic, 
maturely,  metaphor,  meteoric,  mignonette,  motley,  mutable,  mute, 
nativity,  naught,  nautical,  nettle,  nightshade,  notably,  notebook, 
oblate,  oratorio,  oriental,  ornately,  parentage,  permeate,  polite,  pol- 
lute, pullet,  remotely,  spoliate,  support,  ultimate,  vacant,  vintage. 

Afield,  alarmed,  allude,  allured,  annealed,  apalled,  assumed,  availed, 
becalmed,  bewailed,  blamed,  blurred,  cajoled,  cashiered,  charred, 
colonade,  crawled,  devoured,  drawled,  eastward,  endless,  erred,  evi- 
dent, fathomed,  fattened,  felled,  froward,  gnarled,  hardened,  hold, 
Indian,  indict,  indicate,  intend,  laudably,  medallion,  meddler,  media- 
tor, medical,  medicate,  medley,  mermaid,  minuend,  mode,  modicum, 
modify,  ordeal,  ordinary,  overheard,  owned,  pinioned,  poured,  pre- 
sumed, quailed,  redeem,  repealed,  skimmed,  spared,  steward,  teamed, 
termed,  thrilled,  thumbed,  tolled,  toughened,  towered,  unappalled, 
unequalled,  upheld,  valid,  vineyard,  whelmed,  whirled,  yelled. 

Hacked,  haltingly,  heard,  heart,  heartless,  hilt,  hired,  Holt,  horde, 
hugged,  hurd,  hurtful,  hurtfully,  hurtless,  unheard,  exhumed. 

Absent,  absolute,  accent,  assassinate,  bisect,  buzzard,  castled, 
cemetery,  chastened,  deceived,  decimate,  desired,  dispite,  disavowed, 
disobeyed,  disowned,  dissect,  dissolute,  disunite,  disused,  excelled, 
excitate,  execute,  exult,  fascinate,  fastened,  gaslight,  gasped,  hast- 
ened, insect,  lessened,  lizard,  macerate,  misdeed,  misguide,  obsolete, 
occiput,  pleasant,  poisoned,  psaltery,  puzzled,  rasped,  reasoned,  re- 
ceived, recent,  resolute,  resumed,  risked,  rosebud,  sapped,  scent, 
seared,  sect,  seethed,  seized,  skate,  skittish,  sleet,  sobbed,  softly, 
somewhat,  soured,  spite,  spittle,  summed,  switched,  testate,  tusked, 
unsent,  unsold,  unsound,  worsted  («),  wainscot. 

Abides,  annotates,  aspects,  associates,  ballots,  baronets,  baskets, 
bids,  buckets,  colonades,  comets,  corrupts,  cuts,  dedicates,  deputes, 
descends,  despots,  dictates,  directs,  disunites,  emeralds,  enumerates, 
epaulets,  epithets,  evades,  exacts,  hearts,  hordes,  hornets,  housemaids, 
Huguenots,  inducts,  inoculates,  inserts,  intends,  latchets,  leads, 
mates,  modes,  notes,  officiates,  omelets,  oscillates,  parapets,  pats, 


154  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


pheasants,  plummets,  populates,  ports,  prophets,  pulpits,  refutes, 
restates,  retards,  rivulets,  scouts,  shots,  sonnets,  swords,  tanyards, 
tenants,  thefts,  tilts,  tracts,  vegetates. 

Amidst,  staked,  stabbed,  staved,  stalled,  stared,  starred,  stacked, 
stepped,  stemmed,  steeled,  steered,  stilled,  stirred,  stopped,  stooped, 
stocked,  stored,  styled. 

Affright,  chaplet,  elect,  clout,  Crete,  crout,  Detroit,  entreat,  flat, 
flatten,  flatfish,  fleet,  fleeting,  fleetly,  flight,  flit,  flitting,  float,  float- 
ing, flout,  fluting,  fraught,  freight,  fret,  fruit,  fruitage,  hypocrite, 
plat,  plate,  plight,  plot,  Pratt,  secret,  split,  sprat,  sprite,  street,  strut, 
throat,  treat,  trite,  trot,  trout. 

Abjured,  abroad,  addled,  angled,  augured,  babbled,  beggared, 
beveled,  bled,  bleed,  Bradley,  braid,  braved,  breed,  Bridewell,  broad, 
broadly,  coddled,  cudgeled,  cupboard,  Donald,  doubled,  dried,  en- 
abled, enamored,  fabled,  favored,  feathered,  fiddled,  gathered,  glued, 
gobbled,  haggard,  haggled,  half-blood,  half-breed,  harbored,  hobbled, 
home-bred,  honored,  hovered,  Hubbard,  humbled,  humored,  hundred, 
hybrid,  ill-bred,  imbrued,  joggled,  labored,  libeled,  low-bred,  meas- 
ured, niggard,  peddled,  powdered,  quivered,  rumored,  severed, 
shivered,  sidled,  simmered,  sobered,  swaggered,  tethered,  unbraid, 
undried,  unhonored,  waddled,  wagered,  warbled,  well-bred,  wheedled, 
wiggled,  wriggled. 

Bald,  bard,  beardless,  begird,  board,  bold,  cart,  cartage,  cortege, 
court,  courthouse,  gird,  guard,  guardless,  ignored,  inert,  overboard, 
rebuild,  regard,  short. 

EXERCISE  XLII. 

The  Halving  Principle.  —  Concluded.  —  See  paragraphs  165 
to  171. 

Par.  165. — Paint,  haunt,  faint,  vaunt,  mount,  lint,  arrant,  count, 
latent,  fountain,  patent,  blunt,  occupant,  augment,  scant,  unbent, 
invent,  ardent,  reappoint,  obedient,  opulent,  authentic,  adamant,  an- 
cient (shay),  element,  reverent. 

Hound,  opened,  fiend,  amend,  twined,  assigned,  loaned,  bondage, 
vender,  random,  candor,  surround,  rejoined,  second,  brained,  cleaned, 
aground,  appendage,  turned,  buttoned,  japanned,  unearned,  laundry, 
imagined,  Ireland,  reverend  (thicken  the  n-/wok.) 

Yawned,  impugned,  ambient. 

Faints,  events,  vaunts,  chintz,  mends,  amends,  plants,  attends, 
lowlands. 

Tuft,  hoofed,  rift,  chafed,  coughed,  cleft,  handcuffed,  graft. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    1'HONOGRAPHY.  155 

Paved,  heaved,  raved,  achieved,  derived,  curved,  served,  approved, 
aggrieved,  retrieved. 

Hefts,  hafts,  rifts,  rafts,  gifts,  clefts,  crafts,  grafts,  tufts. 

Fashioned,  passioned,  impassioned,  motioned,  auctioned,  cautioned, 
occasioned,  cushioned. 

Par.  166. — Wilt,  welt,  wart,  want,  wont,  wallet,  thwart,  athwart, 
wanting,  waltz,  swart,  thwarting. 

Willed,  walled,  weaned,  weird,  waned,  wayward,  reward,  unwind, 
wilds,  swelled,  sward,  wildfowl,  windpipe,  windlass,  whirlwind,  up- 
ward, backwardly,  winding-sheet. 

Par.  167. — Marred,  admired,  matured,  glared,  moored,  answered, 
exert,  article,  separate,  venerate,  iterate,  mart. 

Writ,  wrought,  write,  rot,  rate,  rote,  rut,  rat,  root,  rout,  aright,  riot. 

Par.  168. — Card,  feared,  lured,  warmed,  acquired,  unfeared,  shield, 
midnight,  slurred,  flowered,  maidenly,  apprehend. 

Par.  169. — Finest,  roughest,  briefest,  gravest,  gruffest,  oftenest, 
vainest. 

Par.  170  a. — Baited,  habited,  jotted,  quieted,  seated,  obviated, 
berated,  effected,  attenuated,  defeated,  located,  denoted,  related,  in- 
vited, actuated,  elicited,  blotted,  delegated,  decocted,  far-sighted, 
righted,  rooted,  gray-headed,  created,  coquetted. 

Weeded,  headed,  padded,  faded,  sided,  paraded,  divided,  dissuaded, 
exceeded,  applauded,  threaded,  shrouded,  proceeded,  undecided,  cor- 
roded, pleaded. 

Par.  170  b. — Plied,  flowed,  clawed,  prayed,  offered,  treed,  crowed, 
chattered,  pickled,  bottled,  buckled,  employed,  tackled,  replied,  nib- 
bled, shuffled,  papered,  betrayed,  tapered,  tattered,  decreed,  recurred, 
untried,  colored,  suffered. 

Par.  170^-. — Piped,  waved,  mapped,  leaked,  leagued,  kicked, 
quaked,  judged,  gagged,  charged,  slaked,  roared,  deified,  caulked. 

Par.  170  d. — Radiated,  waited,  awaited,  whetted,  audited,  dotted, 
dieted,  doted,  edited,  dated,  undated,  unedited,  situated,  instituted, 
repudiated,  inundated. 

Par.  170  e. — Paid,  tied,  thawed,  showed,  cawed,  laid,  gnawed, 
wallowed,  alloyed,  wearied,  hurried,  annoyed,  echoed,  pitied,  emp- 
tied, renewed,  copied,  borrowed,  mellowed,  rallied,  queried,  unoc- 
cupied, bestowed,  canopied. 


156  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

But  verbs  ending  in  -fy  may  form  the  past  tense  by  halving  the  f: 
Horrified,  vilified,  typified,  terrified,  qualified,  beautified,  pacified, 
mortified. 

Par.  170 f. — Acted,  petted,  budded,  footed,  matted,  wilted,  halted, 
warded,  wanted,  haunted,  wounded,  cheated,  quoted,  pelted,  operated, 
founded,  melted,  ticketed,  repeated,  landed,  sifted,  counted,  courted, 
plotted,  assented. 

Par.  170  £•. — Treated,  deeded,  lauded,  awarded,  folded,  darted, 
anointed,  imitated,  agitated,  unlighted,  unaffrighted,  gifted,  irritated, 
annotated,  unshielded. 

Par.  171. — Rapid,  wicked,  method,  afraid,  hatred,  infidel,  include, 
orchard,  freedom,  cold,  record,  multitude,  leopard,  pedagogue,  kid- 
nap, longitude,  intrepid. 

Corvette,  doubt,  vote,  budget,  beautify,  detach,  litigate,  private, 
credit,  emigrate,  generate,  covert,  gratify,  candidate,  vertex,  built, 
mortal,  invert,  guiltless,  vertical,  inhabit,  anecdote,  brought. 

When  the  present  tense  of  a  verb  ends-  with  loop-sf,  the  past  tense 
ends  in  circle-.?  and  a  half-length  t :  Hoisted,  wasted,  posted,  feasted, 
vested,  twisted,  attested,  assisted,  arrested,  accosted,  breasted,  trusted, 
enlisted,  digested,  requested. 

In  the  following  past  tenses  the  halving  principle  is  not  employed, 
but  the  stroke-*/  follows  lay :  Healed,  hailed,  whistled,  raffled,  riv- 
aled, embezzled,  hurled. 

•  In  the  following  past  tenses  the  stroke-*/  follows  ;•/;  Reeled,  roiled, 
railed,  ruled,  rolled,  enrolled,  unrolled. 

When  a  word  ends  with  t  or  d  preceded  by  two  vowels  one  of  which 
is  accented,  use  the  stroke :  Create,  fiat,  duad,  poet,  Croat. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Adherent,  affront,  ailment,  amount,  anoint, 
appellant,  appoint,  arrogant,  assailant,  ascent,  attaint,  attentive, 
avaunt,  banter,  bent,  brunt,  burned,  cant,  cantata,  canter,  chant, 
countess,  current,  dent,  eloquent,  emollient,  enchant,  errant,  event, 
fiendish,  finder,  flaunt,  foment,  gaunt,  grant,  hint,  hunter,  hydrant, 
identify,  infant,  jaunt,  Kentucky,  lenient,  meant,  mountain,  pageant, 
painter,  parent,  payment,  pent,  phantom,  pint,  pliant,  pointer,  pon- 
der, potent,  print,  quaint,  quantity,  quantum,  recount,  remount,  rental, 
repent,  runt,  sequent,  silent,  stint,  talent,  taunt,  tint,  torrent,  urgent, 
violent,  warrant. 

Abound,  adorned,  append,  around,  ascend,  atoned,  attained,  band- 
age, bandit,  binder,  bond,  boned,  candle,  chained,  churned,  coined, 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  157 


crowned,  demand,  diamond,  dinned,  drained,  enjoined,  entwined, 
errand,  fanned,  feigned,  found,  gleaned,  groaned,  happened,  har- 
pooned, hidebound,  hind,  Holland,  horned,  Iceland,  inland,  ironed, 
island,  jocund,  kindle,  land,  legend,  maligned,  mender,  moaned, 
obtained,  offend,  oppugned,  ordained,  pained,  pawned,  pined,  planned, 
Poland,  quandary,  redound,  refund,  remind,  roundly,  shunned,  spend, 
stained,  summoned,  thickened,  thinned,  tinned,  unbend,  unopened, 
vend,  warned,  whitened,  widened,  woodland,  yearned. 

Acquaints,  binds,  blends,  daunts,  finds,  fonts,  friends,  grinds, 
hunts,  joints,  lends,  mends,  mints,  moments,  mounds,  offends,  points, 
pounds,  raiments,  rents,  rinds,  slants,  stands,  stunts,  tyrants,  vents. 

Abaft,  bereft,  chaffed,  craft,  cuffed,  dwarfed,  gift,  haft,  heft,  huffed, 
puffed,  quaffed,  raft,  rebuffed,  reefed,  reft,  rift,  roofed,  scoffed. 

Achieved,  behaved,  behooved,  bereaved,  braved,  carved,  caved, 
craved,  graved,  grieved,  grooved,  gyved,  hived,  proved,  reprieved, 
reproved,  roved,  unapproved,  unpaved,  upheaved. 

Awkward,  backward,  hillward,  homeward,  inwardly,  leeward, 
outward,  outwardly,  rearward,  rewarding,  southward,  thwartingly, 
unwinding,  wailed,  wand,  ward,  warding,  waywardly,  weld,  wend, 
Wentworth,  wheeled,  whined,  wield,  wiled,  wind,  wind  (v),  windfall, 
winding,  windward,  wired,  wooled,  wound,  wounding. 

Artifice,  aspirate,  aspired,  assort,  chariot,  chlorate,  claret,  debarred, 
demerit,  demurred,  embowered,  eviscerate,  exhort,  gored,  mired, 
moored,  pirate,  quart,  retort,  saturate,  smart,  smeared,  ulcerate,  un- 
admired,  unanswered,  unmoored. 

Cleared,  cord,  curd,  cured,  declared,  dockyard,  fired,  floored, 
inquired,  leered,  lowered,  madden,  maiden,  maidenhood,  required, 
scared,  scarred,  scoured,  secured,  sheet-lead,  squared,  swarmed,  un- 
acquired,  unwarmed,  wormed. 

Abated,  abetted,  abnegated,  abominated,  affected,  affectedly,  alien- 
ated, alleviated,  animated,  batted,  bayoneted,  besotted,  bigoted,  bit- 
ted, bloated,  bonneted,  booted,  bruited,  cited,  closeted,  coacted, 
coveted,  debated,  debited,  derogated,  detonated,  devoted,  dominated, 
effeminated,  elevated,  eliminated,  evacuated,  excited,  fumigated, 
gazetted,  gibbeted,  glutted,  grated,  greeted,  incited,  inhabited,  inno- 
vated, jutted,  litigated,  mediated,  narrated,  quick-witted,  rabbeted, 
rated,  rebated,  rebutted,  receipted,  recited,  rioted,  riveted,  rotted, 
routed,  sated,  sighted,  suited,  sweated,  targeted,  unabated,  unabetted, 
unexcited,  unquieted,  unsated,  unseated,  unsuited,  variegated. 

Added,  beheaded,  ceded,  coincided,  crowded,  decided,  decidedly, 
derided,  dividedly,  embedded,  flooded,  hooded,  light-headed,  many- 
headed,  persuaded,  preceded,  raided,  receded,  shrouded,  spaded, 
speeded,  thick-headed,  unfaded,  unheeded,  unweeded,  weak-headed, 
widowed,  wrong-headed. 

Accoutered,  applied,  baffled,  battered,  beetled,  butchered,  but- 
tered, checkered,  chuckled,  ciphered,  collared,  coupled,  cried, 


158  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


dappled,  decried,  defrayed,  deployed,  deterred,  enameled,  flayed, 
freed,  fried,  implied,  incurred,  insured,  kenneled,  knuckled,  muffled, 
paneled,  pattered,  peopled,  peppered,  played,  ploughed,  preyed, 
rippled,  shackled,  settled,  sickled,  soldered,  strayed,  succored,  suck- 
led, supplied,  tickled,  tippled,  titled,  tittered,  toppled,  tottered, 
tunneled,  tutored,  twittered,  unapplied,  uncheckered,  unoffered,  un- 
shipped, ushered,  uttered,  victualed,  wafered,  whiskered,  whispered, 
whittled. 

Abhorred,  bilked,  bobbed,  caked,  churched,  cocked,  cooked, 
lagged,  legged,  licked,  liked,  locked,  logged,  looked,  lugged,  mobbed, 
moped,  mopped,  peeped,  piped,  popped,  reared,  uncharged,  un- 
churched, waved. 

Allayed,  allied,  arrayed,  balconied,  barbecued,  belied,  bullied, 
buried,  burrowed,  canopied,  carried,  chewed,  cooed,  cowed,  curried, 
dallied,  deep-laid,  dirtied,  disallowed,  disarrayed,  dismayed,  espied, 
ferried,  furrowed,  gullied,  hackneyed,  hallooed,  harried,  hollowed, 
honeyed,  issued,  jockeyed,  keyed,  lied,  married,  narrowed,  neighed, 
occupied,  parried,  pawed,  pied,  pillowed,  quarried,  repaid,  rescued, 
shied,  shoed,  spewed,  tallied,  tarried,  tattooed,  thick-laid,  tied,  tongue- 
tied,  toyed,  unallayed,  unallied,  unallowed,  unalloyed,  unannoyed, 
unarrayed,  undecayed,  undismayed,  unespied,  unhackneyed,  un- 
hallowed, unpitied,  unthawed,  untied,  varied,  waylaid,  winnowed, 
worried. 

Acetified,  classified,  crucified,  fortified,  liquified,  modified,  molli- 
fied, notified,  purified,  rarified,  ratified,  rectified,  tumified,  unpacified, 
unpurified,  unqualified,  verified. 

Abounded,  acquitted,  addicted,  admitted,  adopted,  affiliated,  allot- 
ted, amended,  appended,  ascended,  associated,  assorted,  balloted, 
bearded,  boarded,  boded,  bolted,  brooded,  chatted,  clotted,  collated, 
delineated,  diluted,  elected,  emaciated,  enacted,  ended,  fitted,  floated, 
glided,  goaded,  guarded,  hazarded,  heated,  hinted,  humiliated,  igni- 
ted, initiated,  invaded,  jaded,  jolted,  knighted,  lifted,  lighted,  mer- 
ited, noted,  nodded,  offended,  omitted,  ousted,  palliated,  patted, 
piloted,  pocketed,  populated,  pounded,  quilted,  refuted,  retaliated, 
saluted,  shifted,  shouted,  skated,  slighted,  sounded,  spotted,  tainted, 
thwarted,  turreted,  unitedly,  violated,  wafted,  warranted,  wielded. 

Afforded,  carded,  cogitated,  corded,  diluted,  dictated,  elided,  en- 
filaded, enfolded,  escaladed,  estated,  forded,  heralded,  herded, 
hoarded,  laded,  leaded,  loaded,  molded,  open-hearted,  remolded, 
retreated,  sorted,  twitted,  unfolded,  unhoarded,  unloaded,  unyielded, 
weak-hearted,  yielded. 

Alfred,  beatitude,  codify,  desuetude,  dotard,  epidemic,  escapade, 
federal,  fortitude,  inaptitude,  inifinitude,  inquietude,  jeopard,  lassi- 
tude, latitude,  methodical,  methodically,  prodigious,  prodigy,  quiet- 
ude, rapidity,  rectitude,  seclude,  solitude,  torpidity,  trade,  turpitude, 
wickedness. 


THE  MANUAL  OK  PHONOGRAPHY.  159 


Abrogate,  accredit,  adulterate,  affidavit,  aggravate,  Albert,  alpha- 
betic, attribute,  avert,  beautifier,  beautiful,  beautifully,  beautifying, 
Bridget,  brutish,  curvate,  curvet,  debate,  debit,  detached,  doublet, 
doubtable,  doubtful,  doubtfully,  editorial,  editorially,  Egbert,  ener- 
getic, evitable,  exhibit,  geodetic,  girt,  habit,  habitable,  Herbert, 
hereditary,  imbrute,  incubate,  inertly,  inundate,  invite,  itinerate, 
Jacobite,  legitimacy,  legitimate,  migrate,  misdoubt,  mortality,  mor- 
talize,  mortally,  myrtle,  overt,  overtly,  rebuilt,  redoubtable,  reno- 
vate, repudiate,  Robert,  vegetable,  verbatim,  vertically,  vertigo, 
vortex. 

Ballasted,  basted,  blasted,  boasted,  bursted,  coasted,  detested, 
dusted,  entwisted,  fasted,  foisted,  harvested,  hasted,  infested,  in- 
vested, jested,  molested,  pasted,  posted,  rested,  rusted,  tasted,  tested, 
thirsted,  toasted,  unattested,  untasted,  untwisted,  unvisited,  vis- 
ited. 

Hauled,  hilled,  howled,  hulled,  hustled,  inhaled,  muzzled,  ravelled, 
revelled,  rifled,  ruffled,  unmuzzled. 


EXERCISE  XLIII. 

Half-length  Grammalogues. 

Page  80. — For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corre- 
sponding logogram,  filling  a  line  with  each :  Did,  could,  got,  get, 
good,  after,  thought,  without,  that,  let,  lord,  read,  word,  might, 
made,  immediate,  immediately,  nature,  not,  under. 

I.  A  rose  without  a  thorn  is  a  thing  not  found  in  nature.  2.  Let 
us  dare  to  do  our  duty  as  we  understand  it.  3.  Gain  not  base  gains; 
they  are  the  same  as  losses.  4.  A  word  spoken  in  due  season,  how 
good  it  is.  5.  He  that  makes  haste  to  be  rich  shall  not  be  innocent. 
6.  Even  a  fool  if  he  hold  his  peace  is  thought  wise.  7.  When  a  man 
gets  rich  by  some  new  trick  others  immediately  try  to  do  likewise. 
8.  In  striving  after  a  remote  possession  men  often  lose  the  chance  of 
immediate  gain.  9.  A  wise  man  will  desire  no  more  than  may  be  got 
with  honesty.  10.  If  all  men  did  right,  lawyers,  doctors  and  preach- 
ers might  starve.  II.  We  might  all  be  far  happier  could  we  but 
learn  to  wait  in  patience.  12.  It  is  as  hard  to  do  business  without 
money  as  it  is  to  see  without  eyes.  13.  That  man  alone  is  free  who 
is  lord  of  his  own  desires.  14.  While  we  read  we  should  think ; 
when  we  act  we  should  have  thought.  15.  He  who  has  made  an 
enemy  has  done  a  sad  day's  work. 


160  THE  MANUAL  OK  PHONOGRAPHY. 

EXERCISE  XLIV. 

Half-length  Grammalogues. — Concluded. 

Page  82. — For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corre- 
sponding logogram,  filling  a  line  with  each:  Particular,  particularly, 
part,  spirit,  behind,  told,  toward,  child,  gentleman,  gentlemen,  called, 
cared,  accord,  according,  accordingly,  quite,  account,  cannot,  great, 
world,  seemed,  mind,  went. 

i.  We  are  told  that  an  ounce  of  wit  that  is  bought  is  worth  a  pound 
that  is  taught.  2.  A  true  gentleman  will  act  from  principle  and  will 
not  fear  what  the  world  says.  3.  They  who  care  not  what  the  world 
thinks  are  quite  likely  to  be  misunderstood.  4.  It  is  not  enough  to 
have  great  talents ;  we  should  also  be  able  to  turn  them  to  account. 
5.  Train  up  a  child  in  the  way  he  should  go  and  when  he  is  old  he 
will  not  depart  from  it.  6.  Those  who  have  suffered  most  should 
feel  most  pity  toward  others.  7.  Judge  not  according  to  appearances; 
the  spirit  we  cannot  see  with  our  eyes.  8.  The  great  spirits  of  this 
world  leave  a  great  name  behind  them.  9.  We  cannot  judge  the 
whole  nature  of  a  man  from  any  particular  act.  10.  A  healthy  mind 
and  a  free  spirit  cannot  abide  in  an  unclean  body.  II.  They  cannot 
be  called  gentlemen  who  have  never  cared  for  the  feelings  of  others. 
12.  Plenty  of  exercise  and  sleep  are  important  to  health,  particularly 
in  youth.  13.  When  the  cat  went  away,  the  mice  lived  in  the  pantry. 
14.  Play  your  part  with  such  ability  as  you  possess  and  you  shall  have 
your  reward  accordingly.  15.  They  live  ill  at  ease  who  live  not  in 
accord  with  the  spirit  of  their  own  times. 

EXERCISE  XLV. 

Words  from  which  Consonants  are  Omitted. — See  paragraph  174. 

Par.  I74«. — Tempt,  damped,  thumped,  camped,  swamped,  trumped, 
exemption,  prompt,  assumption,  glimpse,  encamped. 

Par.  174  <$. — Anxious,  distinction,  function,  sanctity,  injunction, 
instinctive,  punctuate. 

Par.  174  c, — Postmark,  postdate,  post-paid,  postman,  post-office, 
postscript,  postpone,  postponed,  postfix,  postdiluvial,  pasteboard, 
waistcoat. 

Par.  174. — Note. — Transpose,  transplant,  transpire,  transport,  trans- 
parent, transfuse,  transfer,  transform,  transfix,  transfigure,  transmit, 


THE  MANUAL  OK  PHONOGRAPHY.  l6l 


transitive,  translate,  transcend,  transact,   transcript,  transcribe,  trans- 
gress, transverse,  transpierce,  translucent,  transmigrate,  transitory. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Assumpsit,  attempt,  attempted,  bethumped, 
champed,  clamped,  cramped,  crimped,  decamped,  exempt,  jumped, 
lumped,  pumped,  stamped,  stumped,  sumptuous,  symptom,  tempted, 
tramped,  unattempted,  untempted. 

Adjunctive,  anxiety,  disjunction,  disjunctive,  distinctive,  extinction, 
injunction,  junction,  punctuated,  sanction,  subjunctive,  unction. 

Transacted,  transaction,  transactor,  transalpine,  transatlantic,  trans- 
cendency, transcendent,  transcendental,  transcendentalism,  trans- 
cendently,  transcriber,  transcription,  transferable,  transferred,  trans- 
ferrence,  transfiguration,  transfixed,  transfixing,  transformation, 
transformed,  transfusible,  transfusing,  transfusion,  transgressed, 
transgressing,  transgressional,  transgress! ve,  transgressor,  transitive- 
ness,  transitorily,  transitoriness,  translatable,  translated,  translation, 
translator,  translucency,  translucid,  transmigrant,  transmigration, 
transmigratory,  transmissible,  transmission,  transmissive,  trans- 
mittable,  transmitted,  transmutation,  transmute,  transparency,  trans- 
parently, transpierced,  transpired,  transplanted,  transplanter,  trans- 
portable, transportation,  transporter,  transposal,  transposition,  trans- 
ubstantiate, transubstantiation,  transversely,  Transylvania. 

EXERCISE  XLVI. 

Double-length  Strokes. — See  paragraphs  175  to  182. 

Par.  175. — Water,  meter,  thermometer,  trumpeter,  rafter,  lifter, 
fighter,  waiter,  loiter,  inviter,  swelter,  dissenter,  winter,  voter,  de- 
serter, minister,  shatter,  remitter,  alter,  lateral,  porter,  flutter,  fritter, 
smaller,  diameler. 

Fodder,  shudder,  seceder,  alder,  wander,  gender,  tender,  tinder, 
hoarder,  warder,  order,  defrauder,  deluder,  ardor,  hinder,  cylinder, 
freeholder,  oleander,  bewilder. 

Par.  176. — Weather,  father,  grandfather,  godfather,  forefather, 
lather,  whether,  nether,  thither,  whither,  lither,  wither,  mother, 
grandmother,  godmother,  smother. 

Par.  177. — Anker,  hanker,  thinker,  franker,  rancor,  drunker. 

Anger,  finger,  linger,  conger,  monger,  younger,  longer,  stronger. 

Par.  178. — Scamper,  damper,  hamper,  pamper,  tamper,  stamper, 
temper,  distemper,  simper,  bumper,  thumper,  jumper. 

Amber,  chamber,  bed-chamber,  presence-chamber,  limber,  clamber, 
timber,  umber,  cumber,  encumber,  cucumber,  lumber. 


l62  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Par.  181. — Material,  materially,  entirely,  entire,  materiality,  ma- 
terialize. 

Farther,  further,  murder,  larder. 

Par.  182. — Modern,  eastern,  astern,  modernize,  northern,  subaltern, 
intern,  slattern. 

Past  tenses  of  verbs  whose  present  forms  end  with  double-lengths 
are  generally  written  with  half-length  double  consonants :  Watered, 
loitered,  faltered,  sweltered,  muttered,  ordered,  weathered,  smoth- 
ered, scampered,  simpered,  murdered,  furthered. 

After  double-length  n,  ng  and  sh,  however,  past  tenses  are  formed 
by  adding  the  stroke-^/ to  the  form  of  the  present:  Entered,  wintered, 
anchored,  fingered,  shattered,  shuddered,  engendered. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Aerometer,  barometer,  bolter,  chronometer, 
colter,  deadwater,  enter,  falter,  fetter,  filter,  fitter,  halter,  hexameter, 
knitter,  laterally,  latterly,  laughter,  lighter,  literal,  literally,  literati, 
litter,  liturgy,  micrometer,  midwinter,  mutter,  neuter,  niter,  obliterate, 
palter,  philter,  polluter,  prompter,  Psalter,  reenter,  salter,  saunter, 
shifter,  shutter,  simitar,  slater,  slaughter,  smelter,  smiter,  sumpter, 
supporter,  tempter,  transmuter,  unfetter,  vaulter,  waterlogged,  welter. 

Asunder,  attainder,  backslider,  boulder,  cinder,  coriander,  defender, 
disorder,  elder,  Endor,  engender,  hazarder,  holder,  householder,  in- 
vader, joinder,  ladder,  madder,  molder,  nadir,  orderly,  provender, 
provider,  rejoinder,  render,  retarder,  sender,  smokier,  sunder,  sur- 
render, tender,  thunder,  upholder,  wilder,  winder,  wonder,  yonder. 

Anchor,  canker,  danker,  drinker,  flanker,  lanker,  ranker,  sinker, 
tinker,  winker,  younker. 

Altered,  bewildered,  chambered,  cumbered,  disordered,  distemp- 
ered, fathered,  fettered,  filtered,  fluttered,  hampered,  lathered,  lit- 
tered, lumbered,  moldered,  mothered,  paltered,  pampered,  slaught- 
ered, smoldered,  tampered,  timbered,  unfettered,  wildered,  withered. 

Angered,  cankered,  hankered,  hindered,  lingered,  reentered,  ren- 
dered, sauntered,  surrendered,  tendered,  thundered,  tinkered,  wan- 
dered, wondered. 

EXERCISE  XLVII. 

Double-length  Grammalogues. 

Page  86. — For  each  of  the  following  grammalogues  write  the  corre- 
sponding logogram,  filling  a  line  with  each  :  Neither,  another,  letter, 
matter. 

I.  This  world  is  nothing  except  as  it  tends  to  another.  2.  To  a 
good  speaker  the  matter  is  of  more  importance  than  the  manner. 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  163 

3.  That  which  you  sow  to-day  you  will  at  some  future  time  reap. 

4.  One  man  may  bring  a  horse  to  water  but  a  hundred  cannot  make 
him  drink.     5.  What  one  day  gives  us  another  may  take  away  from 
us.     6.   Let  all  things  be  done  decently  and  in  order.     7.  If  thine 
enemy  hunger  feed  him ;  if  he  thirst  give  him  to  drink.     8.  Render 
unto  Caesar  the  things  that  are  Caesar's.     9.  When  it  is  evening  we 
say  it  will  be  fair  weather  if  the  sky  is  red.      IO.   Be  not  ignorant  of 
anything  in  a  great  matter  or  a  small.     1 1 .  Many  waters  cannot  quench 
love,  neither  can  the  floods  drown  it.      12.  Cast  thy  bread  upon  the 
waters;  for  thou  shall  find  it  after  many  days.      13.  They  who  are 
perfect  in  the  letter  of  the  law  often  miss  the  spirit.     14.  They  seldom 
succeed  in  anything  who  always  turn  from  one  thing  to  another.      15. 
To  serve  the  public  faithfully  and  at  the  same  time  please  it  entirely 
is  a  thing  not  to  be  done. 

EXERCISE  XLVIII. 

Compounded  Logograms. 

Par.  183. — Use  the  list  of  words  given  in  the  text.  This  list  con- 
tains almost  all  the  useful  English  words  written  according  to  this 
principle. 

EXERCISE  XLIX. 

The  Ticks. — See  paragraphs  184  to  186. 

Par.  185. — Write  the  downward :  After-the,  all-the,  are-the,  as-the 
(write  as  involute),  be-the,  between-the,  come-the,  down-the,  for-the, 
in-the,  like-the,  mind-the,  nor-the,  of-the,  that-the,  to-the,  gives-the, 
whence-the. 

Write  the  upward :  Am-the,  but-the,  can-the,  do-the,  from-the, 
shall-the,  than-the,  seems-the,  just-the. 

Par.  186. — Write  the  tick  downward:  Been-a  (an),  gives-a  (an), 
if-a  (an),  in-a  (an),  knows-a  (an),  mind-a  (an),  nor-a  (an),  says-a  (an), 
shall-a  (an),  thinks-a  (an),  where-a  (an),  yet-a  (an). 

Write  the  tick  to  the  right:  As-a  (an)  (write  as  involute),  at-a  (an), 
can-a  (an),  from-a  (an),  does-a  (an),  just-a  (an),  say-a  (an),  would-a 
(an). 

Write  the  tick  to  the  right :  A-day,  a-first,  a-great,  a-just,  a-life, 
a-part,  a-thought,  a-time,  a-truth,  a-very,  a-work,  a-breath,  a-chance, 


164  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

a-creclit,  a-debt,  a-delight,  a-failure,  a-form,  a-fragment,  a-gradual, 
a-half,  a-jury,  a-limit,  a-province,  a-rail. 

An-addition,  an-affection,  an-appropriation,  an-attempt,  an-authen- 
tic,  an-aversion,  an-elevation,  an-illogical,  an-illustration,  an-oath. 

And-a,  and-after,  and-as,  and-at,  and-every,  and-first,  and-great, 
and-have,  and-he,  and-just,  and-let,  and-other,  and-part,  and-the, 
and-them,  and-truth,  and-with,  and-you,  ancl-your,  and-also,  and-fail, 
and-furnish,  and-generally,  and-relish,  and-warn. 

Dictation  Exercise. — ;Been-the,  by-the,  comes-the,  give-the,  has- 
the,  have-the,  if-the,  is-the,  know-the,  knows-the,  likes-the,  love-the, 
loves-the,  make-the,  makes-the,  not-the,  on-the,  only-the,  seen-the, 
should-the,  take-the,  takes-the,  think-the,  thinks-the,  though-the, 
under-the,  up-the,  upon-the,  were-the,  when-the,  where-the,  with-the, 
without-the,  work-the,  works-the. 

At-the,  had-the,  into-the,  made-the,  may-the,  or-the,  say-the,  says- 
the,  see-the,  sees-the,  so-the,  there-the,  unto-the,  was-the,  what-the, 
which-the,  who-the,  would-the. 

After-a  (an),  between-a  (an),  for-a  (an),  give-a  (an),  have-a  (an), 
know-a  (an),  like-a  (an),  likes-a  (an),  love-a  (an),  loves-a  (an),  make-a 
(an),  makes-a  (an),  not-a  (an),  only-a  (an),  sees-a  (an),  take-a  (an), 
takes-a  (an),  under-a  (an),  upon-a  (an),  were-a  (an),  when-a  (an), 
with-a  (an),  work-a  (an),  works-a  (an). 

But-a  (an),  do-a  (an),  had-a  (an),  has-a  (an),  into-a  (an),  is-a  (an), 
or-a  (an),  see-a  (an),  so-a  (an),  than-a  (an),  there-a  (an),  unto-a  (an), 
was-a  (an),  what-a  (an),  which-a  (an),  who-a  (an). 

A-brief,  a-broad,  a-burden,  a-chamber,  a-court,  a-crime,  a-curse, 
a-daughter,  a-death,  a-defense,  a-delusion,  a-demonstration,  a-depart- 
ment,  a-descent,  a-desire,  a-despot,  a-disadvantage,  a-dispensation, 
a-doubt,  a-duty,  a-family,  a-fantastic,  a-farther,  a-fashion,  a-favor, 
a-feature,  a-few,  a-finish,  a-foundation,  a-frequent,  a-friend,  a-further, 
a-general,  a-gentle,  a-grand,  a-joy,  a-judgment,  a-judicious,  a-lady, 
a-law,  a-letter,  a-light,  a-like,  a-little,  a-luxury,  a-partial,  a-partner, 
a-permit,  a-person,  a-phenomenon,  a-preparation,  a-president,  a-prob- 
lem,  a-procession,  a-proclamation,  a-promise,  a-promotion,  a-railway, 
a-relief,  a-relish,  a-temptation,  a-theory,  a-touch,  a-vacancy,  a-vege- 
table,  a-very,  a-vindication,  a-violent,  a-vision,  a-voice,  a-voter,  a-war, 
a- warehouse,  a- warrant,  a- worthy. 

An-adequate,  an-admission,  an-advantage,  an-advocate,  an-atmos- 
phere,  an-attendance,  an-attraction,  an-available,  an-avocation,  an- 
avoidance,  an-edition,  an-education,  an-efifect,  an-effort,  an-evasion, 
an-event,  an-evidence,  an-evolution,  an-illusion,  an-office. 

And-add,  and-admit,  and-advise,  and-affect,  and-afterwards,  and- 
allow,  and-always,  and-an,  and-appreciate,  and-attempt,  and-attract, 
and-avoid,  and-brief,  and-broad,  and-desire,  and-devise,  and-display, 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  165 

and-do,  and-down,  and-each,  and-effect,  and-evade,  and-evidence, 
and-false,  and-few,  and-find,  and-for,  and-form,  and-from,  and- 
gentlemen,  and-had,  and-half,  and-has,  and-his,  and-if,  and-is,  and-it, 
and-join,  and-judge,  and-life,  and-like,  and-little,  and-often,  and-out, 
and-over,  and-particularly,  and-permission,  and-prepare,  and-proceed, 
and-profit,  and-prove,  and-relate,  and-take,  and-that,  and-there,  and- 
they,  and-think,  and-this,  and-thou,  and-treat,  and-truly,  and-turn, 
and-vain,  and-very,  and-we,  and-were,  and-whatever,  and-where, 
and-which,  and-who,  and-will,  and-without,  and-work,  and-ye, 
and-yet. 

EXERCISE  L. 

Disjoined  Affixes. — See  paragraphs  187  to  189. 

Par.  188  a. — Use  the  stroke-zw^v  Pacifying,  vicing,  thawing,  scath- 
ing, fishing,  lashing,  piling,  puzzling,  annoying,  chastening,  ringing, 
pacing,  reposing,  abusing,  tracing,  dressing,  casing,  chasing,  creasing, 
glazing,  suffusing,  revising,  rousing,  puffing,  yawning. 

Use  the  dol-t'ng:  Essaying,  obeying,  hopping,  eating,  awaiting, 
aiding,  witching,  hedging,  awaking,  hooking,  hugging,  hollowing, 
allaying,  abashing,  moping,  mining,  making,  sharing,  shining,  plow- 
ing, loosing,  arousing,  ranging,  abandoning,  enchanting. 

Par.  188  b. — Etchings,  whippings,  doings,  washings,  icings,  echo- 
ings,  hallooings,  sayings,  emptyings,  meanings,  teachings,  twitchings, 
ravings,  riggings,  joinings,  copings,  drawings,  ratings,  chidings,  coat- 
ings, swellings,  ceilings,  musings,  openings,  gruntings 

Par.  188  c. — Buying-the,  watching-the,  arraying-the,  packing-the, 
touching-the,  brewing-the,  hunting-the,  guiding-the,  erasing-the, 
whitening-the,  dividing-the,  abbreviating-the,  sharpening-the,  govern- 
ing-the,  estimating-the,  prosecuting-the,  discounting-the,  befriending- 
the,  exhausting-the,  managing-the,  arranging-the,  quieting-the,  mock- 
ing-the,  shadowing-the,  augmenting-the. 

Par.  188  </.  —  Justly,  bluntly,  urgently,  diligently,  vainly,  ex- 
pediently, deftly,  suddenly,  manly,  positively,  prudently,  relatively, 
chastely,  friendly,  slovenly,  impenitently,  openly,  flippantly,  vehem- 
ently, figuratively,  demonstratively,  thinly,  triumphantly,  flagrantly. 

Par.  188  e. — Servility,  futility,  generality,  frugality,  barbarity, 
infidelity,  impenetrability,  vitality,  flexibility,  singularity,  sensibility, 
posterity,  credibility,  incapability,  affability,  hospitality,  polarity, 


166  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

susceptibility,  disability,  culpability,  solubility,  cordiality,  malleabil- 
ity, prosperity. 

Par.  i88y. — Friendship,  lordship,  clerkship,  courtship,  scholarship, 
fellowship,  hardship,  horsemanship,  censorship,  kingship,  rectorship, 
deaconship. 

Par.  188^-. — Himself,  herself,  ourself,  itself,  thyself,  myself,  them- 
selves, ourselves,  yourselves. 

Par.  189  a. — Conceal,  concenter,  concern,  conclude,  concession, 
condone,  confide,  congeal,  conspire,  conscience,  contemplation,  con- 
sequence, contrary,  conveyance,  conundrum,  contiguous,  consecutive, 
consolidate,  constraint,  confiscate,  conduct,  congratulate,  condescend, 
connect,  concussion. 

Commingle,  comminution,  commit,  commune,  computability,  com- 
municant, compurgation,  compunctuous,  compressive,  comprehensive, 
composite,  comprehend,  composedly,  complimentary,  complexity, 
completely,  competitor,  competence,  compensation,  compatible,  com- 
passion, compare,  community,  commeasurable,  commandery. 

Cognate,  cognition,  cognizance,  cognomen,  cognitive,  cognation. 

Reconstruct,  unconfined,  inconvenience,  inconsistent,  recommend, 
incompetent,  unconcern,  disconnect,  reconnoiter,  recondite,  discon- 
tended,  accomplish,  recumbent,  reconciliation,  encumber,  uncondi- 
tional, inconstancy,  recommendation,  uncompact,  accommodation, 
decomposition,  unconscious,  uncontrolled,  incumbent,  unconvinced. 

Par.  189  b. — Counteract,  counter-agent,  counterbalance,  counter- 
charge, counterpane,  countercheck,  counterplot,  counterpoise,  counter- 
shaft, countermarch,  counterweigh,  counterbore,  counterfoil,  counter- 
motion,  counterfeit,  countercurrent,  counterpoint,  countersign,  coun- 
tervail, counter-evidence,  counteractive,  counter-irritant,  counterdrain, 
counter-statement,  countermine. 

Contraband,  contrabass,  contradict,  contradistinction,  contravene, 
contrapuntal,  contradance. 

Controversary,  controversial,  controvert,  controversially,  contro- 
vertible,  controversy,  controversialist,  controvertibly. 

Par.  189  c. — Circumambient,  circumference,  circumflex,  circum- 
jacent, circumnavigate,  circumscribe,  circumspect,  circumstance, 
circumvallation,  circumvention,  circumscription,  circumlocution,  cir- 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  167 

cumrotary,  circumlocutory,  circumgyration,  circumstantiate,  circum- 
spectively,  circumvolution. 

Par.  189  d. — Self-appointed,  self-assertion,  self-centered,  self-defense, 
self-denial,  self-destruction,  self-esteem,  self-evident,  self-forgetful, 
selfish,  self-possessed,  self-protection,  self-same,  self-reliant,  self- 
restraint,  self-indulgence,  self-assumption,  self-dependent,  self-depre- 
ciation, self-command,  self-conscious,  self-control,  self-content,  self- 
confidence,  self-conviction. 

Par.  189  e. — Interpret,  interrogative,  interrupt,  intersperse,  inter- 
vene, interwoven,  intercede,  intercession,  intercourse,  interference, 
interlaced,  interlineal,  interloper,  intermediate,  interdiction,  interpose, 
intermittent,  interlocution,  intercommunion,  interconnection,  inter- 
view, intersect,  intermix,  interplead,  intercellular. 

Introduce,  introducer,  introduction,  introductive,  introspect,  intro- 
spection, introspective,  introversion. 

Enterprise,  enterprizing,  entertain,  entertainingness,  entertainment, 
enterprisingly,  entertainer,  entertainingly. 

Par.  189/1 — Magnifiable,  magnifical,  magnifically,  Magnificat,  mag- 
nification, magnificence,  magnificent,  magnificently,  magnifico,  mag- 
nifier, magnific,  magnify,  magniloquence,  magniloquent,  magnilo- 
quently,  magnitude. 

Magnanimity,  magnanimous,  magnanimously. 

Dictation  Exercise. — Accusing,  achieving,  appeasing,  approving, 
avoiding,  blazing,  bluffing,  bowling,  bracing,  braving,  bringing, 
broiling,  causing,  chiseling,  christening,  classifying,  clinging,  closing, 
coalescing,  cooling,  dazzling,  dealing,  driving,  drizzling,  enticing, 
evening,  facing,  failing,  fainting,  falsifying,  fanning,  fastening, 
flaunting,  founding,  frothing,  galling,  guessing,  hastening,  hissing, 
levying,  nodding,  nursing,  passing,  paving,  piecing,  placing,  poising, 
poisoning,  possessing,  pressing,  qualifying,  receiving,  resenting, 
reviewing,  scrawling,  slashing,  snarling,  sneezing,  sounding,  spacing, 
spicing,  stiffening,  stinging,  striving,  sufficing,  supposing,  surveying, 
thinning,  tolling,  tossing,  vending,  wincing,  winding,  witnessing, 
yelling. 

Alleging,  amusing,  applying,  appropriating,  blunting,  budging, 
chapping,  dating,  debilitating,  degrading,  delaying,  demanding,  de- 
meaning, deriving,  desisting,  distancing,  dogging,  dubbing,  ebbing, 
entrancing,  equipping,  existing,  expediting,  fomenting,  forgetting, 
freeing,  gagging,  getting,  glowing,  harping,  heaping,  huddling, 
hurting,  idling,  infesting,  itching,  joking,  liberating,  looking,  lulling, 
mastering,  mooting,  paying,  perching,  persisting,  pouring,  predicat- 


l68  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


ing,    prostrating,    repaying,    requesting,    revoking,    rooting, 
slanting,    spraining,    subjoining,    succeeding,    superadding, 


wrecking,  yachting. 

Ailings,  airings,  banterings,  barkings,  bearings,  beatings,  blunder- 
ings,  blusterings,  bowings,  brushings,  cawings,  comings,  cooings, 
Growings,  cuffings,  duckings,  eddyings,  edgings,  gainings,  gallopings, 


ings,  blusterings,  bowings,  brushings,  cawings,  comings,  cooings, 
Growings,  cuffings,  duckings,  eddyings,  edgings,  gainings,  gallopings, 
garlandings,  goings,  graftings,  haltings,  haulings,  hobblings,  howl- 
ings,  launchings,  likings,  linings,  lodgings,  mattings,  meetings,  mis- 


garlandings,  goings,  graltmgs,  haltings,  haulings,  hobblings,  howl- 
ings,  launchings,  likings,  linings,  lodgings,  mattings,  meetings,  mis- 
doings, mutterings,  offerings,  outings,  pawnings,  pesterings,  placard- 
ings,  plasterings,  ponderings,  poutings,  prayings,  ragings,  riotings, 


aoings,  mutterings,  onenngs,  outings,  pawnings,  pesterings,  placard- 
ings,  plasterings,  ponderings,  poutings,  prayings,  ragings,  riotings, 
rovings,  scrapings,  screechings,  showings,  sighings,  smatterings,  sob- 
bings, solicitings,  spankings,  spatterings,  spendings,  splashings,  splut- 


»»  1  O.LJ  LUIlgO,       ffVACUUKO)      Jf  t-1  L/lll  go. 

Adorning-the,  allowing-the,  aping-the,  apportioning-the,  attacking- 
the,  auditing-the,  awarding-the,  bedewing-the,  begging-the,  belaying- 
the,  besieging-the,  blasting-the,  blinding-the,  branding-the,  carving- 
the,  cashing-the,  chewing-the,  coining-the,  crediting-the,  cutting-the, 
dodging-the,  effecting-the,  endowing-the,  foraging-the,  forestalling- 
the,  fostering-the,  healing-the,  hiding-the,  hiririg-the,  hoisting-the, 
infringing-the,  investing-the,  jarring-the,  keeping-the,  kicking-the, 
locking-the,  matching-the,  melting-the,  missing-the,  oiling-the,  omit- 
ting-the,  patching-the,  pawning-the,  penetrating-the,  perverting-the, 
pillaging-the,  printing-the,  propitiating-the,  protracting-the,  quench- 
ing-the,  quickening-the,  recasting-the,  regretting-the,  reminding-the, 
rubbing-the,  scattering-the,  seizing-the,  selling-the,  setting-the,  shak- 
ing-the,  shearing-the,  shooting-the,  starving-the,  stationing-the, 
stewing-the,  stretching-trie,  striking-the,  stunting-the,  towing-the, 
trying-the,  tuning-the,  unbarring-the,  upheaving-the,  wagging-the. 

Ardently,  authoritatively,  blindly,  bravely,  cogently,  commonly, 
definitively,  diffidently,  diminutively,  disobediently,  distantly,  effect- 
ively, extravagantly,  fondly,  gentlemanly,  gravely,  greenly,  heavenly, 
honestly,  humanly,  illustratively,  impotently,  improvidently,  impru- 
dently, impudently,  indulgently,  inexpediently,  inhumanly,  inquisit- 
ively, instantly,  intuitively,  jointly,  manly,  meanly,  narratively, 
negatively,  negligently,  obediently,  patiently,  penitently,  plainly, 
potently,  radiantly,  sensitively,  transiently,  unfriendly,  unmanly,  un- 
womanlv.  womanly. 


L/uit^uiiy,   lavtctuuTg 

womanly,  womanly. 


THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  169 


indivisibility,  infallibility,  inflammability,  inflexibility,  insensibility, 
invisibility,  irresistibility,  jocularity,  juvenility,  mobility,  muscularity, 
mutability,  particularity,  penetrability,  placability,  plausibility,  po- 
tentiality, principality,  punctuality,  refrangibility,  resistibility,  ris- 
ibility, secularity,  separability,  similarity,  speciality,  stability,  tang- 
ibility, temporality,  totality,  versatility,  visibility,  volubility,  vulgarity. 

Apprenticeship,  bachelorship,  captainship,  chancellorship,  chap- 
lainship,  copartnership,  counsellorship,  dictatorship,  guardianship, 
ladyship,  lieutenantship,  partnership,  professorship,  secretaryship, 
sergeantship,  sheriffship,  soldiership,  sonship,  stewardship,  surety- 
ship, surveyorship,  survivorship,  township,  vicarship,  wardship, 
workmanship. 

Concave,  concede,  conceit,  conceive,  concentrate,  conception,  con- 
cert, conciliate,  concise,  concoct,  concrete,  concur,  condemn,  con- 
dense, condign,  condition,  condole,  conduce,  confection,  confederate, 
conference,  confess,  confidence,  confine,  confirm,  conflict,  conform, 
confound,  confront,  confuse,  confute,  congenial,  congregation,  con- 
gress, conjecture,  conjoin,  conjunction,  connive,  conquer,  conquest, 
conscript,  consecrate,  consensus,  consent,  conservative,  consider, 
consign,  consist,  consonant,  conspicuous,  constancy,  consternation, 
constitute,  construct,  consul,  consult,  consume,  contain,  contact,  con- 
tend, contest,  continual,  contract,  contrive,  control,  convenient,  con- 
vent, conversation,  convex,  conviction,  convince,  convoke,  convolve, 
conclusion. 

Combat,  combination,  combustion,  comfort,  comfortable,  com- 
mand, commandment,  commemoration,  commence,  commencement, 
commend,  commendation,  commensurate,  comment,  commentary, 
commit,  committee,  commodious,  commodity,  commodore,  communal, 
communication,  communion,  commutation,  compact,  companion, 
company,  comparative,  comparison,  compass,  compatibility,  compa- 
triot, compeer,  compel,  compendious,  compendium,  compensate, 
compete,  competent,  competition,  competitive,  compilation,  compiler, 
complacent,  complain,  complaint,  complement,  complete,  completion, 
complexion,  compliance,  complicate,  complicity,  comply,  component, 
comport,  compose,  composition,  compositor,  compost,  composure, 
compound,  comprehensible,  comprehensive,  compress,  compression, 
comprise,  compromise,  compulsion,  compulsory,  compunction,  com- 
putation, compute,  comrade. 

Cognati,  cognatus,  cognizability,  cognizable,  cognizably,  cognizant, 
cognize,  cognizee,  cognizor,  cognominal,  cognovit. 

Accommodate,  accompany,  accomplice,  discomfort,  discommode, 
discompose,  disconcert,  disconsolately,  discontinued,  encompass, 
incombustible,  incomparable,  incompatible,  incomplete,  incompre- 
hensible, incomprehensive,  inconceivable,  inconclusive,  incongruence, 
incongruity,  inconsiderate,  inconsistency,  inconsolable,  inconstant, 
inconvenient,  inconversant,  incumbrance,  recognition,  recombination, 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


recombine,  recommence,  recompense,  recompile,  recompose,  reconcile, 
recondense,  reconduct,  reconfirmation,  reconjunction,  reconquer, 
reconsecrate,  reconsider,  reconsideration,  reconstruction,  reconvene, 
reconvert,  reconvey,  uncomfortable,  uncommitted,  uncommunicated, 
uncompassionate,  uncompelled,  uncompressed,  uncompromising,  un- 
condemned,  uncondensed,  unconfessed,  unconfirmed,  unconformable, 
unconfutable,  uncongealed,  uncongenial,  unconnected,  unconsecrated, 
unconsoled,  unconsolidated,  unconstitutional,  unconstrained,  uncon- 
sumed,  uncontaminated,  uncontented,  uncontested,  uncontradicted, 
unconverted. 

Counteraction,  counteractively,  counter-appeal,  counter-appellant, 
counter-attraction,  counterbalanced,  counter-battery,  counter-blast, 
counterclaim,  counterfeiter,  counterfeiting,  counterfeitly,  counterfeit- 
ness,  counter-irritate,  counter-irritation,  countermand,  countermark, 
counter-motive,  counterpart,  counter-plea,  counterplead,  counter- 
poised, counterpoising,  counter-signal,  counter-signature,  counter- 
signing, countersink,  countersunk,  counter-tendency,  counter-tenor, 
countervailing,  counterweight. 

Contrabandism,  contrabandist,  contrabassist,  contrabasso,  contra- 
dictable,  contradiction,  contradictorily,  contradictoriness,  contradic- 
tory, controdistinctive,  contradistinguish,  contraposition,  contrapunt- 
ist, contra-tenor,  contravention. 

Circumambiency,  circumambulate,  circumambulation,  circumferen- 
tial, circumferentially,  circumflexed,  circumflexing,  circumflexion, 
circumgyrate,  circumgyratory,  circumjacence,  circumlocutional,  cir- 
cumlocutionary,  circumlocutionist,  circumnavigable,  circumnavigation, 
circumnavigator,  circumscribable,  circumscriber,  circumscriptive,  cir- 
cumscriptively,  circumspection,  circumspective,  circumspectly,  cir- 
cumspectness,  circumstanced,  circumstances,  circumstantial,  circum- 
stantially, circumstantation,  circumvallate,  circumvent,  circumventive, 
circumventor,  circumvolve. 

Self-abandonment,  self-abasement,  self-absorbed,  self-accusation, 
self-accusing,  self-adjusting,  self-approving,  self-assertive,  self-assumed, 
self-binder,  self-blinded,  self-closing,  self-complacency,  self-conceit, 
self-condemnation,  self-confident,  self-confiding,  self-congratulation, 
self-consciousness,  self-considering,  self-consistency,  self-consistent, 
self-constituted,  self-consuming,  self-contained,  self-contradiction, 
self-contradictory,  self-convicted,  self-culture,  self-deceiving,  self- 
deception,  self-delusion,  self-denyingly,  self-dependence,  self-destruc- 
tive, self-devotion,  self-disparagement,  self-distrust,  self-educated, 
self-examination,  self-existent,  self-governed,  self-government,  self- 
important,  self-imposed,  self-indulgent,  self-interest,  selfishness,  self- 
love,  self-made,  self-opinionated,  self-originating,  self-perception, 
self-pity,  self-pleasure,  self-poised,  self-preservation,  self-recording, 
self-registering,  self-regulating,  self-reliance,  self-renunciation,  self- 
repression,  self-reproach,  self-reproof,  self-restrained,  self-righteous- 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


ness,  self-sacrifice,  self-seeker,  self-support,  self-sustaining,  self-styled, 
self-taught,  self-torture,  self-willed. 

Interact,  interaction,  interactive,  interblend,  interbreed,  interceder, 
intercept,  interception,  intercessor,  intercolonial,  intercommunicability, 
intercommunicable,  intercommunicate,  intercommunication,  inter- 
community, intercomplexity,  interconnect,  intercontinental,  intercon- 
vertible, interdependence,  interdependent,  interdict,  interdictive, 
interfere,  interferer,  interferingly,  interjacent,  interjoin,  interjunction, 
interlace,  interlacing,  interlard,  interleave,  interline,  interlinear, 
interlinearly,  interlineation,  interlink,  interlock,  interlocutor,  inter- 
locutory, interlude,  intermarriage,  intermarry,  intermeddle,  inter- 
meddler,  intermeddlesome,  intermedial,  intermediary,  intermediately, 
intermediation,  intermediator,  intermingle,  intermission,  intermissive, 
intermit,  intermittently,  intermixture,  international,  internationally, 
internecine,  interpage,  interpellate,  interpellation,  interpenetrate, 
interpenetration,  interpenetrative,  interplay,  interposed,  interposer, 
interposition,  interpretable,  interpretation,  interpretative,  interpreta- 
tively,  interpreter,  interregnum,  interrogate,  interrogator,  interroga- 
tory, interrupted,  interruptedly,  interrupter,  interruption,  interruptive, 
interruptively,  intersection,  intersectional,  interspace,  interspersion, 
interstellar,  interstice,  interstitial,  intertribal,  intertwine,  intertwist, 
intervention,  interviewer,  interviewing,  interweave. 


THE  REPORTING  STYLE. 


209.  The  Corresponding  Style. — The  present  work  treats  especially 
of  the  "  corresponding  style  "  of  phonography  ;  that  is,  phonography 
in  its  full  and  complete  form,  which,  being  an  exact  and  compendious 
system  of  representing  the  language,  is  best  adapted  to  the  purposes 
of  letter-writing  and,  indeed,  to  meeting  all  the  emergencies  in  which 
longhand   is   usually  employed.     It  may   with  perfect  legibility  be 
written  three  times  as  rapidly  as  longhand,  every  word  being  written 
in    full    with    the    exception   of   less   than  two  hundred,    which,   on 
account  of  their  frequent  recurrence,  are  represented  by  abbreviated 
forms  called  logograms. 

210.  The  Easy  Reporting  Style. — In  the  remaining  pages  of  this 
book  those  principles  of  abbreviation  according  to  which  phonography 
is  adapted  to  the  uses  of  verbatim  reporting  will  be  so  far  explained 
and  illustrated  as  to  enable  the  learner  to  write  what  may  be  termed 
the  "easy  reporting  style,"  by  the  practise  of  which  he  may  readily 
increase  his  speed  to  from  four  to  five  times  that  of  longhand— a  speed 
quite  sufficient  to  meet  all  the  demands  usually  made  upon  the  busi- 
ness amanuensis  or  phonographic  clerk — and  at  the  same  time  obtain 
an  easy  introduction  to  the  study  of  reporting  as  an  art,  for  the  com- 
plete development  of  which  he  is  referred  to  the  Reporter'1  s  Companion. 

211.  Principles  of  Abbreviation. — The  two   broad  principles  of 
abbreviation  applied  to  the  corresponding  style  in  order  to  adapt  it  to 
the  uses  of  the  reporter  are  (a)  omission — which  includes  omission  of 
vowels,  of  consonants  and  of  entire  words — and  (b)  phrase-writing. 

212.  Omission  of  Vowels. — While  there  is  no  difficulty  in  appre- 
ciating the  immense  saving  of  time  gained  by  the  reporter  through  the 
extensive  omission  of  vowels,  it  may  nevertheless  seem  to  the  beginner 
that  by  such  omission  his  phonographic  notes  will  be  rendered  almost 
absolutely  illegible.     The  fact  is,  however,  that  with  very  little  prac- 
tise he  will  become  able  to  read  a  remarkably  large  proportion  of 
words  from  their  mere  consonant  outlines.     Indeed  he  does  this  in 
reading  vocalized  phonography,  for  as  soon  as  he  becomes  well  ac- 

(172) 


THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  173 

quainted  with  the  form  of  many  words  he  reads  them  by  the  outline, 
paying  little  attention  to  most  of  the  vowels,  which  he  finds  com- 
paratively useless. 

213.  Vowels  Retained  in  Certain  Cases. — It  is  true,  however,  that 
many  words  do  lose  legibility  to  a  greater  or  less  extent  through  the 
omission  of  their  vowels,  and  the  learner  should  not  at  first  leave  out 
any  initial  or  final  vowel  the  presence  of  which  is  not  indicated  by 
the  manner  of  writing  the  adjacent  consonant,  though  in  time  he  will 
be  able  to  dispense  with  even  some  of  these  vowels  without  decreasing 
the  legibility  of   his  notes.     Neither  should  he  omit  the   vowels  in 
writing  proper  names  and  strange  and  unusual  words.     The  vowels 
should  also  be  inserted  in  writing  detached  words,  since  the  legibility 
of  an  unvocalized  phonographic  outline  is  largely  derived  from  its 
context — that  is  to  say,  the  word  for  which  the  outline  does  stand  must 
often  be  selected  from  among  those  for  which  it  might  stand  by  re- 
ferring to  the  words  with  which  it  is  associated  and  with  which  it  must 
"make  sense." 

214.  Position-writing. — The  chief  means  of  correcting  the  illegi- 
bility which  results  from  the  omission  of  vowels  is  the  device  known 
as  position-writing.     Any  phonographic  stroke,  either  simple  or  with 
appendages,  may  be  written  in  three  positions  with  reference  to  the 
line  of  writing.      When  double-ruled  paper  is  used,  (see  par.  202)   the 
positions  are :  For  full-length  upright  and  slanting  strokes : 

1st  position :  through  the  upper  line,  which  cuts  the  stroke  at  its  mid- 
dle point. 

2d  position:  between  (and  touching  both)  the  lines. 
3d  position  :  through  the  lower  line,  which  cuts  the  stroke  at  its  mid- 
dle point. 
For  horizontal  and  half-length  strokes  and  vowel-signs : 

1st  position:  immediately  below  (and  touching)  the  upper  line. 
2d  position  :  resting  on  the  lower  line. 

3d  position :  below  the  lower  line  (half-length  upright  and  slanting 
strokes  touching  it,  and  all  horizontals  half  the  length  of  a  stroke 

I  below  it). 

When  single-ruled  paper  is  used,  the  strokes  are  written  in  precisely  the 
same  relative  position  to  the  one  line  as  they  are  to  the  lower  or  base 
line  of  double-ruled  paper.  A  double-length  curve,  to  be  written  in  a 


174  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

given  position,  must  be  begun  at  the  same  point  as  the  corresponding 
single-length  curve  in  the  same  position,  and  the  additional  length 
carried  on  in  the  direction  of  writing.  An  outline  made  up  of  two  or 
more  strokes,  to  be  written  in  a  given  position,  is  so  placed  that  its 
first  upright  or  slanting  stroke  shall  occupy  that  position.  If  the  out- 
line is  composed  entirely  of  horizontal  strokes  its  position  is,  of  course, 
determined  by  that  of  its  first  stroke. 

215.  How  Position-writing  is  Employed. — By  writing  the  outline 
of  any  word  in  one  of  the  three  positions,  the  place  of  the  accented 
vowel  of  the  word  is  indicated.     When  the  outline  is  written  in  the 
first  position   it  indicates  that  the  accented  vowel  of  the  word  is  a 
first-place  vowel,  and  so  on. 

216.  What  Outlines  Should  be  Written  in   Position. — It  is  by 
no  means  necessary  to  write  all  outlines  in  position,  for  the  longer  an 
outline  is,  the  greater  the  certainty  with  which  it  may  be  read  without 
its  vowels  and  without  the  aid  to  reading  given  by  position-writing. 
As  a  rule,  all  words  are  written  in  position  whose  outlines  consist  (a) 
of  but  one  stroke,  whether  with   or  without  appendages,  and  whether 
modified  or  unmodified  by  halving  or  doubling,  or  (/>)  of  two  unmodified 
strokes  without  appendages.    Derivative  words,  moreover,  should  be  written 
in  the  position  of  those  primitives  from  which  they  are  immediately  taken. 
As  to  longer  outlines,  it  is  never  necessary  to  write  them  in  position  ex- 
cept for  the  purpose  of  distinguishing  certain  clashing  words  written  with 
the  same  outline,  as  prominent  may  be  distinguished  from  permanent  by 
writing  the  former  in  the  first  and  the  latter  in  the  second  position. 

217.  Other   Means  of   Distinguishing    "Clashing"  Words. — 
Clashing  words  may  sometimes  be  distinguished  more  conveniently 
than  by  position-writing,  (a]  by  varying  their  consonant  outlines — as 
pure  may  be  distinguished  from/<w  by  irregularly  writing  the  former 
with  ray — and  (6)  by  inserting  distinctive  vowels — as  voracity  is  dis- 
tinguished from  veracity  by  inserting  the  vowel  o  in  the  former. 

218.  Omission    of    Consonants. — Contractions. — Since    the   re- 
porter on  account  of  the  extensive  omission  of  vowels  must  depend 
chiefly  upon  the  consonants  for  the  reading  of  his  notes,  it  is  evident 
that  consonants  cannot  be  omitted  to  any  great  extent  in  the  report- 
ing style.     Nevertheless,  abbreviated  forms  are  employed  for  certain 
very  frequently-recurring  words,  and,   furthermore,  certain  words  of 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  175 

less  frequent  recurrence  may  be  usefully  abbreviated  by  the  omission 
of  the  most  inconvenient  portion  of  the  outline  provided  a  distinctive 
and  characteristic  form  remains.  A  table  of  the  most  useful  contrac- 
tions is  given  on  page  178,  which,  as  well  as  the  reporting  logograms, 
should  be  thoroughly  learned  by  frequent  copying  and  re-copying  and 
also  by  the  writing  of  short  sentences  of  the  student's  own  devising, 
which  sentences  shall  contain  these  words. 

219.  Phrase-writing. — -The  table  on  page   179  gives  a  list  of  the 
most  useful  phrases.     Phrases,  it  will  be  observed,  consist  of  single 
outlines  for  the  expression  of  two  or  more  words.     Those  given  may 
be  taken  as  models  upon  which  the  student  may  form  others  of  a  like 
character.     The    student   should    increase   his    phrase-list,    however, 
rather  by  the  adoption  of  forms  seen  in  printed  phonography  than  by 
seeking  to  devise  phrases  for  himself;  for  he  should  know  beforehand 
that  out  of  many  phrases  which  he  may  so  devise  but  few  will  be  of 
actual  service  to  him  in  rapid  writing,  while  others  may  even  become 
a  serious  hindrance.     No  phrase  should  be  written  unless  the  words 
composing  it  are  naturally  connected  with  each  other  in  a  logical  and 
grammatical  relation,    nor  unless   the    several   outlines  join  readily. 
Neither  should  any  phrase  be  written  which  is  difficult  or  awkward  on 
account  of  its  length. 

220.  "I"  and  "He"  in  Phrases. — When  the  word  /  begins  a 
phrase  it  may  with  perfect  legibility  be  expressed  by  either  one  of 
the  two  strokes  which  form  the  sign  v.     When  the  first  stroke  is  used 
it  must  always  be  struck  downward,  and  when  the  second  stroke,  it 
must   always   be   struck   upward.     When   he   occurs   anywhere  in  a 
phrase  but  at  its  beginning  the  tick  may  be  written  either  up  or  down 
according  to  convenience. 

221.  Position  of  Phrases. — Most  phrases  have  their  position  de- 
termined by  that  of  their  first  word ;    that  is  to  say,  the  first  word 
of  a  phrase  is  generally  written  in  its  own  position,  and  the  word  or 
words    which    follow  accommodate   themselves  to  it.     Occasionally, 
however,  legibility  demands  that  the  first  word  adapt  itself  to   the 
position  of  a  following  word,  as  in  the  phrases  of  these,  of  those.     See 
page  179.     When  a  phrase  begins  with  either  of  the  words  is,  as,  his, 
has,  he,  the  circle  or  tick-//  accommodates  itself  to  the  position  of  the 
word  that  follows. 


I?6  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

222.  Omission  of  Words. — The  connective  phrase  of  the  is  omitted 
when  the  words  between  which  it  occurs  can  be  written  close  to  each 
other.     If,  however,  one  of  them  is  a  vowel  logogram  the  phrase  > 
must  be  written. 

223.  Preparation  for  Amanuensis  Work. — The    student   whose 
immediate  object  is  to  fit  himself  to  do  the  work  of  a  business  aman- 
uensis should  now  turn  back  to  page  112  and  rewrite  in  the  report- 
ing style  the  entire  body  of  exercises  beginning  on  that  page  and 
ending  on  page  171,  omitting  all  vowels  except  such  as  in  paragraph 
213  are  directed  to  be  retained,  and  placing  in  position  all  words 
which  fall  under  the  rules  of  position-writing  as  given  in  paragraph 
216.     Special  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  dictation  exercises  and 
each  one  should  be  written  and  rewritten   from    dictation    till   the 
learner  feels  no  hesitation  in  placing  each  word  on  paper  as  soon  as  it 
is  heard.     The  words  and  phrases  on  pages  177,   178,  179  and  180 
should  then  be  written  very  many  times  so  as  to  thoroughly  memorize 
each,  after  which  the  learner  should  take  up  dictation  practise  on  new 
matter  selected  from  a  great  variety  of  sources,  and  especially  on 
model  business  letters  which  may  be  found  in  the  books  of  "  Business 
Letters,"  published  by  the  Phonographic  Institute  Company.     A  few 
weeks  of  faithful  practise  for  several  hours  daily  will  give  the  learner 
sufficient  speed  for  all  the  requirements  of  ordinary  business  dictation. 
If,  however,  he  is  ambitious  to  fit  himself  to  fill  the  more  difficult  and, 
therefore,  the  more  lucrative  positions  of  this  kind,  and  especially  if  he 
desires  to  develop  that  degree  of  skill  demanded  for  court  and  legis- 
lative reporting,  he  is  urged  to  take   up  the  study  of  the  Reporter's 
Companion,  which  will  lead  him  to  the  briefest  and  most  legible  style 
of  writing  used  by  practical  reporters. 


THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY.                                      177 

s 

REPORTING 

able 

LOGOGRAMS. 

./  %..  much 
\  number 

^-                   ^ 

^  about 
ago 

—                        am 
1  appear 

often 
(\  opportunity 

""r  at 
>  because 

I    . 

7  other 
_J  out 

1 

belong-ed 
n    dollar 

T 

over 
owe-d,  oh 

L1  duration 
'     during 

i 

^~s  own 

v       people-d 

each 
"^  either 

^P  possession 
£^      practise-ical 

England-ish 
^~=                 ^-  even 

f  

real-ly 

P  satisfaction 
'    satisfy-ied 

several 

ever 
"~  fact 

x;  

1" 

follow-ed 

"^  half 
hand 

ff- 

similar-ly-ity 
/^  somewhat 

X 

suggest 
/  surprise 

r 

hence 

/  hold,  held 
^      holy 

I      hope 

4  

/  . 

*  thank-ed 

/  those 
~\  though 

1  thousand 

^ 

^--  however 

V 

r 

time 
v  until 

impossibie-y-ility 
~~~^  influence 

V.... 

/  use  (n) 
Vs  use  (v) 

influenced 

kingdom 
/  large 

r 

within 
^"^  woman 

178                                      THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

CONTRACTIONS. 

7              N—'\  acknowledge 

/                              11 

"  ^l                1      never 
/*"  nevertheless 

anybody 

\                 /  capable-ility 
/     change-d 

•^p  nobody 

-^^>>^'  notwithstanding 

n       character 
characteristic 

'    1                  \    November 
/  object 

>|^  danger 
°^  December 

>^^        objection 
~  peculiar-ly-ity 

1      determine 
1    determination 

>t      /  passenger 
^^^       phonographer 

>.      disadvantage 
\  establish-ed-ment 

[                   'X        phonographic 
practicable-ility 

i                             February 
^v              .       *  independent-ce 

\\         probable-y-ility 
\o  purpose 

^S      indiscriminate 
^  —  ••  —  -              b  indispensable 

\jS     public 
rather 

^_^              v__D  influential 
'       information 

s—         /s.      regular-ly-ity 
S     \  represent-ed 

s\             /v       representation 
'      \3    /    ^*  representative 

^                         intelligence 
c/                      If  intelligent 

~y                    _p  intelligible 
<J                       '  interest 

_-                       .     irregular  ly-ity 
\^_            l^,  January 

o_^            Ps  September 

Tr       satisfactory 

^.     somebody 
rf~"^                    y  subject 

—  y           •  —  -^.s  knowledge 
/                 s      machinery 

^                   ^v     subjected 
/                      /  subjection 
O 

magazine 
'""^  ^  —  manuscript 

L*^f      whatsoever 
^-  whensoever 

"    6  —       ^~&  —  =  mistake 

Jl                       wheresoever 
&     whosoever 

THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY.                                    179 

X*. 

PHR/ 

p           are  not 

LSES. 

1                               it  may  be 

••  —  -                   ™    let  us 

•o                       4    of  his 

v^      as  far  as 
ras  soon  as 

J 

as  well  as 

can  be 
could  not 

.     did  not 

—  -    of  these 
>                    ^.      of  those 

*°                           ought  to  be 

should  be 
*\                     1    should  do 

j    should  have 
V^                    (    so  that 

t                   *}/    that  is 

do  not 
had  not 

T~ 

\ 

has  not 

\has  been 
have  been 

have  not 
6    he  has 

.                 he  is 
/—  -v    he  may 

there  are 
^                      /    this  is 

"fc    those  who 
v                        .     to  be 

v-^.    his  own 

>                       |    to  do 

/    United  States 
"-^                          we  are 

c                     ^-    we  have 
v^                 6        \ve  will 

/                              which  he  knows 
who  have 

s~\     who  can 

f-^             '     ^    will  be 

^                        5    will  not 
'       with  which 

<j                       /    with  them 
V                               you  are 

^  f^_      you  can 
you  may 

Q_^ 

y,    I  am  (may)  not 

1      I  (Jo 

•d 

xi         I  do  not 
^-    I  have 

^    I  will 

I 
U 

1         it  is 
<J    o    it  is  impossible 

I         it  may 
^    it  must 

1     it  must  be 
it  should 

i8o 

THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 

WORDS,  CONTRACT 

FOR    BUSINESS 

i  at  hand 

IONS  and  PHRASES. 

AMANUENSES. 

{   net  cash 
-^                  )    New  Jersey 

f                     {£     New  York 
in  your  city 

*.     North  Carolina 

a  

s 

J  at  once 
v         balance 

v 

^^  bank 
•^/"  bankrupt 

C\                better  than 
x_j>  bill  of  lading 

Ohio 

N^A^.^\^X^  Pennsylvania 
per  cent 

jP             \p     please  advise 

r 
c 

X 

business 

commercial-ly 
^  dear  sir 

deliver-ed-y 

District  of  Columbia 

./  electric-al-ly-ity 
"       enclosure 

express 
first-class 

"1   free  on  board 

V_o  post-office 

/^         ^ 
f/r           C/~\  raih"oad 

railway 

S?    1          .s*^  regret  to  say 
)                  respect-ful-ly 

[^  South  Carolina 
^                         territory 

#                        (   the  first  ' 
f      this  letter 

yf                    Q  truly  yours 
United  States 

c^_^^    **\X\  very  much 
^/                    very  respectfully 

>V.     very  truly 
,,              /  Virginia 

c/^                           we  are  in  receipt-of 
we  enclose 

c/^         c/\^,  we  remain 
with  reference-to 

cS             «^\  with  regard-to 
with  respect-to 

S~      £^\  y°ur  letter 
f                         yours  respectfully 

b*-               b^      yours  truly 
\S~  yours  very  truly 

^ 

*  I  trust  that 
in  order-to 

in  our 

5i-j>              '^^Va  m  receipt-of 
in  reference-to 

^""^  in  regard  -to 

in  reply-to 

<:~\v           ';~J\V  *n  respect-  to 
in  response-to 

v~x   in  stock 
Iowa 

'      ^>         ^^^  ^s*  Pr'ce 

machinery 

\^         ""/  manufacture-d 
Massachusetts 

<?~~>                £  ^  merchandise 
)                         more  than 

EXERCISES  IN  THE   EASY  REPORTING  STYLE. 
Speech  of  Patrick  Henry. 

DELIVERED  MARCH  28,  1775,  BEFORE  THE  VIRGINIA  CONVENTION  OF  DELEGATES. 


(181) 


KEY. 
Speech  of  Patrick  Henry. 


MR.  PRESIDENT:  It  is  natural  for  man  to  indulge  in  the  illusions 
of  hope.  We  are  apt  to  shut  our  eyes  against  a  painful  truth  and 
listen  to  the  song  of  that  siren  till  she  transforms  us  into  beasts.  Is 
this  the  part  of  wise  men  engaged  in  a  great  and  arduous  struggle  for 
liberty  ?  Are  we  disposed  to  be  of  the  number  of  those  who  having 
eyes  see  not,  and  having  ears  hear  not,  the  things  which  so  nearly 
concern  their  temporal  salvation  ?  For  my  part,  whatever  anguish  of 
spirit  it  may  cost,  I  am  willing  to  know  the  whole  truth  ;  to  know  the 
worst  and  to  provide  for  it. 

I  have  but  one  lamp  by  which  my  feet  are  guided  ;  and  that  is  the 
lamp  of  experience.  I  know  of  no  way  of  judging  of  the  future  but 
by  the  past.  And  judging  by  the  past,  I  wish  to  know  what  there 
has  been  in  the  conduct  of  the  British  ministry  for  the  last  ten  years 
to  justify  those  hopes  with  which  gentlemen  have  been  pleased  to 
solace  themselves  and  the  house.  Is  it  that  insidious  smile  with 
which  our  petition  has  been  lately  received  ?  Trust  it  not,  sir;  it  will 
prove  a  snare  to  your  feet.  Suffer  not  yourselves  to  be  betrayed  with 
a  kiss.  Ask  yourselves  how  this  gracious  reception  of  our  petition 
comports  with  these  warlike  preparations  which  cover  our  waters  and 
darken  our  land.  Are  fleets  and  armies  necessary  to  a  work  of  love 
and  reconciliation  ?  Have  we  shown  ourselves  so  unwilling  to  be 
reconciled  that  force  must  be  called  in  to  win  back  our  love  ?  Let  us 
not  deceive  ourselves,  sir.  These  are  the  implements  of  war  and  sub- 
jugation— the  last  arguments  to  which  kings  resort.  I  ask  gentlemen, 
sir,  what  means  this  martial  array  if  its  purpose  be  not  to  force  us  to 
submission  ?  Can  gentlemen  assign  any  other  possible  motive  for  it  ? 
Has  Great  Britain  any  enemy  in  this  quarter  of  the  world,  to  call  for 
all  this  accumulation  of  navies  and  armies  ?  No,  sir,  she  has  none. 
They  are  meant  for  us ;  they  can  be  meant  for  no  other.  They  are 
sent  over  to  bind  and  rivet  upon  us  those  chains  which  the  British 
ministry  have  been  so  long  forging.  And  what  have  we  to  oppose  to 


THK    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


'83 


~-~>~\ 


X       ^Vo 


C 


^    r        )   \ 

J  '/,  -A  .  "\ 

-*f  ?    /* 


>   J 


N  L 

P    ' 


\        ^^    \   ^\  »    J 

r          >  ^    \ 


\ 


>  /^  v<-</  / 


,  V.  V;  V. 


^"U 

.    / 


184  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


them  ?  Shall  we  try  argument  ?  Sir,  we  have  been  trying  that  for 
the  last  ten  years.  Have  we  anything  new  to  offer  on  the  subject  ? 
Nothing.  We  have  held  the  subject  up  in  every  light  of  which  it  is 
capable ;  but  it  has  been  all  in  vain.  Shall  we  resort  to  entreaty  and 
humble  supplication  ?'  What  terms  shall  we  find  which  have  not 
been  already  exhausted  ?  Let  us  not,  I  beseech  you,  sir,  deceive  our- 
selves longer.  Sir,  we  have  done  everything  that  could  be  done  to 
avert  the  storm  which  is  now  coming  on.  We  have  petitioned  ;  we 
have  remonstrated ;  we  have  supplicated;  we  have  prostrated  ourselves 
before  the  throne  and  have  implored  its  interposition  to  arrest  the 
tyrannical  hands  of  the  ministry  and  parliament.  Our  petitions  have 
been  slighted  ;  our  remonstrances  have  produced  additional  violence 
and  insult ;  our  supplications  have  been  disregarded  and  we  have  been 
spurned  with  contempt  from  the  foot  of  the  throne.  In  vain,  after 
these  things,  may  we  indulge  the  fond  hope  of  peace  and  reconcilia- 
tion. There  is  no  longer  any  room  for  hope.  If  we  wish  to  be  free — 
if  we  mean  to  preserve  inviolate  those  inestimable  privileges  for  which 
we  have  been  so  long  contending — if  we  mean  not  basely  to  abandon 
the  noble  struggle  in  which  we  have  been  so  long  engaged  and  which 
we  have  pledged  ourselves  never  to  abandon  until  the  glorious  object 
of  our  contest  shall  be  obtained,  we  must  fight !  I  repeat  it,  sir,  we 
must  fight !  An  appeal  to  arms  and  to  the  God  of  hosts  is  all  that  is 
left  us ! 

They  tell  us,  sir,  that  we  are  weak ;  unable  to  cope  with  so  formid- 
able an  adversary.  But  when  shall  we  be  stronger?  Will  it  be  the 
next  week,  or  the  next  year  ?  Will  it  be  when  we  are  totally  disarmed 
and  when  a  British  guard  shall  be  stationed  in  every  house?  Shall 
we  gather  strength  by  irresolution  and  inaction  ?  Shall  we  acquire 
the  means  of  effectual  resistance  by  lying  supinely  on  our  backs  and 
hugging  the  delusive  phantom  of  hope  until  our  enemies  shall  have 
bound  us  hand  and  foot  ?  Sir,  we  are  not  weak  if  we  make  a  proper 
use  of  those  means  which  the  God  of  nature  hath  placed  in  our  power. 
Three  millons  of  people,  armed  in  the  holy  cause  of  liberty,  and  in 
such  a  country  as  that  which  we  possess,  are  invincible  by  any  force 
which  our  enemy  can  send  against  us.  Besides,  sir,  we  shall  not  fight 
our  battles  alone.  There  is  a  just  God  who  presides  over  the  destinies 
of  nations  and  who  will  raise  up  friends  to  fight  our  battles  for  us. 


THE   MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


/     C      \ 
/  XD  , 


V 

> 


"  '^f 

_:__r~  l-\_i  • 


<\      >  > 

-.N^---  ------  ,/  . 


( 


'  —  ^ 

,        I 


l86  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

The  battle,  sir,  is  not  to  the  strong  alone ;  it  is  to  the  vigilant,  the 
active,  the  brave.  Besides,  sir,  we  have  no  election.  If  we  were 
base  enough  to  desire  it,  it  is  now  too  late  to  retire  from  the  contest. 
There  is  no  retreat  but  in  submission  and  slavery !  Our  chains  are 
forged!  Their  clanking  may  be  heard  on  the  plains  of  Boston  !  The 
war  is  inevitable — and  let  it  come!  I  repeat  it,  sir,  let  it  come! 

It  is  in  vain,  sir,  to  extenuate  the  matter.  Gentlemen  may  cry 
peace,  peace — but  there  is  no  peace.  The  war  is  actually  begun!  The 
next  gale  that  sweeps  from  the  north  will  bring  to  our  ears  the  clash 
of  resounding  arms!  Our  brethren  are  already  in  the  field!  Why 
stand  we  here  idle  ?  What  is  it  that  gentlemen  wish  ?  What  would 
they  have  ?  Is  life  so  dear,  or  peace  so  sweet,  as  to  be  purchased  at 
the  price  of  chains  and  slavery  ?  Forbid  it,  almighty  God  !  I  know 
not  what  course  others  may  take,  but  as  for  me,  give  me  liberty,  or 
give  me  death ! 


Business  Letters. 

i. 

LA  CROSSE  LUMBER  Co., 

LA  CROSSE,  Wis. 

Gentlemen:  Referring  to  the  claim  presented  by  you  April  21,  1897, 
for  alleged  overcharge  in  weight  on  various  shipments  of  pulp  wood 
forwarded  from  Waterloo,  Wis.,  to  La  Crosse,  during  the  month  of 
April,  1897:  These  claims  you  base  on  estimated  weight  of  this  wood 
as  per  circular  No.  224.  For  your  information  I  would  say  that  cir- 
cular No.  224  is  applicable  only  to  cases  in  which  the  actual  weight 
of  the  wood  in  question  cannot  be  ascertained.  The  weights  upon 
which  the  freight  charges  referred  to  in  your  claim  were  collected 
were  actual  as  ascertained  by  careful  weighing.  Under  these  circum- 
stances we  must  respectfully  decline  to  reduce  our  charges  to  those 
for  estimated  weights.  No  overcharge  exists  on  this  shipment  and 
your  claim  is  respectfully  declined. 

Yours, 


THE   MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


I87 


Business  Letters. 


224 


,r  >./• 

^      */ 


224 


97 


r; 


^\ 

) 


....  20   V 


357 


l88  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


2. 

MR.  M.  H.  SMITH, 

SALES  AGENT  TRIUMPH  COAL  Co., 
CHESTER,  PA. 

Dear  Sir :  I  am  to-day  in  receipt  of  your  order  dated  July  20,  for 
Lehigh  coal.  It  contains  only  one  order  for  Schuylkill  coal.  From 
this  it  would  appear  that  you  have  misconstrued  my  letter  of  July  25. 
What  I  would  like  you  to  do  is  to  send  no  orders  to  me  at  Philadel- 
phia but  for  Schuylkill  and  Hazleton  coal.  All  your  other  orders 
should  go  to  Maple  Hill  as  heretofore. 

I  will  make  a  memorandum  of  your  order  No.  357  on  the  sheet  re- 
ceived this  morning  and  forward  the  other  orders  to  my  office  in 
Maple  Hill. 

Trusting  I  have  made  this  plain  and  that  in  future  I  may  receive 
only  orders  for  Schuylkill  and  Hazleton  coal  at  this  office,  I  remain 

Yours  truly. 


APPENDIX  A. 


SPEECH. 

1.  SPEECH,  physiologically  considered,  is  the  result  of  the  joined 
operation  of  the  vocal  and  articulating  organisms  upon  the  current 
of  expired  breath. 

2.  Underlying  both  these  organisms,  and  essential  to  both,  are  the 
lungs,  which,  with  reference  to  speech,  simply  perform  the  office  of  a 
pair  of  bellows,   drawing  in  and  expelling  the  air.     It  is  the  return 
current  of  air,  which,  having  become  vitiated  in  the  process  of  oxy- 
genating the  blood,  is  expelled  preparatory  to  taking  in  a  fresh  sup- 
ply, that  forms  the  material  basis  of  speech. 

3.  THE  VOCAL  ORGANISM  consists  of  the  trachea,  the  larynx,  and 
the  pharynx.     The  first  of  these   (often  called  the  wind-pipe)  is  the 
air-tube  which  forms  the  direct  avenue  through  which  air  enters  and 
leaves    the   lungs.     At   its    upper    extremity  it    widens    into  a  pear- 
shaped  box  of  cartilage  called   the  larynx,  which   is   situated  in  the 
fore  part  of  the  neck  above  the  trachea  and  below  the  base  of  the 
tongue.    The  larynx  is  formed  of  several  thin  plates  of  cartilage  articu- 
lating upon  each  other,  which  are  so  provided  with  muscles  as  to  be 
capable  of  considerable  variation   in   their  relative  position.     Within 
the  larynx,  and  stretched  across   it  from  back  to  front,  are  the  two 
vocal  cords  or  ligaments.     The  edges  of  these  two  ligaments,  when 
stretched   by   the   muscular    action    of    the   larynx,    are   parallel   and 
nearly  or    quite    in    contact,   forming    an    elastic,    membraneous  dia- 
phragm or  partition  in  the  air  passage  at  this  point.    The  slit  or  open- 
ing between  the  vocal  ligaments  is  called  the  glottis.     The  produc- 
tion of  high  or  low  sounds  depends  upon  the  tension  of  the  vocal 
ligaments,  and,  perhaps  to  some   extent,   upon  some  modification  in 
the  shape  of    the  larynx  and  in  the  length  of   the  trachea.     When 
the  vocal  ligaments  are  tightened  and  the  edges  brought  nearly  or 
quite  in  contact,  expired  breath  can  not  pass  through  without  caus- 
ing a  vibration,  thereby  producing  a  sound,  the  pitch  of  which,  as 


1 9O  THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 

before  said,  depends  upon  the  tension  of  the  ligaments.  The  phar- 
ynx is  a  muscular  and  membraneous  passage  which  connects  the  cav- 
ity of  the  mouth  with  the  larynx  and  esophagus  (or  gullet)  below 
and  with  the  nasal  passage  above.  Though  not  strictly  employed 
in  the  production  of  sound  it  aids  by  its  resonance  in  intensifying  the 
vibrations  of  the  vocal  ligaments. 

4.  THE  ARTICULATING  ORGANISM    is   peculiar   to   man,  in    whom 
alone  of  all  the  animal   creation  it  is  found  in  any  considerable  per- 
fection.    It  consists  of  two  groups  of  organs.     Those  of  one  group — 
the   Hard   Palate  and  the  Teeth — are    fixed    and  unchangeable  in 
shape;  those  of  the  second, group — the  Lips,  Tongue  and  Soft  Palate — 
are  soft  and  flexible,  and  may,    therefore,   change  their  shape  and 
relative  position,  adapting  themselves  to  the  fixed  organs  and  to  each 
other  in  various  ways.     The  great  variety  of  positions  assumed  by 
these  organs,  forms  a  chain  of  contacts  running  from  the  lips — the 
most  external — to  the  soft  palate — the  most  internal ;  and  thus  a  cor- 
responding  variety   of  modifications   may   be   given    to    the    expired 
breath. 

5.  A  correct  physiological  classification  of  the  elements  of  speech 
can  be  obtained  only  by  considering  the  sounds  in  relation  to  these 
two  organisms.     If  a  sound  of  speech  be  considered  with  reference 
to  the  vocal  organism  it  will  be  found  to  be  either  (a)  voiced  or  (6) 
whispered — that  is  to  say,  it  is  produced  either  (a]  with  a  vibration  of 
the  vocal  cords,  or  else  (/;)  without  such  a  vibration.     If  it  be  con- 
sidered with  reference  to  the  articulating  organism,  it  will  be  found 
to  be  either  (i)  obstructed  ot  (2)  tmobstructed — that  is,  in  its  production 
(i)  there  exists  a  contact  between  certain  of  the  articulating  organs, 
or  (2)  there  is  no  such  contact.     It  is  evident,  furthermore,  that  while 
a  given  sound  belongs  to  a  certain  class  (a  or  6),  with  reference  to  the 
vocal  organism,  it  may  belong  to  either  class  (i  or  2),  with  reference 
to  the  articulating  organism ;   and  thus,  of  necessity,  we  have  the  four 
grand  divisions  of  the  elements  of  speech,  as  follows: 

a  i.  Sounds  that  are  voiced  and  obstructed  (sonants). 

a  2.  Sounds  that  are  voiced  and  unobstructed  (vowels). 

f>  I.  Sounds  that  are  whispered  and  obstructed  (surds). 

b  2.  Sounds  that  are  whispered  and  unobstructed  (aspirates). 


THE    MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


191 


6.  A  careful  study  of  the  diagram  on  page  192  will  assist  the 
student  to  understand  this  classification,  and,  at  the  same  time,  in- 
dicate what  particular  sounds  belong  to  each  class.  On  the  line 
joining  the  words  "voiced"  and  "obstructed,"  the  sonants  are  ar- 
ranged, according  to  the  order  of  their  formation,  along  the  line  of 
articulations  running  from  the  lips  to  the  soft  palate  ;  and  the  vmue/s, 
surds,  and  aspirates  are  similarly  arranged  upon  their  respective  lines. 
With  respect  to  length,  sounds  may  be  either  short  (abrupt),  or  long 
(continuous),  and  in  the  diagram  the  short  sounds  are  uniformly 
placed  immediately  above  the  line  and  the  long  sounds  immediately 
below  it.  The  medial  quality  of  the  vowel  a  is  indicated  by  its  being 
placed  exactly  on  the  line.  The  Nasal  Continuants,  HI,  n,  and  ng  are 
indicated  in  italic  type,  and  the  Liquids  /  and  r  in  a  heavy-faced 
letter.  The  diacritical  marks  placed  to  the  vowels  and  aspirates  are 
those  employed  in  Webster's  International  Dictionary,  as  follows: 


a  heard  in  ale. 

a  "  "  add. 

a  "  "  air. 

a  "  "  arm. 

a  "  "  ask. 

a  "  "  all. 

e  "  "  eve. 


end. 


e  heard  in  ermine. 
I       "        "    ill. 
o      " 
6      " 


Old. 
odd. 


rude. 

us. 

put. 


bo 

C 

W 


•£   w 

~    ai 

t-  <: 


tn  a 


APPENDIX  B. 


A  SCHEME  OF  PHONOGRAPHIC  NOTATION  BY 
MEANS  OF  COMMON  TYPES. 

The  following  plan  for  indicating  the  construction  and  vocalization 
of  phonographic  outlines  by  means  of  common  types  was  first  printed 
in  the  Phonographic  Magazine  for  June  I,  1895.  It  is  built  mainly 
upon  a  scheme  of  characteristics,  as  follows : 

CAPITALS  are  the  characteristic  representatives  of  strokes. 
ROMAN    CAPITALS    are    the    characteristic    representatives   of 

of  downward  and  horizontal  strokes : 

P,  B,  T,  D,  Ch,  J,  K,  G,  F,  V,  Th,  Dh,  S,  Z,  Sh,  Zh,  L,  R,  M, 
N,  Ng,  W,  Y,  Mp. 

ITALIC  CAPITALS  are  the  characteristic  representatives  of  up- 
ward strokes: 
Sh,  L,  R,  H. 

SMALL  CAPITALS  are  the  characteristic  representatives  of  modifica- 
tions by  halving  and  doubling: 

T,  U;    THR,  DHR,  TR,   DR,    KR,   GR,   R. 

Lower-case  letters  are  the  characteristic  representatives  of  append- 
ages and  vowels. 
Roman  lower-case  are  the  characteristic  representatives  of  circles : 

s;  z;  ss;  sz;  zs;  zz ;  ss,z;  sz,z  ;  zs,  z  ;  zz,  z. 

Italic  lower  case  are  the  characteristic  representatives  of  hooks  and 
loops : 

/,  r,  w,  hw,  n,  f,  v,  s/tn,  zhn  ;  st,  zd,  str, 
Diacritical  vowel-signs  are  the  characteristic  representatives  of  the 

vowels : 

e     a     a     a     o     u 

I     e     a     6     u     u 

and,  with  lower-case  w  and  y,  of  the  coalescents : 
we     wa     wa     wa     wo     wu 
wl      w6     wa     wo     wu     wu 
ye      ya      ya      ya      yo      yu 
yl       ye      ya      y6      yu      yu 

d93) 


194  THE  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Grouped  vowel-signs,  without  diacritics,  are  the  characteristic  re- 
presentatives of  the  diphthongs: 

ai,     oi,     au,      (wai). 

Dissyllabic   diphthongs  are  indicated  by  the  sign  A  between  the 
component  vowels: 

CAU,     aAu,    aAu,     aAu,    OAU,    UAU. 

aiAU,     oiAu,     auAU. 

weAii,  etc.  ;  yeAu,  etc. 
Special  representation — 

tick-//:  Roman  lower-case  h. 

dot-/i  :   Roman  lower-case  heavy  face  h. 

large  ?o-hook :   lower-case  heavy  face  italic  w. 
Suffixes  are  spelled  out  and  separated  from  the  stem  by  an  inverted 

period;  thus,  "contain"  is  written  con-T«. 
Disjunction  or  the  breaking  of  an  outline  is  indicated  by  X  between 

the  parts  ;  thus,  "  freighted  "  is  written  FrrXD. 
Joining  of  a  diphthong  or  coalescent  to  an  outline  is  indicated  by 

-)-,  as  "  idea,"  ai-f-DeAU. 
The  use  of  the  phonographic  hyphen  is  indicated  by  =  between 

the  parts;  thus,  "  story-teller  "  is  written  .r/R=T/R. 
Vowel  and  tick  wordsigns  are  spelled  out ;  as,  I,  of,  you,  he. 
Proximity  is  indicated  by  — •  between  the  outlines;  thus,  "wonder 

of  the  world  "  is  written  wNDR. — .wRo. 
Position  is  indicated  by  a  superior  figure  J  or  3,  placed  immediately 

after  the  capital  letter  which  stands  for  the  positioned  stroke. 

When  no  figure  appears  the  outline  is  in  the  second  position,  or 

on  the  line. 
Phrasing  is  indicated  by  connecting  the  words  with  hyphens.    Thus, 

"  in-the  "  is  written  N'-the. 

The  first  sentence  on  page  93  is  represented  as  follows : 
MaiKV  ShuPaK,   a  swlS  DdKTr  of  seZeBrlTi  N'-the  Las/  seNT- 
yuJ?I,  Z  aFew  VizlTfiD  Bai  PeP/  of  Du/lNg-f/m  and-Fa/?TyuN. 
The  first  two  sentences  on  page  181  are  represented  as  follows : 
M'r-PrzDwT— T-z  N»rL  F  M«  to  iNoLJ    N'-the    \L*zhm   of   P3. 
iv R  aPr  to  Shr  R3  ai-fZ  Gnst-a.  PwFL  Tr  and-LsN  to-the  sNg1  of- 
DhT  saitf«  T/  Sh"  TrsFRMz  S  NT 


APPENDIX  C. 


THE  EXTENDED  ALPHABET. 

1.  For  the  representation  of  foreign  sounds  not  heard  in  English, 
and  for  a  more  exact  representation   of  English  than  is  given  in  ordi- 
nary phonography,    an   extended    alphabet    is   required   and   is   here 
presented. 

2.  The  twelve-vowel  scale  does  not  provide  distinctive  signs  for  the 
vowels  heard  in  earth,  air  and  ask.     These  are  given  in  the  following 
table,  numbered  I,  2  and  9. 

3.  The  remaining  signs  in  the  table  are  for  the  representation  of 
sounds  foreign  to  the  English  language.     They  are,  of  course,  useful 
only  to  those  persons  who  have  "a  speaking  acquaintance  "  with  the 
language  represented. 


Long  Vowels. 

1  e      I  earth  (Eng. ),  le  (Fr.) 

2  e     :[  frere  (Fr.),  air  (Eng.) 

3  a     ;|  pite  (French) 

4  u      |  griin  (Ger.),  lune  (Fr.) 
56']  bos  (German) 

6     a     ||  Aehre  (German) 

Nasal  Vcnvels  (French). 

13  in     si     fin- 

14  en     I     en  danse. 

15  on    J|     bon 

1 6  un    2!     brun 

17  ien      I    JulJien 

I 


Short  Vowels. 

7  i  I  ici  (French) 

8  6  :|  ete  (French) 

9  a  J  patte  (Fr.),  ask  (E.) 

10  u  'I  Fiille  (German) 

11  6  'I  Bocke  (German) 

12  a  ||  Manner  (German) 

Consonants. 

18  ch     -s-    ich  (Ger.)  loch  (Sc.) 

19  gh       g      einige  (German) 

20  11      /*"     Llanelly  (Welsh) 

~~s      (/ 

21  r       \  71     amor  (Italian) 


INDEX. 

Figures  preceded  by  "p."  refer  to  page  :  all  others  refer  to  paragraph. 


A,  tick,  186. 

Abbreviation,  principles  of,  211. 
Accent,  157. 

Affinity,  vocal,  158. 

Affixes,  disjoined,/.  88,   /.  90,  187. 

Alphabet ;  deficiencies  of  the  Roman,  2 ; 
phonetic,  3. 

Amanuenses,  words,  contractions  and 
phrases  for  business, /.  180. 

Amanuensis  work,  preparation  for,  223. 

And,  tick,  186. 

An,  tick,  186. 

Appendages,/.  44. 

Approximate  representation  of  concur- 
rent vowels  by  coalesce.it  vowel-signs, 
55- 

Aspirate,  p.  32,  12  ;  logogram,  /.  42. 

Attachment;  of  the  circles,  79,  90;  of 
the/"-z>  hook,  108  ;  of  the  w-hook,  101 ; 
of  the  shun-hook,  114;  of  the  small 
w-hook  to  curves,  123 ;  of  the  small  w- 
hook  to  ray,  124. 

B,  _y-hook  attached  to,  154. 
Backward;    w-hook,  /.    72,    148;   shun- 

hook,  117. 

Base  line,  17,  23 

Briefer  signs  supplied,  77. 

Business  amanuenses,  words,  contract- 
ions and  phrases  for,  /.  180. 

Capitalization,  120. 

Checks,  24. 

Circle  ;  and  «-hook  combined,  104;  large, 
85-86 ;  logograms,  /.  52 ;  -j  added  to 
logograms,  99;  -s  and^-w  hook  com- 
bined, 112;  -f  and  loop  combined,  95, 
97;  -s  and  shun-\ioo\i  combined,  116; 
-.r  and  small  w-hook  combined,  128;  -J 
before  large  w-hook,  152 ;  vowel  ex- 
pression between  a  stroke  and  a,  83. 

Circles;  attachment  of,  79;  large,  dis- 
tinguished, 89;  manner  of  writing  dis- 
joined, 98;  on  halved  strokes,  163; 
rules  for  reading  the,  82  ;  s  and  z,  p. 
44,  /.  46;  j  and  z  distinguished,  84; 
ses,  sez,  zes,  zez,  p.  48  ;  suggestive  vo- 
calization of  the  large,  88  ;  vocalization 
of  outlines  containing,  80. 

Clashing  words,  means  of  distinguishing, 
216-217. 

Coalescent;  direction  of  vowel-signs  in- 
variable, 50  ;  logograms,  p,  42  ;  logo- 
grams unshaded,  74;  vowel-signs  48; 
vowel-signs,  approximate  repr  senta- 
tion  of  concurrent  vcwels  by,  55; 
vowel-signs,  joined,  51. 

Coalescents,  /.  28,  n  ;  twofold  nature 
of,  47. 


Combinations  of  consonants,  21. 

Combined  ;  circle-.?  and  small  w-hook, 
128 ;  f-v  hook  and  circle-^,  112;  loop 
and  circle,  05,  97;  «-hook  and  circles, 
104 ;  «-hook  and  circle-sez,  106 ;  n- 
hook  and  loop,  107 ;  shun-hook  and 
circles,  116. 

Compounded  logograms,  183. 

Compounds,  double  consonants  consid- 
ered as  indivisible,  132. 

Concurrent  vowels,  p.  30;  approximate 
representation  by  coalescent  vowel- 
signs,  55. 

Conflicting  motives,  195. 

Consecutive  vowels  written  separately, 
S3- 

Consonant;   logograms,  p.  38 ;    nominal, 

73- 

Consonants,  /.  13,  /.  14,  /.  16,  p.  18,  4 ; 
combinations  of,  21;  double,  p.  64,  p. 
66, p.  68  ;  double,  considered  as  indivis- 
ible compounds,  132;  imperfect  triple, 
143  ;  initial  and  final,  192  ;  irregular 
double,  138  ;  irregular  triple,  144  ;  me- 
dial, 193  ;  medial  triple,  142  ;  omitted, 
174,  218;  quadruple,  147;  table  of,/. 
13,  14,  triple,  141 ;  triple  and  quad- 
ruple, /.  70;  vocalization  of  double, 
133,  140 ;  written  first,  36. 

Continuants,  7. 

Continuous  joinings,  25;  utility  of,  28. 

Contracted  ns  on  straight  strokes,  105. 

Contractions,/.  178,  218;  for  business 
amanuenses,  /.  180. 

Corresponding  style,  199,  209  ;  exercises 
in  the,  /.  93. 

Curvilinear  motion,  two  kinds  of,  78. 

Dashes,  direction  of,  32. 

Deficiencies  of  the  Roman  alphabet,  2. 

Der  added  by  doubling,  175. 

Derivative  words,  logograms  represent, 
as  well  as  primitives,  71. 

Deviations  from  the  standard  in  rapid 
writing,  198. 

Dher  added  by  doubling,  176. 

Dictation  exercises,  207. 

Dictionary,  use  of  the  Phonographic, 
196. 

Diphthong,  direction  of  signs  invariable, 
45  >  logograms,  /.  42  ;  position  of  signs, 
44  ;  signs,  43  ;  signs  joined,  46. 

Diphthongs,/.  26;  dissyllabic,  54. 

Direction  of  coalescent  vowel-signs  in 
variable,  50;  of  dashes,  32;  of  diph- 
thong signs  invariable,  45;  of  he,  76; 
of  strokes,  15;  of  writing,  16;  strokes 
of  variable,  22. 

(i97) 


198 


Disjoined  ;  affixes,  /.  88,  p.  90,  187;  cir- 
cles and  loops,  manner  of  writing,  98 ; 
prefixes,  189  ;  suffixes,  188. 

Dissyllabic  diphthongs,  54. 

Dot-A,  58. 

Double  consonants,  p.  64,  p.  66,  p.  68 ; 
considered  as  indivisible  compounds, 
132;  halved,  164;  intervocalization  of, 
140 ;  irregular,  138 ;  vocalization  of, 
135,  140. 

Douole-consonant  signs,  use  of  the,  139. 

Double-length  ;  logograms,  /.  86 ;  mp- 
mb,  178  ;  ng,  177. 

Double-lengths ;  intervocalization  of, 
181  ;  joined  at  an  angle,  180;  «-hook 
added  to,  182;  vocalization  of,  179. 

Doubling  ;  principle,  p.  84  ;  ter  and  der 
added  by,  175  ;  ther  and  dher  added 
by,  176. 

Downward,  upward  and,  /,  r  and  s h,  p. 

34- 

Easy  reporting  style,  210;  exercises  in 
the,/.  181. 

Emphasis,  156. 

Exercises  ;  dictation,  207  ;  how  to  prac- 
tise the  writing,  206 ;  in  the  corre- 
sponding style,  p.  93 ;  in  the  easy 
reporting  style,  p.  181  ;  necessity  of 
writing,  200;  preparation  for  the  writ- 
ing, 205;  writing,/.  109. 

Explodents,  5. 

F;  and  v  distinguished,  109  ;    rules  for 

stroke  and  hook  forms  of,  no. 

/'"-hook,/.  56;  and  circle-j  combined, 
112;  attachment  of  the,  108;  medial 
use  of  the,  in. 

Figures,  121. 

Final  ;  consonants,  192;  /,  62  ;  r.  65. 

Final-hook;  logograms,  /.  60;  strukes. 
halved,  165. 

Foreign  words,  large  a/-hook  in,  153. 

Free  use  of  the  halving  principle,  171. 

Fricatives,  8. 

Glides,  vowel,  42. 

Grammalogues,  table  of,  /.  103. 

//;  dot,  58;  medial,  59  ;  stroke,  57;  tick, 
56  ;  tick  on  halved  strokes,  162. 

Half-length;  logograms,  /.  80,  p.  82; 
logograms,  position  of,  173;  J,  169. 

Half-lengths;  joined  at  a  tangent,  168 ; 
vocalization  of,  160. 

Halved  ;  double  and  triple  consonants, 
164  ;  final-hook  strokes,  165  ;  ray,  167  ; 
strokes,  circles  and  loops  on,  163 ; 
strokes,  tick-A  on,  162;  w-hook  strokes, 
166. 

Halving  ;  of  /,  r,  m,  n,  161  ;  principle,  /. 
76,  /.  78,  159;  principle,  free  use  of 
the,  171. 

He  ;  direction  of,  76;  in  phrases,  220. 

Hints  to  self-instructed  learners,  208. 

Holding  the  pen  or  pencil,  manner  of, 
204. 


Hook  ;  attachment  of  ihef-v,  108  ;  back- 
ward n,  p,  72,  148; /-i/,  /.  56;  /,  131  ; 
large  w,  p.  72,  149  ;  logograms,  initial, 
/.  74;  n,  p.  54;  r,  135;  r  on  curved 
strokes,  136;  shun,  p.  58,  113;  small 
•w,  p.  62,  122  ;  y  attached  to  b,  154. 

Hooks,  imperfect,  59,  134. 

Horizontal  logograms,  position  of,  72. 

Hiv,  60,  129. 

Hyphen,  use  of  the,  in  phonography, 
121  note. 

/;  distinguished  from  ye,  75 ;  in 
phrases,  220. 

Imperfect;  hooks,  59,  134;  triple  con- 
sonants, 143. 

Initial;  consonants,  192;  hook  logo- 
grams, /.  74 ;  I,  61 ;  r,  64 ;  spr  series, 

H?- 

Initials,  155. 

Ink,  203. 

Intervocalization  ;  of  double  consonants, 
140;  of  double-lengths,  181. 

Irregular  ;  double  consonants,  138;  triple 
consonants,  144. 

Joined ;  coalescent  vowel-signs,  51  ; 
diphthong  signs,  46. 

Joinings  ;  continuous,  25  ;  utility  of  con- 
tinuous, 28. 

Kinds  of  curvilinear  motion,  two,  78. 

L  ;  final,  62  ;  halving  of,  161  ;  initial,  61  ; 
upward  and  downward,  /.  34. 

Large;  circle,  85-86;  circles  distin- 
guished, 80  ;  circle,  suggestive  vocali- 
zation of  the,  88 ;  loop,  96 ;  loop  and 
circle  combined,  97 ;  w-hook,  p.  72, 
149  ;  ro-hook  in  foreign  words,  153  ;  TV- 
hook  preceded  by  circle-.?,  152;  iv- 
hook,  rules  for  the  use  of  the,  150. 

Learners,  hints  to  self-instructed,  208. 

Z-hook,  131 ;  and  r-hook,  mnemonics 
for,  137. 

Liquids,  9,  130. 

Logogram  ;  aspirate,/.  42  ;  for  read,  172. 

Logograms,  /.  36,  69 ;  circle  added  to, 
99;  circle  and  loop,/.  52;  coalescent, 
/  42  ;  coalescent,  unshaded,  74;  com- 
pounded, 183;  consonant,/.  38;  /.  40; 
diphthong,/.  42;  double-length,/.  86; 
final-hook,  /.  60 ;  half-length,  /.  80  ;  /. 
82  ;  initial-hook,  /.  74  ;  loop-j^  added 
to,  loo ;  position  of  half-length,  173; 
position  of  horizontal,  72;  reporting, 
/.  177;  represent  derivative  words  as 
well  as  primitives,  71  ;  table  of,/.  106; 
vowel,  70. 

Long  vowels,/.  20,  /.  22,  30. 

Long  vowel  signs,  31. 

Loop;  and  circle  combined,  95,  97;  and 
tt-hook  combined,  107  ;  large,  96  ;  logo- 
grams, /.  52  ;  manner  of  writing  dis- 
joined, 98;  small,  91  ;  -st,  p.  50;  -st 
added  to  logograms,  100 ;  -sir,  p.  50; 
-st,  rules  for  the  use  of  the,  93. 


Loops  ;  on  halved  strokes,  163  ;  vocaliza- 
tion of  outlines  containing,  92. 

M,  halving  of,  161. 

Manner;  of  attaching  the  circles,  79,  90; 
of  attaching  the  f-v  hook,  108 ;  of  at- 
taching the  n-hook,  101 ;  of  attaching 
the  jAww-hook,  114;  of  holding  the 
pen  or  pencil,  204  ;  of  writing  disjoined 
circles  and  loops,  98. 

Materials,  writing,  201. 

Mb,  double-length,  178. 

Means  of  distinguishing  clashing  words, 
216-217. 

Medial;  consonants,  193;  h,  59;  r,  66; 
triple  consonants,  142;  use  of  the  f-v 
hook,  in  ;  use  of  the  «-hook,  103;  use 
of  the  small  if-hook,  127. 

Method  of  practise,  20,  38. 

Mnemonics  for  /  and  r  hooks,  137. 

Modified  shadings,  26. 

Motion,  two  kinds  of  curvilinear,  78. 

Motives;  conflicting,  195;  of  outline 
formation,  194. 

Mp,  double-length,  178. 

TV;  halving  of,  161  ;  rules  for  stroke  and 
hook  forms  of,  102. 

Names  of  the  vowels,  35. 

Nasals,  10. 

Ng,  double-length,  177. 

A^-hook,  /.  54  ;  added  to  double-lengths, 
182 ;  and  circles  combined,  104  ;  and 
c\rc\e-sez  combined,  106 ;  and  loop 
combined,  107  ;  backward,  p.  72  ;  me- 
dial use  of,  103. 

Nominal  consonant,   73. 

Now,  imperfect  vocalization  of,  46  note. 

.Vs  contracted  on  straight  strokes,  105. 

Omission;  of  consonants,  174,  218;  of 
vowels,  212  ;  of  words,  222. 

Order  of  reading,  33. 

Outline  formation,  p.  92  ;  motives  of,  194. 

Outlines;  containing  circles,  vocaliza- 
tion of,  80;  containing  loops,  vocaliza- 
tion of,  92;  containing  the  small  iu- 
hook,  vocalization  of,  125  ;  of  words  of 
frequent  occurrence  unnecessary  to 
vocalize,  p.  102 ;  variety  of,  possible, 
191 ;  written  in  position,  216. 

Paper,  202. 

Past  tenses,  rules  for  writing,  170. 

Pencil,  203;  manner  of  holding  the,  204. 

Pen,  203  ;  manner  of  holding  the,  204. 

Phonetic;  alphabet,  3;  analysis  of  qu, 
151 ;  spelling,  37. 

"Phonographic  Dictionary,"  use  of  the, 
196. 

Phonography,  study  of  printed,  197. 

Phrases,  /.  179 ;  for  business  amanuen- 
ses, /.  180;  /and  he  in,  220;  position 
of,  221. 

Phrase-writing,  219. 

Plurals,  representation  of,  85. 

Position  ;  of  diphthong  signs,  44  ;  of  half- 


EX.  199 

length  logograms,  173 ;  of  horizontal 
logograms,  72  ;  of  phrases,  221  ;  what 
outlines  should  be  written  in,  216. 

Position-writing,  214;  how  employed, 215. 

Practise  ;  method  of,  20,  38  ;  new  kind 
recommended,  190. 

Prefixes,  disjoined,   189. 

Preparation  ;  for  amanuensis  work,  223  ; 
for  the  writing  exercises,  205. 

Primitives,  logograms  represent  deriva- 
tive words  as  well  as,  71. 

Principle;  doubling,/.  84;  free  use  of  the 
halving,  171  ;  halving,/,  76, /.  78,  159. 

Principles  of  abbreviation,  211. 

Printed  phonography,  study  of,  197. 

Punctuation,  119. 

Quadruple  consonants,  /.  70,  147. 

Qu,  phonetic  analysis  of,  151. 

R;  final,  65  ;  halving  of,  161  ;  initial,  64 ; 
medial,  66;  upward  and  downward, 
/•  .34- 

Rapid  writing,  deviations  from  the  stand- 
ard in,  198. 

Kay,  halved,  167. 

Read,  logogram  for,  172. 

Reading,  order  of,  33. 

Recurrence  of  words,  unequal,  68. 

Reporting  logograms,/.  177. 

Reporting  style,  /.  172  ;  easy,  210 ;  exer- 
cises in  the  easy,  p.  181. 

Representation  ;  of  concurrent  vowels 
by  coalescent  vowel-signs,  approxi- 
mate, 55  ;  of  plurals,  85  ;  of  zd,  94. 

/?-hook,  135  ;  and  /-hook,  mnemonics  for, 
137  ;  on  curved  strokes,  136. 

/?/-hook  intervocalized  used  in  writing 
certain  words,  140  note. 

Roman  alphabet,  deficiencies  of  the,  2. 

Rules  ;  for  reading  the  circle,  82  ;  for  the 
stroke  and  hook  forms  ofy~and?>,  no; 
for  the  stroke  and  hook  forms  of  «, 
102;  for  the  strokes  and  vowel-signs  for 
TV  and  y,  52  ;  for  the  use  of  large  w- 
hook,  150;  for  the  use  of  loop-j/,  93; 
for  the  use  of  j^aw-hook  and  sh  n- 
hook,  115;  for  writing  past  tenses,  170; 
for  writing  the  stroke  and  circle  forms 
of  s-z,  81  ;  for  writing  the  stroke  and 
hook  forms  of  iu,  126. 

5V  and  2  ch-cles  distinguished,  84  ;  before 
stroke-^,  146  ;  half-length,  160  ;  rules 
for  writing  stroke  and  circle  forms  of, 
81. 

Scale  ;  short  vowel,  39  ;  vowel,  29. 

Self-instructed  learners,  hints  to,  208. 

5?J-circle,  /.  48. 

.SVz-circle,  /.  48;  and  w-hook  combined, 
106. 

Sh,  67  ;  upward  and  downward,  p.  '34. 

Sez-es,  87. 

Shade,  6,  iq;  modified,  26. 

Short  vowels,  /.  24. 

Short  vowel ;  scale,  39  ;  signs,  40. 


Shun  distinguished  from  zkun,  118. 

Shun-\\oo\i,  p.  58,  113  ;  and  circle-.?  com- 
bined, 116;  and  sh  «-hook,  rules  for 
the  use  of,  115;  attachment  of,  114; 
backward,  117. 

Signs  ;  briefer,  supplied,  77  ;  diphthong, 
43  ;  diphthong  joined,  46;  direction  of 
diphthong,  invariable,  45  ;  long  vowel, 
31;  position  of  diphthong,  44;  short 
vowel,  40 ;  use  of  the  double-conso- 
nant, 139. 

Size  of  strokes,  18. 

Slurs,  27. 

Small  loop,  91. 

Small  TO-hook,  p.  62,  122  ;  and  circle-.? 
combined,  128  ;  attachment  to  curves, 
123;  attachment  to  ray,  124;  medial 
use  of  the,  127. 

Sound-writing,  i. 

Spelling,  phonetic,  37. 

Spr  series,  initial,  145. 

-SV-loop,  p  50 ;  rules  for  the  use  of  the,  93. 

•SVr-loop,  /.  50. 

Stroke  ;  and  a  circle,  vowel  expression 
between  a,  83  ;  and  circle  forms  of  s-z, 
rules  for  writing,  81  ;  and  hook  forms 
of  n,  rules  for,  102  ;  and  hook  forms  of 
TV,  rules  for  writing  the,  126;  -h,  57; 
-h  preceded  by  s,  146. 

Strokes  ;  and  vowel  signs  for  -w  and  y, 
rules  for,  52 ;  circles  and  loops  on 
halved,  163  ;  direction  of,  15  ;  halved 
final-hook,  165;  halved  w-hook,  166; 
of  variable  direction,  22  ;  size  of,  18  ; 
supplementary,  13;  tick-A  on  halved, 
162. 

Suffixes,  disjoined,  188. 

Supplementary  strokes,  13. 

Table  of  consonants,  /*.  13,  14;  of  gram- 
malogues,  /.  103  ;  of  logograms,  /.  106. 

Tangent;  half-lengths  joined  at  a,  168; 
joinings,  25. 

Tenses,  rules  for  writing  past,  170. 

Tcr  added  by  doubling,  175. 

Tltr,  tick,  185. 

Ther  added  by  doubling,  176. 

Tick  ;  a,  an,  and,  186;  the,  185. 

Tick-A,  56  ;  on  halved  strokes,  162. 

Ticks,  /.  88,  184. 

Triphthong  ivt,  49. 

Triple  consonants,  p.  70,  141  ;  halved, 
164;  imperfect,  143;  irregular,  144; 
medial,  142. 

Two-fold  nature  of  coalescents,  47. 

Unequal  recurrence  of  words,  68. 

Upward  and  djwnward  /,  r,  and  sh,p.  34. 

U:ility  of  continuous  joinings,  28. 

I';  f  and,  distinguished,  109  ;  rules  for 
stroke  and  hook  forms  of,  no. 

Variable  direction,  strokes  of,  22. 

Variety  of  oir'ines  possible,  191. 

F-hook,  p.  56  ;  and  circle-j  combined, 


112  ;  attachment  of,  108 ;  medial  use  of 
the,  in. 

Vocal  affinity,  158. 

Vocalization  ;  of  double  consonants,  133, 
140;  of  double-lengths,  17^-181;  of 
half-lengths,  160;  of  now,  imperfect, 
46  note;  of  outlines  containing  cir- 
cles, 80;  of  outlines  containing  loops, 
02  ;  of  outlines  containing  the  small  w- 
hook,  125;  of  the  large  circle,  suggest- 
ive, 88. 

Vowel ;  expression  between  a  stroke 
and  a  circle,  83  ;  glides,  42  ;  logograms, 
70;  places,  34:  scale,  29;  short,  scale,  39. 

Vowels;  between  consonants,  41  ;  con- 
current, p.  30 ;  consecutive,  written 
separately,  53;  long,  /.  20,  p.  22,  30; 
names  of  the,  35 ;  omission  of,  212  ;  re- 
tained in  certain  cases,  213;  short,/. 

24- 

Vowel-signs;  approximate  representa- 
tion of  concurrent  vowels  by  coales- 
cent,  55  ;  coalescent,  48;  direction  of 
coalescent,  invariable,  50;  joined  coa- 
lescent, 51  ;  short,  40;  strokes  and,  for 
w  and  y,  rules  for,  52. 

W;  and  y,  rules  for  the  strokes  and 
vowel-signs  for,  52  ;  rules  for  writing 
the  stroke  and  hook  forms  of,  126. 

Wh,  60,  129. 

ff-hook  ;  attachment  of  small,  to  curves, 
123  ;  large,  p.  72,  149  ;  large,  in  foreign 
words,  153;  large,  preceded  by  circle 
-s,  152;  medial  use  of  the  small,  127; 
rules  for  the  use  of  the  large,  150; 
small,  p.  62,  122  ;  small,  and  circle-.? 
combined,  128;  strokes  halved,  166 ; 
vocalization  of  outlines  containing  the 
small,  125. 

11-7,  triphthong,  49. 

Words;  for  business  amanuenses, /.  180; 
large  w-hook  in  foreign,  153;  logo- 
grams represent  derivative,  as  well  as 
primitives,  71;  means  of  distinguishing 
clashing,  217  ;  of  frequent  occurrence, 
unnecessary  to  vocalize,  outlines  of, 
/.  102  ;  omission  of,  222  ;  unequal  re- 
currence of,  68. 

Writing  ;  direction  of,  16  ;  materials,  201. 

Writing  exercises, /.  109;  how  to  prac- 
tise the,  206;  necessity  for,  200;  prep- 
aration for  the,  205. 

]",  rules  for  the  strokes  and  vowel-signs 
for  70  and,  52. 

)>  distinguished  from  /,  75. 

)"-hook  attached  to  b,  154. 

Z ;  rules  for  writing  stroke  and  circle 
forms  of,  81  ;  J  and,  circles  distin- 
guished, 84. 

Zd,  representation  of,  94. 

Zi'f-circle,  /.  48. 

/?cz-circle,  /.  43. 

Zkun  distinguished  from  shun,  nS. 


THE  AMERICAN  SYSTEM  OF  SHORTHAND. 


CATALOG  OF 

Phonographic  Works 

BY 

BENN  PITMAN  AND  JEROME  B.  HOWARD. 

PUBLISHT  BY 

THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  INSTITUTE  COMPANY, 
CINCINNATI,  O. 

There  is  no  question  whatever  of  the  truth  of  the  statement  that 
the  Benn  Pitman  System  is  more  generally  used  than  any  other 
in  this  country ;  at  least  this  would  appear  to  be  true,  from  the  reports 
made  to  this  Bureau  of  various  institutions  teaching  shorthand. — Hon. 
W.  T.  Harris,  Commissioner  of  Education  {Washington,  D.  C. ), 
November  19,  1898. 

The  following  is  a  graphic  summary  of  the  Table  of  Statistics  on 
the  Teaching  of  Shorthand  in  the  United  States,  in  the  Bureau  of 
Education  Circular  of  Information  No.  I,  1893,  pages,  40  to  141 : 

/  Benn  Pitman,  747  teachers, 

~l          34-7%- 

— ^— ^— — ^^^—  Graham,  363  teachers,  1 6. 8  $,. 
<H^^^^MH»  Munson,  228  teachers,  IO.6  c/0. 
•^^^—  Cross,  185  teachers,  8.6  <j/0. 
•^^^^•»  Isaac  Pitman,  143  teachers,  6.7  cf0. 
——  Lindsley,  81  teachers,  3.7  $,. 
^— i  Pernin,  64  teachers,  2.5  %. 

—  Scott-Browne,  52  teachers,  2.4  o/0. 
^™  Longley,  52  teachers,  2.4  <fc. 

^  McKee,  56  teachers,  1.6  o/0. 

—  Pitman  (unspecified),  35  teachers,  1.6  $,. 

—  Moran,  30  teachers,  1.3  f/c. 

—  Sloan-Duployan,  24  teachers,  i.i  c/r. 

Besides  38  others,  each  being  less  tlun  I  ctr 

To  supply  the  increasing  demand  for  stenographers,  schools  of  short- 
hand and  typewriting  have  been  establish!  in  various  parts  of  the  coun- 
try, and  with  few  exceptions,  all  business  colleges  now  have  a  "depart- 
ment of  shorthand."  A  number  of  systems  are  taught,  but  that  of 
Benn  Pitman  is  more  generally  used  than  any  other  in  this 
country  and  may  be  called  the  "American  System." — Report  of 
the  Commissioner  of  Education,  for  1887-88,  page  927. 


Instruction  Books. 

The  Manual  of  Phonography.  [42oth  Thousand.]  By  BENN  PITMAN 
and  JEROME  B.  HOWARD.  Designed  for  instruction  in  Schools, 
Academies,  Business  Colleges,  etc.,  as  well  as  for  self-instruction,  in 
the  art  of  Shorthand  Writing.  The  proper  book  for  the  beginner. 
It  contains  a  complete  exposition  of  the  system,  from  its  simplest 
principles  to  the  reporting  style,  arranged  in  alternate  and  opposite 
pages  of  explanation  and  phonographic  exercises.  Every  principle  is 
copiously  illustrated  with  engraved  examples  for  reading,  and  exercises 
in  the  ordinary  type  for  writing  and  dictation  practise.  A  mastery  of 
this  book  fits  the  student  to  act  efficiently  as  a  business  amanuensis 
and  lays  the  indispensable  foundation  for  reporting  skill  as  developed 
in  the  Reporter's  Companion.  Revised;  enlarged  and  improved. 
200  pp.,  cloth #1  oo 

The  Phonographic  Reader.  By  BENN  PITMAN  and  JEROME  B. 
HOWARD.  Designed  to  accompany  the  Manual.  It  affords  the 
necessary  reading  practise  in  the  corresponding  style.  The  selections 
are  taken  (by  permission)  from  "McGuffey's  Revised  Fifth  Eclectic 
Reader,"  which  may  be  used  as  a  key.  52  pp.,  paper 25 

The  Phonographic  Copy-Book.  Made  of  double-ruled  paper,  such 
as  is  used  by  most  reporters,  but  with  the  lines  wider  apart  for  the 
learner.  This  paper  is  especially  useful  to  the  beginner,  and  assists 
him  to  acquire  a  neat  and  uniform  style  of  writing. 

Paper,  5  cents;  postpaid 7 

Per  dozen,  50  cents;    postpaid 65 

The  three  books  last  mentioned  form  a  set,  from  which  a  perfect  knowledge 
of  this  time-  and  labor-saving  art  may  be  acquired  by  any  one  without 
the  aid  of  a  teacher. 

The  set  will  Le  sent,  postpaid,  for I  25 

The  Second  Phonographic  Reader.  By  BENN  PITMAN  and  JEI<(  >ME 
B.  HOWARD.  Contains  reading  exercises  engraved  in  easy  reporting 
style,  and  is  keyed  by  "McGuffey's  Revised  Sixth  Eclectic  Reader." 
52  pp.,  paper 25 

The  Reporter's  Companion.  By  BENN  PITMAN  and  JEROME  B. 
HOWARD.  A  Guide  to  Verbatim  Reporting;  for  professional  re- 
porters and  those  who  desire  to  become  such.  In  this  work,  which 
should  be  studied  only  by  those  who  have  first  mastered  the  Manual 
of  Phonography,  the  Principles  of  Abbreviation  used  in  the  Brief 
Reporting  Style  of  Phonography  are  clearly  explained  and  amply 
illustrated.  Thousands  of  reporters  have  acquired  their  ability  to 
write  verbatim  with  no  other  instruction  than  that  afforded  by  this 
and  the  preceding  set  of  books.  187  pp.,  cloth I  OO 


The  Phonographic  Dictionary  and  Phrase  Book.  By  BENN  PIT- 
MAN and  JEROME  B.  HOWARD.  Contains  a  vocabulary  of  120,000 
words,  including  every  useful  word  in  the  language  and  a  large  num- 
ber of  proper  and  geographic  names,  legal,  scientific,  and  technical 
terms,  engraved  in  phonography  with  a  parallel  key  in  ordinary  type. 
Concerning  each  word  information  is  given  on  the  following  points: 
I.  Spelling;  2.  Accentuation;  3.  Pronunciation;  4.  Capitalization; 

5.  Fully-vocalized   (or  Corresponding  Style)   phonographic  outline; 

6.  Reporting  Style  outline  ;    7.   Compounding  ;  8.    Principal  phrases 
which  it  begins.     The  phonographic  outlines  are  clearly  and  beauti- 
fully engraved,  no  roundabout,    complicated  "nomenclature"   being 
employed.      [Specimen  pages  will  be  sent  on  request.]     552  Pa§es> 
octavo,  cloth 3  °° 

Business    Letters.      No.    i.  —  Miscellaneous    Correspondence. 

Written  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  Phonography,  with  Key.  By  BENN 
PITMAN  and  JEROME  B.  HOWARD.  The  letters  have  been  selected 
from  actual  correspondence  in  various  branches  of  business,  and,  being 
free  from  difficult  technicalities,  are  such  as  will  furnish  the  best  prac- 
tise for  young  students  of  shorthand  who  are  ready  to  begin  fitting 
themselves  for  the  duties  of  the  shorthand  correspondent  or  business 
amanuensis.  32  pp.,  paper 25 

Instructions  in  Practical  Court  Reporting.  By  H.  W.  THORNE. 
The  standard  work  on  this  important  subject.  Exemplifies,  explains 
and  instructs  as  to  all  the  details  of  trials,  teaching  the  shorthand 
writer  how  to  use  his  skill  in  making  a  report.  Contains  valuable 
suggestions  to  lawyers  and  law  students  found  in  no  other  work. 
Has  received  emphatic  testimonials  from  official  court  reporters, 
judges,  lawyers,  law  lecturers,  teachers  of  shorthand  and  the  press. 
237  pp.,  cloth I  oo 


Books  Printed  in  Phonography. 

On  Self-Culture,  Intellectual,  Physical,  and  Moral.  A  vade  mecum 
for  young  men  and  students.  By  JOHN  STUART  BI.ACKIE,  professor 
of  Greek  in  the  University  of  Edinburgh.  Printed  in  the  Easy  Re- 
porting Style  of  Phonography  in  accordance  with  the  Manual  of 
Phonography  by  Benn  Pitman  and  Jerome  B.  Howard.  67  pp. 
Paper 35 

Plain  Talk.     By  C.  H.  SPURGEON.    Written  in  Corresponding  Style. 

32  pp.,  paper 25 

3 


Rip  Van  Winkle  and  The  Creole  Village.  By  WASHINGTON 
IRVING.  In  Easy  Reporting  Style.  32  pp.,  paper 25 

The  Battle  of  Waterloo.  Compiled  from  Creasy's  "Fifteen  Decisive 
Battles,"  and  other  sources.  By  BENN  PITMAN.  In  Brief  Reporting 
Style,  with  maps.  No  key.  31  pp.,  paper 25 

[See  also  The  Phonographic  Library,  page  6.] 


Typewriter  Instruction  Books. 

Remington  Typewriter  Lessons,  for  the  use  of  Teachers  and 
Learners.  Designed  to  develop  accurate  and  rapid  operators.  By 
MRS.  M.  V.  LONGLEY.  48  pp.,  paper 50 

Caligraph  Lessons,  for  the  use  of  Teachers  and  Learners.  Designed 
to  develop  accurate  and  rapid  operators.  By  MRS.  M.  V.  LONGLEY. 
48  pp.,  paper 50 

The  Smith  Premier  Typewriter  Instructor.  By  the  Eight-Finger 
Method,  in  which  the  most  rapid  and  least  tiresome  mode  of  writing 
every  word  correctly  is  clearly  indicated,  including  suggestions  and 
exercises  for  acquiring  the  art  of  writing  by  position,  without  looking 
at  keyboard ;  containing  also  practical  exercises  in  correspondence, 
business  and  legal  papers,  testimony,  contracts,  specifications,  orna- 
mentations, etc.,  etc.  By  ELIAS  LONGLEY.  48  pp.,  paper 50 

The  Yost  Typewriter  Instructor.  By  the  Eight- Finger  Method,  etc. 
By  ELIAS  LONGLEY.  48  pp.,  paper 50 

The  National  Typewriter  Instructor.  By  the  Eight- Finger  Method, 
etc.  By  ELIAS  LONGLEY.  48  pp.,  paper 50 

Longley's  Typewriter  Instructor.  In  accordance  with  a  scientific 
keyboard,  etc.  Py  ELIAS  LONGLEY.  48  pp.,  paper 50 

The  Touch  Writer.  A  text-book  for  self-  and  class-instruction  in  the 
art  of  operating  the  typewriter  without  looking  at  the  keyboard. 
By  J.  E.  FULLER.  Shift-Key  Edition,  designed  for  the  Remington, 
Densmore,  Rem-Sho,  Underwood,  and  other  writing-machines 
navinga  shift-key  and  the  "universal"  keyboard.  Paper,  48pp.,  50 

Double-Keyboard  Edition,  designed  for  the  Smith  Premier,  Jewett, 
Yost,  New  Century  Caligraph,  and  other  writing-machines  having  a 

iouble  "universal"  keyboard.     Paper,  48  pp 50 

4 


Miscellaneous. 

How  Long — A  Symposium. — Consists  of  contributions  on  the  length 
of  time  required  for  obtaining  -verbatim  speed  in  shorthand  writing, 
from  the  following  eminent  reporters :  Jerome  B.  Allen,  Eliza  B. 
Burnz,  Chas.  E.  Weller,  Wm.  A.  Croffut,  H.  W.  Thome,  Henry  M. 
Parkhurst,  Spencer  C.  Rodgers,  Daniel  C.  McEwan,  Thomas  Allen 
Reed,  Wm.  Whitford,  Edw.  B.  Dickinson,  Philander  Deming,  Julius 
Woldemar  Zeibig,  Benn  Pitman,  Theo.  F.  Shuey,  Thos.  Towndrow, 
Theo.  C.  Rose,  Sherburne  Wesley  Burnham,  Wm.  Henry  Burr,  Elias 
Longley,  Dennis  F.  Murphy,  Edw.  F.  Underbill,  Adelbert  P.  Little, 
Chas.  C.  Marble,  John  B.  Carey,  Frederic  Irland,  David  Wolfe 
Browne.  A  remarkable  assemblage  of  opinions  and  experiences. 
Full  of  happy  suggestions  to  teachers  and  self-instructed  learners  of 
shorthand.  Illustrated  with  a  finely-engraved  portrait  of  each  con- 
tributor. 189  pages.  Paper,  50  cents  ;  Cloth 75 

The  Teaching  of  Shorthand.  By  G.  A.  CLARK.  This  essay  was 
awarded  a  prize  of  Two  Hundred  and  Fifty  Dollars  offered  by  the 
editor  of  the  Phonographic  Magazine,  in  which  it  was  originally 
printed.  It  should  be  read  by  every  progressive  teacher  of  shorthand, 
regardless  of  systems.  Paper 25 

The  Mastery  of  Shorthand.  By  DAVID  WOLFE  BROWN,  Official 
Reporter,  National  House  of  Representatives.  An  essay  on  mastery 
by  a  master.  One  of  the  most  important  contributions  to  the  litera- 
ture of  shorthand  pedagogy.  It  deserves  an  attentive  reading  by 
every  thoughtful  teacher  of  phonography.  Paper 35 

Phonography — What  it  Is  and  What  it  Does.  By  BENN  PITMAN. 
Gives  a  concise  account  of  the  nature  and  capabilities  of  phonography 
(including  a  compend  of  the  art,  with  engraved  examples  accompanied 
by  key- words);  also  a  brief  historical  account  of  the  origin  and  devel- 
opment of  phonography  in  England  and  America.  Paper 3 

Special  imprint  editions  for  teachers  at  greatly-reduced  rates. 

Baby  Talk.  A  text-book  for  Babies  on  the  Art  of  Learning  to  Speak. 
By  P.  W.  A  happy  thought,  happily  formulated  by  a  phonographer, 
for  assisting  parents  to  lead  very  young  children,  unconsciously  to 
them,  into  a  knowledge  and  correct  use  of  the  phonetic  elements  of 
English.  Paper 25 

The  Dictater.  A  Collection  of  Graded  Dictation  Exercises  for  the  use 
of  Teachers  and  Students  of  Shorthand.  By  MiNA  WARD.  Consists 
of  exercises  suitable  for  class-room  dictation,  counted  and  arranged  to 
facilitate  reading  at  any  desired  speed.  The  exercises  are  also  ar- 
ranged in  order  according  to  the  average  number  of  syllables  in  the 
words  which  each  contains.  Cloth I  oo 

5 


The  Stenographer's  Dictation  and  Form-Book.  A  guide  to 
practical  work  for  students  in  shorthand  and  typewriting,  containing 
court  records,  business  letters,  and  law  forms.  By  CLAYTON  C.  HERR, 
(Official  Reporter  of  the  McLean  County,  111.,  Circuit  Court  since 
1876,)  and  ANNA  M.  CAMPBELL,  assistant.  Cloth,  262  pp  ......  i  50 

The  Game  of  Shorthand.  An  amusing  and  instructive  game  of  cards 
for  shorthand  writers  as  well  as  for  those  unacquainted  with  the  art. 
While  playing  this  game  all  the  leading  principles  of  Phonography 
can  be  learned.  Can  be  played  by  any  number  of  persons,  and 
delights  young  and  old  alike.  In  box,  together  with  rules  for 
Paying  ..............................................................................................  75 

Divided  Proverbs.  A  new,  amusing  and  instructive  game  for  every- 
body ;  but  especially  intended  for  teachers  and  students  of  the  English, 
German,  French  and  Spanish  languages.  The  game  is  composed  of 
well-selected  proverbs  from  the  languages  above  mentioned.  Each 
proverb  is  divided  into  two  parts,  and  each  part  is  on  a  separate  card. 
Rules  for  playing  a  fascinating  game  accompany  each  set  of  cards,  50 


Periodical  Publications. 

The  Phonographic  Magazine.      Edited  by  JEROME  B.   HOWARD. 
Publisht  once  a  month.     Each  number  contains  beautifully-engraved 
Phonography,  mostly  in  Brief  Reporting  Style,  with  Key  ;  facsimile 
notes  and  portraits  of  celebrated  reporters,  besides  original  and  con- 
tributed articles  of  general  phonographic  interest.     The  Magazine  is 
now  in  its  fifteenth  volume,  is  a  periodical  complement  to  the  text- 
books, and  the  authentic  organ  of  the  Benn  Pitman  system  of  Phonog- 
raphy.    Subscriptions  may  begin  with  any  number.     Specimen  copy 
free.     Price,  per  annum  (invariably  in  advance)  ........................       50 

Vois.  I  to  XI,  in  parts,  each  volume,  $l.oo;  Bound  in  cloth....  2  oo 

Vols.  XII  to  XIV,  in  parts,  50  cents  a  volume  ;  cloth  ................   i  50 

The  Phonographic  Library.     Each  number  contains  a  complete  work 
of  standard  literature  printed  in  Brief  Reporting  Style.     All  back 
numbers  can  be  furnisht  except  those  markt  *. 
Either  series  finely  bound  in  cloth  ................................................   I  75 

Single  numbers  .................................  ,.  ..............................................        10 

First  Series. 
No.  i.  Sir  Roge. 
Kingsley  ;  3.  The  G 
Legend  of  Sleepy 


Second  Series. 

No.  13.  The  Tattler's  Court,  by  Joseph  Addison;  14.  Jackanapes,  by  Juliana 
Horatia  Ewing ;  15.  Theseus,  by  Charles  Kingsley  ;  16.  The  King  of  the  Golden 
River,  by  John  Ruskin ;  17.  Pax  Vobiscum,  by  Henry  Drummond ;  18.  The 
Marquis  Jeanne  Hyacinthe  de  St.  Palaye,  by  J.  H.  Shorthouse  ;  19.  The  Specter 
Bridegroom,  and  The  Devil  and  Tom  Walker,  by  Washington  Irving;  20.  The 
Study  of  the  Law,  by  Timothy  Walker;  21.  Marjorie  Fleming,  by  Dr.  John 
Brown  ;  22.  The  Sons  of  Philemon,  by  Gertrude  Hall ;  23.  Dream  Life  and  Real 
Life,  by  Olive  Schreiner;  24.  The  Lost  Arts,  and  Other  Addresses,  by  Wendell 
Phillips. 


Phonographic  Stationery. 

Reporting  Paper,  per  quire,  6  cents,  postpaid n 

Per  ream,  $l.oo;  five  reams,  $4.50,  sent  by  express  at  purchaser's 
charge.  In  ordering,  specify  whether  single  or  double-line  paper  is 
wanted,  and  whether  for  pen  or  pencil. 

Learner's  Paper,  wide  double  lines,  like  the  ruling  of  the  Phonographic 
Copy-Book.  Can  be  used  with  either  pen  or  pencil,  per  quire,  6  cents, 

postpaid II 

In  quantity,  same  prices  as  Reporting  Paper. 

Reporting  Case.  A  leather  cover  adapted  to  holding  one  or  two  quires 
of  reporting  paper,  which  can  be  removed  when  used  and  the  case 
replenisht.  Indispensable  when  the  reporter,  having  no  table,  is 
obliged  to  rest  his  paper  on  his  knees. 

Sheep I  oo 

Morocco I  50 

The  "Phonographic  Institute"  Note  Book.  200  pages,  4^x8^ 
inches,  pen  or  pencil  paper,  single  or  double  line,  as  ordered.  Boards, 

Each,  15  cents,  postpaid 25 

Per  dozen I   5° 

When  more  than  three  note  books  are  ordered,  they  will  be  sent  by 
express,  at  purchaser's  charge,  unless  otherwise  directed. 

The  "  New  Legal  "  Note  Book.  100  pages,  5^  x  8^  double  col- 
umn, pen  or  pencil  paper,  single  or  double  ruled.  Tag-board  covers, 
bound  with  tape  so  as  to  open  flat.  Each,  10  cents,  postpaid....  18 

Per  dozen i  oo 

When  more  than  six  legal  note  books  are  ordered,  they  will  be  sent 
by  express,  at  purchaser's  charge,  unless  otherwise  directed. 

The  "Phonographic  Institute"  Steel  Pen,  expressly  manufactured 
for  us  for  phonographic  writing  and  reporting.  These  pens  have 
especially  fine,  smooth  points,  and  pleasant,  uniform  action.  The 
peculiar  shape  is  such  that  a  great  deal  of  ink  is  held  by  the  pen  with- 

7 


out  danger  of  dropping,  thus  reducing  to  a  minimum  the  frequency  of 
dipping  the  pen. 

No.  i,  fine  points. 

No.  2,  medium  points. 

No.  3,  coarse  points. 

Per  dozen,  10  cents ;   per  gross I  oo 

The   "Phonographic    Institute"    Lead    Pencil   (actual   diameter 
shown  in  cut),  made  expressly  for  us,  with  the  finest  grade  of  black, 


tough  lead,  and  especially  recommended  for  phonographer's  use. 
Per  dozen,  50  cents  ;    per  gross 5  oo 

Phonographic  Tracts.     For  distribution  by  teachers  and  others. 

No.  i.  What  They  Say  about   Phonography — Opinions  of  Fifty   Eminent 
Men  and  Journals. 

2.  Some  Reasons  why  You  should  Learn  Phonography. 

3.  Can  Phonography  be  Self-Taught  ? 

4.  The  Long  Gains  of  Shorthand. 

5.  Phonography  in  the  Public  Schools. 

6.  Shorthand  for  Clergymen. 

7.  Modifications  of  Phonography — Wise  and  Otherwise. 

8.  Points  of  Difference  between  the   Benn   Pitman   and   the   Present 

English  Style  of  Phonography. 

9.  What  Official  Reporters  Say  about  the  Benn  Pitman  System. 

10.  The  Educational  Value  of  Shorthand. 

11.  What   Some   Leading   Schools  and    Colleges   Say  about    the    Benn 

Pitman  System. 

Each,  per  100,  10  cents  ;  per  thousand,  75  cents  ;  with  imprint,   I  oo 
Copies  of  this  Catalog,  for  distribution,  free. 

The  works  herein  described  are  for  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  will  b« 
forwarded  by  us,  uostpaid  (except  when  postage  charges  are  given), 
on  receipt  of  the  prices  specified.  Safe  delivery  by  mail  is  guaran- 
teed only  when  order  is  accompanied  by  eight  cents  additional  foi 
registration  fee.  No  goods  will  be  sent  by  express  C.  O.  D.  unless 
order  is  accompanied  by  at  least  one-fourth  of  the  price,  to  insure 
payment  of  charges.  Teachers  of  Phonography  and  Booksellers  sup- 
plied at  a  liberal  discount. 

All  orders  must  be  accompanied  by  a  remittance.  Send  post-office  money 
order,  express  money  order,  New  York  or  Cincinnati  draft. 

N.  B. — Local  checks  will  not  be  accepted. 

Address,    THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  INSTITUTE  COMPANY, 

CINCINNATI,  O. 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000  735  457     4 


